181-10062 3-06-2015 HB PVmasterII-III User-Manual en

PVMaster II and PVMaster III
operation and configuration

User manual
For users
–– Observer
–– Fitter
–– Expert

NOTE
This manual describes the operator application (web application) for all
PVMaster II and PVMaster III units. The general term „PVMaster“ is used in
the following in order to simplify the whole documentation.
No.: 181-10062
Date: 06/2015
Revision: 3
Translation: 0.3
Software versions
Component Version Date

Main controller (TC) V001.07-08 03/2015
Web interface V001.07-00 11/2014
2 PVMaster

Table of contents
1 Notes on the documentation 7
1.1 Annotation practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.1.1 Safety information and warning notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.2 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Formatting styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Target group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Other applicable documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Safety 9
2.1 Basic safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1.1 Before starting work on the PVMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.2 During work on the PVMaster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.3 During operation of the PVMaster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 Introduction 11
3.1 General information about the application manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.2 User interfaces of the PVMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 Operator application (web application) 13
4.1 Using the operator application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4.1.1 Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1.2 Starting the operator application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1.2.1 Information about the browser cache and
application memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.3 Control elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1.4 Compact view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2 Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2.1 Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.2 User levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.2.1 Authentication/authorisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.3 Selection of destination device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.4 Break in connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.5 Software release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.6 Display and configuration text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.6.1 Display text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.6.2 Configuration text box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.7 Saving device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2.8 Completion of a unit restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PVMaster Table of contents 3

4.2.9 Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.10 Device states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3 Menu options and user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.3.1 Overview (start user interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3.2 Status and values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.3.2.1 State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.3.2.2 InterCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.3.2.3 PV generator (DC side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3.2.3.1 DC values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3.2.3.2 Generator scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.3.2.3.3 String currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3.2.4 Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.3.2.4.1 AC values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.3.2.4.2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.3.2.4.3 Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.3.2.4.4 Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.3.2.4.5 Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.3.2.5 Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.3.2.6 Inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.3.2.6.1 Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.3.2.6.2 Digital outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.3.2.6.3 Analogue inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.3.3 History and statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.3.1 Day. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.3.1.1 Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.3.1.2 String currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.3.3.2 Month. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.3.3.3 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.3.3.4 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.3.4 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.3.4.1 Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.3.4.1.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.3.4.1.2 System clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.3.4.1.3 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.3.4.2 Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.3.4.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.3.4.2.2 Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.3.4.2.3 Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.3.4.2.4 Insulation monitoring
(or monitoring the grounding resistance). . 136
4.3.4.2.5 Limit (infeed/grid security management). . 141
4.3.4.3 Grid stabilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.3.4.3.1 Voltage (reactive power control for
static grid voltage stabilisation). . . . . . . . . 147
4.3.4.3.2 Frequency stabilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.3.4.3.3 LVRT (dynamic grid stabilisation) . . . . . . . 159
4 Table of contents PVMaster

4.3.4.4 In-/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

4.3.4.4.1 Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.3.4.4.2 Digital outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.3.4.4.3 Analogue inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.3.4.5 InterCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.3.4.5.1 Administration of the InterCOM device list.204
4.3.4.5.2 Optional InterCOM functions. . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.3.4.5.3 Synchronisation and
“Single MPPT mode”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.3.4.6 String currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.3.4.7 RDT (remote data transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4.3.4.8 External derating
(controlled reduction of AC active power). . . . . . . . . . 217
4.3.4.9 Parameter editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.3.5 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.3.5.1 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.3.5.2 Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4.3.5.3 State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.3.5.4 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5 7-segment displays and buttons 237
5.1 Use of 7-segment displays and buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5.1.1 Display of current operating state of the device. . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.1.2 Network settings (IP address). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5.1.3 Device address for InterCOM device intercommunication. . . . 243
5.1.4 Manual malfunction acknowledgement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.1.5 Software update from the microSD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6 Index 247
PVMaster Table of contents 5

6 Table of contents PVMaster

Annotation practices
1 Notes on the documentation
1.1 Annotation practices
1.1.1 Safety information and warning notices

The safety information and warning notices are classified as follows in terms of
danger levels:
DANGER
Failure to heed warnings flagged up by the word DANGER will always lead to
serious or fatal injuries.
WARNING
Failure to heed information flagged up by the word WARNING may lead to
serious or fatal injuries.
CAUTION
Failure to heed information flagged up by the word CAUTION may lead to
minor injuries.
ATTENTION
Failure to heed information flagged up by the word ATTENTION may lead to
damage to equipment.
The safety information and warning notices are accompanied by the following
signs:
This sign acts as a warning of a danger area.

An explanation of the type and source of the danger is given in the
safety information / warning notice.
This sign acts as a warning of dangerous electrical voltage levels.

An explanation of the source of the danger is given in the safety
information / warning notice.
This sign acts as a warning of a hot surface.

This sign acts as a warning of non-ionising electromagnetic radia-

tion.
1.1.2 General information

NOTE
Sign indicating that this is important information.
REFERENCE
Reference to further documentation.
PVMaster Notes on the documentation 7

Formatting styles
1.2 Formatting styles

Terms written in quotation marks are "designations" that appear on the user
interface.
1.3 Target group

This application manual is aimed at laypersons and professional experts (plant
operators, fitters, etc.) who are responsible for commissioning, general opera-
tional monitoring and control, configuration and the completion of diagnoses in
the event of malfunctions in the PVMaster devices.
The user interfaces of the PVMaster have different user levels with different ac-
cess rights in order to assign certain access options to users according to their
respective roles.
CAUTION
Laypersons can only operate the operator application at the "Observer" user
level.
Information on the user levels can be found in section 4.2.2, p. 19.

The qualified professionals must read the product documentation. The national
accident prevention regulations (e.g. BGV A3 in Germany) must be complied
with.
Not all of the functions described in this user manual are available for each
PVMaster device type. Information and procedures that only apply to certain
PVMaster device types are marked accordingly.
1.4 Other applicable documents

NOTE
This manual describes the operator application (web application) for all PV-
Master II and PVMaster III units. The general term „PVMaster“ is used in the
following in order to simplify the whole documentation.
Further information can be found in the other applicable documents:
Document Article number Contents
PVMaster II TT installation manual 181-10053 Installation, hardware
PVMaster II EN installation manual 181-10054 Installation, hardware
PVMaster II EM installation manual 181-10055 Installation, hardware
Cooling system operating manual 181-10052 Installation, hardware
String Combiner Box operating manual 181-10034 Installation, hardware
PVMaster II data export interface 181-10063 Software
PVMaster II specification for Modbus TCP 181-10064 Software
8 Notes on the documentation PVMaster

Basic safety instructions
2 Safety
2.1 Basic safety instructions
2.1.1 Before starting work on the PVMaster

WARNING
Risk of death, serious injury and/or damage to equipment if safety in-
structions are not heeded!
• Please read the product documentation first.
• Please read and follow the safety instructions.
WARNING
Risk of death, serious injury and/or damage to equipment if safety in-
structions are not heeded!
Only qualified and trained electrical engineers may work on the equipment.
Those operating medium-voltage switchgear must have the necessary authori-
sation to work on medium-voltage switchgear.
• Comply with the national accident prevention regulations.
2.1.2 During work on the PVMaster

DANGER
Danger of electric shock from live parts of the device!
Up to three separately fused voltage supplies can be connected to the
PVMaster:
1. DC line from photovoltaic generator
2. AC line to supply network
3. External auxiliary voltage supply
• Before starting work, make sure that the system is not live.
DANGER
Danger of electric shock from live sub-assemblies!
The DC link capacitors of the inverter are still charged after switch-off.
• Before working on the system, wait until the capacitors have discharged
and make sure the equipment is no longer live.
DANGER
Photovoltaic modules are energised as soon as they are exposed to light.
• Before working on the system, take the necessary measures and make
sure that the system is not live.
DANGER
Before working on the system, carry out the following five steps for your safety:
1. Disconnect
2. Provide safeguards to prevent unintentional restart
3. Verify isolation from supply at all poles
4. Earth and short-circuit (not on DC side)
5. Cover or encase any neighbouring parts which are still live
It is possible to omit the earthing and short-circuiting in systems with rated volt-
ages of up to 1000 V as long as safety rules 1 to 3 are followed.
PVMaster Safety 9
Intended use
CAUTION
Risk of burns from hot components!
The heat sink of the inverter, the inductor, the transformer, the filters and the
fuses get hot during operation.
• Make sure that the components have cooled down to room temperature
before starting work.
• Alternatively, wear protective clothing and gloves when working near hot
components.
CAUTION
Risk of burns from hot cooling agent!
The cooling agent reaches high temperatures during operation.
• Make sure that the cooling agent has cooled down to room temperature
before starting work.
ATTENTION
Risk of damage to equipment if instructions are not followed!
• Compliance with the connection conditions and technical specifications is
mandatory.
• Pay attention to the standards for electrical installation, e.g. conductor
cross-sectional area, protective earth and earth connection.
• Follow the installation instructions relevant to the specific country in any
given case and comply with the requirements set out by the local energy
supply company.
• Do not touch electronic components or contacts. Components can be de-
stroyed by electrostatic discharge.
2.1.3 During operation of the PVMaster

CAUTION
Risk of damage to hearing from high noise levels!
• Wear ear defenders if exposed to the noise for a long time.
CAUTION
Hazard posed by electromagnetic fields!
Potential health hazard for people with pacemakers, metallic implants or hear-
ing aids.
• Such people should consult their doctor before working on a system with
inverters.
2.2 Intended use

The PVMaster operator application and the other user interfaces of the PVMas-
ter described in this manual are used for general operational monitoring, opera-
tional control, configuration, commissioning and the completion of diagnoses.
Any other or further use is considered incorrect. The manufacturer/supplier is
not liable for any damage resulting from incorrect use. The operator alone bears
the risk.
The intended use also includes observing the manual.
10 Safety PVMaster
General information about the application manual
3 Introduction
3.1 General information about the application manual

A core element of the application manual is the detailed description of the op-
erator application with its options. The structure of section 4.3, p. 32 corre-
sponds to the structure of the main menu of the PVMaster operator application.
Access rights within the operator application are controlled across four user lev-
els (observer, Fitter, expert and administrator). Certain functions or entire menu
options are available or hidden depending on the user level activated.
Example: Fitter Within this application manual, descriptions of functions for higher user levels
are marked with the user level required for the function in question to the left of
the descriptive text.
NOTE
The functions of all PVMaster device variants are described in this application
manual. The scope of functions may differ from this description depending on
the PVMaster device type. The description of the functions given in this appli-
cation manual does not constitute a guarantee of properties for your PVMaster
devices.
Example: PVMaster TT only Within the application manual, descriptions that only apply to certain PVMaster
device types are marked accordingly to the left of the descriptive text in ques-
tion.
3.2 User interfaces of the PVMaster

The PVMaster offers the following user interfaces for general operational moni-
toring, operational control, configuration, commissioning and the completion of
diagnoses.
Tab. 3.1: User interfaces

User interfaces Options and significance
Application for easy operational control and monitor-
ing, retrieval and display of historical recorded data,
displaying and editing the configuration, commission-
ing and completing detailed diagnoses in their full
extent, and for completing software updates. Several
Operator application PVMaster devices can also easily be operated in one
(web application) network with this operator application. The PC for run-
ning the operator application can be connected locally
to the device or network or can be operated conveni-
ently through a corresponding remote data transmis-
sion via the internet. The use of the operator applica-
tion is described in detail in section 4, p. 13.
1) Only available for PVMaster low-voltage devices (TT and EN variants)
2) Only available for PVMaster devices without 4.3" touch screen (EM variant)
3) Available as an option
PVMaster Introduction 11
User interfaces of the PVMaster
User interfaces Options and significance

Display of current operating state, display and chang-
ing of IP address setting (network) and the commu-
nication address setting for InterCOM device inter-
communication between several PVMaster devices.
7-segment displays + In addition, active error states can be acknowledged
buttons manually and software updates can be initiated from
the microSD card. The aforementioned functions are
only available for the local device with this user inter-
face. The use of the 7-segment displays and buttons is
described in section 5, p. 237.
Display of the key actual values, retrieval and repre-
4.3" touch screen in sentation of historical recorded data, display and con-
enclosure door 1) figuration of the main device parameters and comple-
tion of basic diagnoses.
Release switch as button for hardware-based release
Release switch with
of active infeed operation. An integrated status lamp
status lamp in enclo-
displays the current status of the hardware release at
sure door 2)
all times.
Fully installed control centre PC for easy running of
the operator application (web application) for several
PVMaster devices within a network and more secure
completion of software updates by means of remote
Control centre PC with
data transmission (recommended for non-secure and
15" touch screen 3)
slow remote data transmissions). Further operating
tools with extended diagnosis functions (e.g. software
oscilloscope) make it easier to diagnose errors by
means of remote data transmission.
1) Only available for PVMaster low-voltage devices (TT and EN variants)
2) Only available for PVMaster devices without 4.3" touch screen (EM variant)
3) Available as an option
12 Introduction PVMaster
Using the operator application
4 Operator application (web application)
4.1 Using the operator application

The operator application is used for easy operator guidance and control, calling
up and displaying historical recorded data, displaying and changing the con-
figuration, commissioning and carrying out detailed diagnoses, and performing
software updates. Several PVMaster devices can also easily be operated in one
network with this operator application.
4.1.1 Requirements
A PC with an internet browser is required to run the operator application. The
minimum requirements for the PC for running the operator application are listed
in Tab. 4.1.
Tab. 4.1: Minimum requirements for running the operator application

Component Requirements
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 8
Browser e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
Microsoft Silverlight Plug-In (version 5 or higher).
An internet connection may be required when the
Plug-in
operator application is first started in order to install a
missing plug-in.
The PC for running the operator application can be connected locally to the
device or network or it is operated easily through a corresponding remote data
transmission via the internet.
NOTE
A crossover Ethernet network cable (crossover cable) may be required to
establish a local connection between the PC and the device. Some network
adapters or network devices support automatic crossover (Auto-MDI-X), so a
non-crossover network cable may be sufficient.
4.1.2 Starting the operator application

The operator application is called up by entering the IP address of the device in
the address line of the internet browser.
If the network settings of the destination device are not changed (for initial state
as supplied, see also Chapter 5.1.2, p. 13), the address entered in the address
line will be, for example:
http://192.168.36.1 or 192.168.36.1
If the operator application is first called up with the IP address of
the device in the internet browser used, or if its browser cache
was first deleted (section 4.1.2.1, p. 15), a display of the load-
ing process will first appear. The loading process can take up to
a few minutes depending on the quality of the connection, e.g. for
slow data transmission speeds (GSM etc.). The loading process is
significantly quicker for a local connection.
PVMaster Operator application (web application) 13

NOTE
If the operator application cannot be started in the internet browser, the set-
tings of the network adapter used for the local PC should be checked and
changed if necessary (e.g. the set IP address range). Changes to the settings
of the internet browser may also be necessary (settings of the local network,
proxy server settings, etc.).
A start dialogue then appears to automatically check the quality of the connec-
tion or manually select the change of user interface.
NOTE
If the operator application has already previously been called up with an identi-
cal IP address and if the browser cache has not been deleted (section 4.1.2.1,
p. 15), the loading process will be omitted and the start dialogue will be
displayed directly.
While the start dialogue is being displayed, there is

an automatic check of the connection quality. The
connection quality identified is displayed accordingly.
Regardless of the quality of the connection identified,
there is an automatic change of view within the opera-
tor application after a short period of time. Prior to the
automatic changeover, the change of view can also be
performed manually by clicking on the Compact or Full
links.
If when the start dialogue is displayed the operator application identifies an

extremely slow connection with the destination device, the device will automati-
cally change to a basic compact view after a short period of time (section 4.1.3,
p. 16). The basic compact view can also be called up by manually selecting
the Compact link in the start dialogue, regardless of the quality of the connec-
tion to the destination device identified.
If the quality of the connection is good, the device automatically changes to the
full operator application (from section 4.2, p. 18). The full operator application
can also be called up by manually selecting the link Full in the start dialogue,
regardless of the quality of the connection to the destination device identified.
NOTE
The loading process for the full operator application (from section 4.2, p. 18)
can mean corresponding waiting times if the connection quality is poor. If,
however, the operator application has already been called up with an identi-
cal IP address and the browser cache has not been deleted (section 4.1.2.1,
p. 15), the loading process is omitted and the start user interface for the full
operator application (section 4.3.1, p. 39) is displayed directly.
14 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

4.1.2.1 Information about the browser cache and application memory

All files required to run the operator application are initially located on the
microSD card in the destination device. During the first start process of the
operator application, these requisite files for running the application are first
downloaded in the internet browser and saved in the browser cache. There may
therefore be corresponding waiting times during the loading process, depending
on the quality of the connection between the local PC and destination device.
To minimise waiting times when running the operator application again, the op-
erator application is loaded from the browser cache once the necessary files are
present in the browser cache. In addition to the browser cache, the application
memory of MS Silverlight is used to save authentication data (password for user
levels, see section 4.2.2.1, p. 21), for example.
NOTE
The caching of the operator application to minimise loading times and the
caching of the user data (e.g. for authentication at higher user levels) can only
be performed correctly if the corresponding settings in the internet browser
(temporary files, no automatic deletion, etc.) are activated and the MS Silver-
light application memory has been activated.
NOTE
The caching of the operator application and user data (e.g. for authentication
at higher user levels, see section 4.2.2.1, p. 21) is performed separately for
each connection, i.e. dependent on the IP address of the destination device.
For this reason, the operator application is completely reloaded next time it is
started following changes to the IP address of the destination device, for ex-
ample, if there are no application data in the browser cache for the connection
with this IP address. The caching of the operator application is also version-
specific; it is therefore completely reloaded as necessary following a software
update of the destination device (see section 4.3.4.1.1, p. 103).
NOTE
If there are problems with running the operator application, the temporary files
should be deleted manually via the internet browser settings and the applica-
tion memory should be deleted via the MS Silverlight configuration.

4.1.3 Control elements

Within the operator application, various display and control elements are used.
The special features and differences between the individual control elements
are explained below.
Tab. 4.2: Control elements within the operator application

Designation 1)
Examples Description
, , , , A status field is only used to display the cur-
Status field
rent status.
, , , , ...
Read-only text box (see section 4.2.6.1,
Display text box 2)
p. 25)
Text box with input function (see sec-
Configuration text box 3)
tion 4.2.6.2, p. 25)
Icons are grey symbols for displaying status

Icons information. Within the icons, current values
(information symbols) or status information are displayed. Icons do
not have a button function.
Buttons allow functions to be performed

manually. Some buttons have a toggle func-
tion (toggle button). The status of the func-
Buttons
tion is frequently indicated in a status field
within the button. Some special buttons are
displayed as red symbols.
Link buttons are red symbols with a button

function and are used to navigate more eas-
Link buttons
ily to the relevant menu options for a detailed
view.
1) Further control elements are used (selection box, option field, activation field, etc.).
2) For details on the display text box see section 4.2.6.1, p. 25
3) For details on the configuration text box see section 4.2.6.2, p. 25
4.1.4 Compact view

If the operator application identifies a slow connection with the destination
device during the start dialogue (section 4.1.2, p. 13), the device will automat-
ically change to a basic compact view after a short period of time (Fig. 4.1). The
basic compact view can also be called up by manually selecting the Compact
link in the start dialogue, regardless of the quality of the connection to the desti-
nation device identified.
NOTE
Users are often only interested in information on the current device status and
a few key current values, as well as the number of new device malfunctions or
unusual events that have occurred. With extremely slow device connections in
particular, the compact view option is useful, as the loading process for the full
user interface can take a long time for very slow device connections if the files
for the full user interface are not already in the browser cache.

The main information on the current device status and the key current values
are shown within the compact view (Fig. 4.1). Device settings cannot be entered
or changed in the compact view, but the full user interface can be called up in
the compact view via the button (2).
3 4
7 8 9
5 6 2
Fig. 4.1: Compact view for displaying the device status and key current values
1. The IP address and serial number of the destination device are displayed
in the lower section of the compact view, the quality of the connection with
the destination device is shown in a bar chart and the system clock of the
destination device is indicated
2. Button for calling up the full user interface
3. Display of current device status in the PVMaster traffic light display (sec-
tion 4.2.10, p. 28)
4. Display of state of software release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24). In the
compact view, the state of the software release switch is merely displayed
and cannot be changed
5. Number of unconfirmed or new event messages (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229)
6. Number of unconfirmed or new event messages regarding device malfunc-
tions that have occurred (section 4.3.5.1, p. 221)
7. Display of key current DC values (in PV generator), the current DC voltage
[V] and the current DC current [A]
8. Display of total yield [kWh] of the target device achieved so far
9. Display of key current AC values (grid measured values), current supply
voltage [V], current grid current [A], current AC power [kW] and the current
percentage infeed capacity based on the rated power of the device

Operating concept
4.2 Operating concept

Fig. 4.2 shows the structure of the operator application user interface. The user
interface always looks the same regardless of the user level selected.
11 6 7 8 9
10
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.2: Operator application user interface

The following elements are displayed in the bottom main bar:
1. Selection box for displaying and changing the language setting (sec-
tion 4.2.1)
2. Selection box for displaying and changing the user level (section 4.2.2)
3. Button for deleting authentication data (section 4.2.2.1, p. 21)
4. Selection box with IP addresses for toggling the destination device (sec-
tion 4.2.3, p. 23)
5. Serial number and system clock (date and time) of the destination device
The following elements are displayed in the top main bar:
6. Button for saving changes to the device settings (section 4.2.7, p. 26)
7. Button for manually restarting the device (section 4.2.8, p. 26)
8. Display of current device statuses in traffic light format with four coloured
lights and as a plain text message (section 4.2.10, p. 28)
9. Software release switch for active infeed operation (section 4.2.5, p. 24)
10. Navigation within the operator application is performed with the main menu
in the tree view permanently displayed on the left-hand side (section 4.2.9,
p. 27)
11. To simplify navigation, the "Back" button can be used to return to the menu
options previously used

Operating concept
4.2.1 Language setting

The local language used can be set via the selection box (1) in Fig. 4.2. The
language setting can be toggled at any time in any operating state and at any
user level (including at the lowest user level "Observer"). All text elements in the
user interface currently open are translated dynamically immediately after the
setting is toggled; a manual restart of the device with the "Restart" button (sec-
tion 4.2.8, p. 26) is not required. Manual saving of the device parameters with
the "Save" button (section 4.2.7, p. 26) is also not required, as any change to
the language setting with the selection box is automatically stored in the device,
so that the last language setting selected is automatically activated next time
the operator application is opened.
NOTE
The local language used is only automatically saved after the language setting
is changed via the selection box (1) in Fig. 4.2 if the software release switch is
deactivated (section 4.2.5, p. 24).
NOTE
Changes to the language setting can also be made via the 4.3" touch screen
(Tab. 3.1, p. 11), where present. A change to the language setting with the
selection box (1) in Fig. 4.2 in the operator application simultaneously results
in the language setting of the 4.3" touch screen, where present, being toggled.
NOTE
If the language setting you require is not available, contact the support team at
LTI ReEnergy GmbH.
4.2.2 User levels

The user level is selected via the selection box (2) in Fig. 4.2. Various menu
groups and menu options in the main menu and various elements in the respec-
tive user interfaces of the menu options are available depending on the user
level selected (section 4.2.9, p. 27). The button (3) in Fig. 4.2 can be used to
delete authentication data entered for higher user levels from the temporary ap-
plication memory (see section 4.2.2.1, p. 21).
Observer The lowest user level "Observer" is activated as standard to start with each time
the operator application is opened. Authentication through entry of a password
is not required for this user level. In general, no changes to device settings or
device states (apart from a few exceptions, see below) are possible at this user
level. The following options are available:
–– Display of current device states and current actual values
–– Retrieval, visualisation and saving of historic data from the internal data
logger, such as day history data, string current values, energy data (sec-
tion 4.3.3, p. 86) and status changes (section 4.3.5.3, p. 231)
–– Display of malfunction and event history, setting of delivery confirmations
and manual acknowledgements of error states (section 4.3.5.1, p. 221 and
section 4.3.5.2, p. 229)
–– Display of key device settings (configuration of inputs and outputs, configu-
ration of monitoring, network support functions, etc.). Changes to device
settings are not possible at this user level
–– Change to the language setting (section 4.2.1, p. 19)

Operating concept
Fitter All options from the "Observer" user level are available at the "Fitter" user level.
In addition, the device can be fully configured and commissioned at this level.
The use of this user level requires authentication by entering a password. The
following options are also possible:
–– Software release (section 4.2.5, p. 24) can be switched on and off to acti-
vate or deactivate the active infeed operation
–– Saving of device options (section 4.2.7, p. 26) and restart of device (sec-
tion 4.2.8, p. 26)
–– Change of device settings: system clock (section 4.3.4.1.2, p. 110),
network settings (section 4.3.4.1.3, p. 112), initialisation of grid monitor-
ing by selecting country code (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124), change of rated
network frequency and limitation of total power (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115),
configuration of internal data logger and remote data transmission (sec-
tion 4.3.4.7, p. 214), insulation monitor (section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136), limita-
tion of power as part of infeed management and Limit (by grid operator)
(section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141), network support functions (section 4.3.4.3,
p. 147), input and output functions (section 4.3.4.4, p. 166), communica-
tion between inverters (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198), string current measure-
ment (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210)
–– Administration of energy data and configuration of energy determination and
conversion factors (section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118)
–– Completion of software updates (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115)
–– Extended functions: Calculation of current generator curve (characteris-
tic curve measurement function) and saving of measured values identi-
fied (section 4.3.2.3.2, p. 55), check function for digital outputs (sec-
tion 4.3.5.4, p. 234), display of average string current values for further
processing in an online portal (section 4.3.2.3.3, p. 56), etc.
Expert This user level is reserved for select experts. The use of this user level requires
authentication by entering a password. The following options are also possible:
–– Manual control options: Freezing MPP tracking and manual specifica-
tion of DC voltage setpoints and skipping the power measurement (sec-
tion 4.3.2.3.1, p. 52)
–– Change to additional device settings: Change to rated supply voltage and
user-defined grid monitoring settings (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124), user-de-
fined settings for insulation monitor (section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136), user-defined
settings for dynamic network support functions (section 4.3.4.3.3, p. 159),
advanced settings for communication between inverters (section 4.3.4.5,
p. 198), advanced settings for remote data transmission (section 4.3.4.7,
p. 214), configuration of automatic acknowledgement of malfunctions (sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221)
Administrator At this user level, special menu options are available that are only used by LTI
ReEnergy GmbH as part of the production and testing of the PVMaster (e.g.
calibration, etc.).
NOTE
Access to the "Administrator" user level is reserved for LTI ReEnergy GmbH
and the relevant authentication data for this user level are not published. The
corresponding menu options and user interfaces at this user level will not be
discussed further in this application manual.

Operating concept
4.2.2.1 Authentication/authorisation
When switching to a higher user level in the selection box (2) in Fig. 4.2,
p. 18, a dialogue box (Fig. 4.3) may first be displayed indicating that the
authorisation to switch to the selected user level does not currently exist. To
continue with the authentication, confirm the dialogue box with the "OK" button.
Fig. 4.3: D
ialogue box in the absence of authorisation for the user level re-
quested
A further dialogue box (Fig. 4.4) for authentication is then displayed. This dia-
logue box shows an activation code generated specifically for the destination
device.
In order to obtain the requisite access password for the requested user level of
the destination device, contact the support team at LTI ReEnergy GmbH and
enter your contact details, the displayed activation code, the required user level
and the required period of validity of the access password, so that the requisite
access password can be generated for you.
Fig. 4.4: D
ialogue box for displaying the activation code and for entering the
access password
NOTE
Make a note of the access password when you get it in case you need it later;
you may be prompted to enter the access password again in order to authen-
ticate access to higher user levels (e.g. after a software update of the destina-
tion device or following deletion of the temporary application memory).

Operating concept
NOTE
Access passwords are always issued for a limited period of time (maximum
of 365 days) and specifically for the requested user level. Access passwords
are generally also linked to the MAC address of the destination device and are
therefore only valid for the destination device for which the access password
was generated. In other words, access passwords must as a rule be requested
separately for each new destination device. In exceptional cases, access
passwords that are not linked to a specific destination device can be issued
(e.g. for users of a number of devices). Please contact the support team at LTI
ReEnergy GmbH to discuss this.
Once you have received the access password, please enter it in the input field
of the dialogue box (Fig. 4.4) to authenticate your access and confirm the entry
by clicking on the "OK" button.
Fig. 4.5: Information on the access password
Once a valid access password has been correctly entered, a window (Fig. 4.5)
appears with information about the access password entered (MAC address
of the destination device, validity not linked to a specific destination device,
maximum user level and period of validity). Confirm this window by pressing the
"OK" button.
The user level can then be changed accordingly with the selection box (2) in
Fig. 4.2, p. 18.
NOTE
Upon entry of the authentication data, it is stored in the MS Silverlight applica-
tion memory of the PC used, so that the access password does not have to
be entered when changing the user level next time the operator application is
opened. The MS Silverlight application memory must be activated for this (see
also 4.1.2.1, p. 15).
NOTE
If the operator application is used on a PC that is publicly accessible to other
people, for example, the authentication data should be deleted manually in the
operator application after use by pressing the button (3) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18.
NOTE
All temporarily saved authentication data will be lost as soon as the MS Sil-
verlight application memory (see also section 4.1.2.1, p. 15) is deleted. In
this case, access passwords may have to be entered separately for each new
destination device to change the user level.

Operating concept
4.2.3 Selection of destination device

Connections can be established with several PVMaster devices simultaneously
in the internet browser by opening the operator application separately for each
destination device (e.g. by opening several tabs in the internet browser). How-
ever, this procedure may involve long waiting times for the loading processes of
the operator application (see section 4.1.2, p. 13), particularly if the quality of
the connection with the destination devices is poor.
If there are several PVMaster devices in a shared local network, it is possible to
quickly switch the communication to other other destination devices in this net-
work using the selection box (4) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18. Repeat loading processes
of the operator application are eliminated and waiting times are minimised.
The communication is toggled by selecting the corre-
sponding IP address of the desired destination device
in the selection box. The IP addresses for all entries in
the network list are displayed here. The IP address for
the destination device from which the operator appli-
cation was opened is highlighted accordingly.
If the IP address of the desired destination device is not displayed in the se-
lection box (4) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18, the connection route must be added to the
network list. The configuration of network settings and the administration of the
network list are described in detail in section 4.3.4.1.3, p. 112.
NOTE
Regardless of whether the connection to the destination is made locally or
through appropriate remote data transmission using the virtual IP addresses
of the destination devices, the real IP addresses of the destination devices are
always displayed in the selection box (4) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18.
4.2.4 Break in connection

If there is a long interval before the user performs any action within the opera-
tor application, or if the browser window is minimised while running the opera-
tor application, for example, communication with the destination device will be
temporarily deactivated after several minutes.
NOTE
This break in operation of the operator application serves to reduce the load
on the destination device and, where applicable, remote data transmission,
particularly if several users regularly establish connections with the destination
device.
If this break in operation of the operator application is activated, the correspond-
ing dialogue box (Fig. 4.6) is displayed.
Fig. 4.6: Window following break in operation
Clicking on the "OK" button in the dialogue box ends the break in operation
of the operator application and communication with the destination device is
resumed.

Operating concept
4.2.5 Software release switch

To start active infeed operation, the software release switch in the top main bar
of the user interface (see (9) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18) must be activated. The status
of the software release switch is displayed at all times at each user level.
From Fitter This switch to release or deactivate the active infeed operation can be operated
from the "Fitter" user level upwards.
If the button-operated software release is deactivated, active

infeed operation and the main contactor are immediately deac-
tivated if the active infeed operation was previously active.
Active infeed operation is released by activating the software
release with the button. The main contactor is activated and
the active infeed operation is activated as soon all the contin-
gent conditions (see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41) are met.
The software release switch functions in the same way as a real switch. Its
status is generally only changed by manually operating the button and remains
unchanged when the device is restarted (section 4.2.8, p. 26), for example.
NOTE
Changing device settings with the relevant configuration text boxes (sec-
tion 4.2.6.2, p. 25) is in some cases only possible when the software release
switch is deactivated. Permanent saving of changes to device settings (sec-
tion 4.2.7) and manual device restarts (section 4.2.8, p. 26) are generally
only possible when the software release switch is deactivated.

Operating concept
4.2.6 Display and configuration text box

Within the user interfaces for the respective menu options, a distinction is made
between various text boxes for displaying pure actual values and displaying and
changing device settings or setpoints. The function and appearance of the text
boxes differ accordingly.
4.2.6.1 Display text box
Within the respective user interfaces of the operator applica-

tion, current actual values are displayed in special display text
boxes. Nothing can be entered in these display text boxes,
they are merely used for displaying data. The refresh rate of
the values displayed within the display text boxes depends on
the quantity of values to be displayed on the respective active
user interface.
4.2.6.2 Configuration text box
Unlike current actual values, device parameters and setpoints

are always displayed in a configuration text box. The con-
figuration text box can be locked or enabled for entries and
changes. A configuration text box is, for example, locked for
entries and changes if the user level currently active does not
have the authorisation to change the value in question. In the
case of certain device parameters, it may also be necessary,
for example, for the software release switch (section 4.2.5,
p. 24) to be deactivated.
From Fitter As soon as a configuration text box has been enabled for entries and changes,
the displayed value can be changed accordingly. Once the new value has been
entered, the change must be confirmed with "Enter". The validity of the entered
value is checked accordingly.
If the last entry made within the enabled configuration text

box was invalid (e.g. outside the permitted value range or
impermissible non-numerical entries), the last valid value is
displayed again and the invalid entry is displayed with a red
frame around the configuration box (until a valid value is en-
tered again).
Once a valid entry has been made in an enabled configuration

text box, the new value is displayed in the configuration text
box and the valid entry is briefly displayed with a green frame
around the configuration text box.
Once a valid entry has been made in an enabled configuration text box for edit-
ing a device setting, the "Save" button (6) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18 is enabled in order
to indicate to the user that there is a change to the device settings that has not
yet been permanently saved (see section 4.2.7, p. 26). Exceptions to this, for
example, are certain configuration text boxes for specifying setpoints.
NOTE
Depending on the respective unit parameter, changes made via the relevant
configuration text box are adopted directly in operation and become effective.
However, some parameter changes first need to be changed permanently
(section 4.2.7, p. 26) and the unit then needs to be restarted (section 4.2.8,
p. 26) before these changes take effect.

Operating concept
4.2.7 Saving device settings

From Fitter Changes to device settings are made by entering values in the corresponding
configuration text boxes (section 4.2.6.2, p. 25). If changes are not perma-
nently saved, any changes to the device settings will be lost after a restart of
the unit. Changes to device settings are permanently saved by clicking on the
"Save" button (6) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18.
The "Save" button is locked for the time being if the device
settings are not changed and can not be actuated in this
state.
The "Save" button is enabled as soon as at least one unit
parameter has been changed through a configuration text
box (section 4.2.6.2, p. 25). The enabling of the "Save"
button is used to indicate to the user that a change to the
device settings has not yet been permanently saved.
The "Save" button remains in this enabled state until the changes to the device
settings have been saved. However, changes can only be saved when the soft-
ware release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) is deactivated. When the enabled
"Save" button is actuated with the software release switch activated, changes
to device settings are not permanently saved. This is then indicated in a corre-
sponding information window (Fig. 4.7). Successful saving of the changes to the
device settings is indicated to the user through a visible change in the status of
the "Save" button (locked).
From Fitter
Fig. 4.7: Window if save operation cannot be performed
4.2.8 Completion of a unit restart

From Fitter Changes to certain device settings via the relevant configuration text boxes
(section 4.2.6.2, p. 25) may possibly not take effect until after the device
has been restarted. A restart of the device can be performed manually using
the"Restart" button (7) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18. However, the changes to the device
settings must first have been saved permanently (section 4.2.7, p. 26).
At the "Observer" user level, restarting the unit with the

"Restart" button is not possible. A restart of the unit can
also not be performed if the software release switch is acti-
vated. In such cases, the "Restart" button is always locked
and cannot be used.
From the "Fitter" user level upwards, the "Restart" button is
enabled as soon as the software release switch has been
deactivated. A manual restart of the unit can then be per-
formed at any time using the "Restart" button.
The waiting time after performing a manual restart of the device using the "Re-
start" button is dependent on the menu option currently selected and the quality
of the connection with the destination device.

Operating concept
4.2.9 Navigation
Navigation within the operator application is performed with the main menu in
the tree view permanently displayed on the left-hand side (see (10) in Fig. 4.2,
p. 18). The individual menu options in what are referred to as menu groups
and menu sub-groups are sorted by functions and areas. Menu groups and
menu sub-groups are visually marked with an arrow on the left-hand side next
to the displayed menu options. Clicking on the arrow displayed or the button
for the menu group or menu sub-group you require displays the menu options
available under these items. In order to open the required menu option or user
interface, the user navigates through the menu groups or menu sub-groups
displayed in the main menu. The required user interface is not opened until
the subordinate menu options have been activated. The menu option currently
selected is displayed with a red marking against the menu option in question. To
simplify navigation, the "Back" button (see (11) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18) can be used
to return to the menu options previously used, where applicable.
NOTE
The "Forward" or "Back" functions of the internet browser itself cannot be used
to navigate within the operator application.
Once the operator application has been opened, the user interface for the
"Overview" (section 4.3.1, p. 39) menu option is always automatically dis-
played as the start user interface.
NOTE
Depending on the user level selected, different menu options are available in
the main menu. In other words, the availability of the individual menu options
in the main menu changes dynamically when the user level changes.
NOTE
The menu options available in the main menu differ according to the PVMaster
version. Not all of the functions and menu options described in this application
manual are available for some versions.

Operating concept
4.2.10 Device states

The current device state is always displayed in the top main bar of the operator
application user interface (see section 4.2, p. 18). The current device state
is displayed in this main bar in the form of traffic lights with four coloured lights
and as a plain text message (see (8) in Fig. 4.2, p. 18). The possible device
states are listed in Tab. 4.4, p. 30, along with the corresponding statuses of
the 7-segment displays of the basic device in the PVMaster enclosure (see also
Chapter 5.1.1, p. 28). The 7-segment display is also available in the operator
application (see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). The status traffic lights are also avail-
able in the compact view for displaying the device state (section 4.1.3, p. 16).
An overview explaining the internal operational control of the PVMaster is
shown in Fig. 4.8, p. 31.
When the PVMaster is in its quiescent state or standby

mode, all the necessary release conditions (hardware
and software, see state no. 11 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43,
section 4.3.2.1, p. 41) are met and the inverter meas-
Quiescent state or ures the DC voltage of the PV generator continuously. If
standby the DC voltage exceeds the threshold value Vdc_Start,
power measurements are performed.
The PVMaster measures the PV generator power cur-

rently available. If a PV generator power that exceeds
Power measurement the internal power consumption of the PVMaster is iden-
in the switch-on tified, the device switches to active infeed operation.
procedure
In active infeed operation, the maximum possible power
is drawn from the PV generator through targeted track-
Active infeed opera- ing of the maximum power point (MPP) and fed into the
tion supply network.
If during active infeed operation the power fed into the

supply network is negative, the transition to the shut-
Active mode with down procedure takes place after a short period of time
negative power if the power remains negative.
Active infeed operation was interrupted, as the available

PV generator power had fallen below the internal power
consumption of the PVMaster device. The PVMaster
measures the available PV generator power for a period
of time. If the PV generator power stays below the
Shut-down proce- internal power consumption of the PVMaster device,
dure the PVMaster switches to the quiescent state. If the PV
generator power rises above the internal power con-
sumption of the PVMaster, the PVMaster switches back
to active infeed operation.
The PVMaster is in an error state. If the red light is per-

manently on, the cause of the malfunction is still active
and an acknowledgement is not possible. If the red light
flashes, the cause of the malfunction no longer exists
Error state and the error state can be automatically or manually
acknowledged.

Operating concept
NOTE
Special operating modes of the PVMaster (e.g. in "Single MPPT mode", see
section 4.3.4.5, p. 198) include processes that may deviate from Fig. 4.8,
p. 31 within the internal operational control.
Tab. 4.3: P
ossible device states in multi-MPPT mode or
when the device is currently the master in single MPPT mode
Status traffic
No. Plain text message 2) 7-segment display 3)
lights 1)
0 Reset device
1 Initialize device
4)
2 Grid monitoring: okay ←→
4)
3 Switch-on disabled / DC voltage too low
4)
4 Switch-on disabled / DC voltage sufficient
4)
5 Error: source still active → →
6 Error: ready to acknowledge → →
4)
7 Grid monitoring error: source still active → →
8 Grid monitoring error: ready to acknowledge → →
9 Standby: DC voltage too low (Vdc < Vdc_Start)
10 Switch-on procedure: DC voltage sufficient
11 Switch-on procedure: power measurement active
12 Measured power sufficient... switch on AC contactor
13 MPP tracking active
14 Generator scan active
15 MPP tracking active... AC power low
16 Switch-off procedure: power measurement active
17 Switch-off procedure: power too low
1) Display in compact view (section 4.1.3, p. 16) and in the operator application (section 4.2, p. 18)
2) Available as plain text message in the top main bar of the user interface (section 4.2, p. 18)
3) Display also available in the operator application (see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41)
4) With a dot in the 7-segment display

Operating concept
Tab. 4.4: P
ossible device states when the device is currently “Slave”
in single MPPT mode
Status traffic
No. Plain text message 2) 7-segment display 3)
lights 1)
1 Slave: device starts / auto-initialisation
4)
2 Control point: mains ok ←→
4)
3 Slave: Switch-on lockout/DC voltage too low
4)
4 Slave: Switch-on lockout/DC voltage sufficient
4)
5 Error state: cannot be cancelled (fault still active) → →
6 Error state: can be cancelled → →
4)
7 Network failure: Cause still active → →
8 Network failure: can be cancelled → →
9 Slave: Standby: DC voltage too low
10 Slave: waiting for request for connection
11 Slave: check request for connection
12 Slave: connection requested... Main contactor
13 Slave: feed active
15 Slave: check request for disconnection
16 Slave: check request for disconnection (passive)
17 Slave: disconnection occurs
1) Display in compact view (section 4.1.3, p. 16) and in the operator application (section 4.2, p. 18)
2) Available as plain text message in the top main bar of the user interface (section 4.2, p. 18)
3) Display also available in the operator application (see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41)

Operating concept
Fig. 4.8: Procedure for switching on and off

Menu options and user interfaces
4.3 Menu options and user interfaces

The individual menu options are available in the main menu sorted into "menu
groups" and, where applicable, into menu sub-groups according to areas.
Tab. 4.5: Menu groups

Menu group and area Meaning
Main or start user interface menu op-
tion. This menu option is initially selected
automatically whenever the operator ap-
plication is opened and the corresponding
user interface is displayed (section 4.3.1,
p. 39).
This menu group (section 4.3.2, p. 41
onwards) contains menu options for
displaying the current device status and
current actual values. There is no provi-
sion for configuring device settings in
these menu options.
retrieving, displaying and processing
recorded historic data and measured val-
ues. There is no provision for configuring
device settings in these menu options.
displaying/configuring current device
settings and for implementing software
updates.
performing device diagnoses (displaying
and processing malfunction and event
lists, acknowledging current malfunc-
tions and error states, setting delivery
confirmations, displaying recorded status
changes, testing digital outputs, etc.).
This menu group 1) contains special menu
options that are only used by used LTI
ReEnergy GmbH during production and
testing of the PVMaster (calibration etc.).
1) This menu group is only available at the highest user level, "Administrator" (see Chapter
4.2.2). The corresponding menu options and user interfaces will therefore not be discussed
any further in this application manual.

Tab. 4.6: Menu options and sub-groups of the "Status and Values" menu group
Menu option and area Meaning
Menu option for detailed display of the cur-
rent device status. The current device status
is displayed as a binary display of three
status words (section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
Menu option for status and value display for
device intercommunication via the Inter-
COM interface. This is where, for example
the communication and synchronisation
statuses and current device and total power
values are displayed, along with energy
values, device states and functional actual
values (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48). This menu
option is only available if InterCOM device
intercommunication is also being used (sec-
tion 4.3.4.5, p. 198).
This menu sub-group contains menu options
for displaying and visualising actual val-
ues relating to the PV generator (DC side)
(section 4.3.2.3, p. 52). This includes
the display of DC measured values (volt-
age, current, power), the state of insulation,
individual string current values and Other
values, such as solar radiation values,
module temperatures, wind speeds and
wind direction. In addition, there are also a
few diagnostic functions (e.g. characteristic
curve measurement function for calculating
and processing the current generator char-
acteristic curve).

for displaying actual values that relate to
the grid (AC side) (section 4.3.2.4, p. 61).
The subordinate menu options facilitate the
display and visualisation of AC measured
values (voltages, currents, frequency, pow-
ers, power factors), and the display of active
current and power limitations, energy values
and the current configuration and status of
grid monitoring functions.
The user interface for this menu option is

used to display current temperature meas-
ured values (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).


for displaying the configuration and status of
the digital inputs and outputs, and the ana-
logue inputs (section 4.3.2.6, p. 82).
Tab. 4.7: M
enu options and sub-groups of "History and Statistics" menu group
for selectable retrieval of recorded historic
data and measured values (voltages, cur-
rents, powers, string current values, etc.) as
day history data that can be displayed in a
table and processed, or can be displayed
graphically in day graphs (section 4.3.3.1,
p. 86).
This menu option is used to retrieve historic
month energy data for a selected month
(section 4.3.3.2, p. 97). The individual day
energy values are displayed and processed
either in tabular form or in a month diagram
(bar chart).
This menu option is used to retrieve historic
year energy data for a selected year (sec-
tion 4.3.3.3, p. 100). The individual month
energy values are displayed and processed
either in tabular form or in a year diagram
(bar chart).
This menu option is used to retrieve his-
toric overall energy data (section 4.3.3.4,
p. 102). The individual year energy values
are displayed and processed either in tabu-
lar form or in an overall diagram (bar chart).

Tab. 4.8: Menu options and sub-groups of the "Configuration" menu group

for displaying general unit data (software
versions, operating hours, microSD card sta-
tus, etc. ), implementing software updates,
displaying and setting the system clock and
displaying/configuring network settings (sec-
tion 4.3.4.1, p. 103).
This menu sub-group contains the menu

options to display the main measured values
(voltages, frequency, active power, total
system output values) and to display/edit
settings (rated voltage, rated frequency, total
system power limitations, etc.) relating to the
grid aspects. In addition, energy values and
conversion factors can be edited here. The
menu option for displaying and editing grid
monitoring function settings also has an im-
portant function. This menu sub-group also
includes menu options for displaying/editing
the settings for insulation monitoring, and
for configuration and checking of the active
power limitation by the grid operator within
the framework of the grid feed/Limit (by grid
operator).
The menu options in this menu sub-group

are used to display changes to the settings
for static and dynamic grid stabilisation. This
contains the static voltage stabilisation (re-
active power control), static frequency sta-
bilisation (automatic frequency-dependent
reduction of active power) and dynamic grid
stabilisation in the event of a fault (LVRT).
1) This menu option is available from the "Fitter" user level.

2) This menu option is available from the "Expert" user level.


This menu sub-group1) (section 4.3.4.4,
p. 166) contains menu options for display-
ing and editing the configuration of digital
inputs and outputs, and the analogue and
temperature inputs of the device. Freely
selectable functions can be assigned to the
digital inputs and outputs and the analogue
and temperature inputs. Digital inputs and
outputs can be inverted. Low-pass filter time
constants for digital and analogue inputs
and the temperature inputs can be set.
The signal type used and the scaling to be
used for the analogue inputs are set here.
In addition, fan actuation can be configured
or general threshold value functions for the
digital outputs can be defined and used.
The user interface for this menu option1)
(section 4.3.4.5, p. 198) is used to activate
and configure the InterCOM intercommuni-
cation between several PVMaster devices.
The operating mode for intercommunication
and communication configuration (node ID,
master/slave mode, baud rate, etc.) are dis-
played and configured here, and the device
identification is displayed and configuration.
The current status of InterCOM intercommu-
nication is displayed and functional com-
munication objects can be activated, e.g.
in order to send digital or analogue signals
to the other InterCOM nodes for use as a
broadcast. The infeed mode of the Inter-
COM nodes displayed and configured in
this menu option (standard mode or single
MPPT mode (parallel DC/AC operation).
This menu option1) (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210)
is used to display the status, and to display
and configure the settings relating to the
communication with any sub-array junc-
tion boxes with measurement of the string
current that may be in use. In addition to
the configuration of the sub-array junction
boxes and the string current channels used,
the analogue and temperature inputs of
any sub-array junction boxes used are also
configured here.


This menu option 1) (section 4.3.4.7, p. 214)
is used to display the status, and to display
and configure the internal FTP communica-
tion of the device with an online FTP server.
This is where file transfers are activated, cy-
cle times (data logger, file sending) are se-
lected, and the destination server (address,
authentication) is configured, the file types
to be sent are activated and communication
tests (test uploads) are completed. The cur-
rent status of the DNS and FTP client is also
displayed here.
The user interface for this menu option 1) is
used to configure the optional function that
can be activated digitally to reduce the ac-
tive power (section 4.3.4.8, p. 217).
This menu option is generally only available
if digital inputs have been assigned the rel-
evant function (section 4.3.4.8, p. 217).
The user interface for this menu option 2)
(section 4.3.4.9, p. 219) is used to access
specific parameters. In consultation with
LTI ReEnergy GmbH, settings that are not
accessible via the user interfaces for the
available menu options can be edited using
the parameter editor. In particular problem
cases, the settings for control processes can
be edited here, for example.
ATTENTION
Configurations with the param-
eter editor function can interfere
with operation of the device or
cause damage to the device if
the settings are not performed
correctly.

Tab. 4.9: Menu options and sub-groups of the "Diagnosis" menu group
used to display the number of new fault
messages and to display and process the
malfunctions that have occurred in a tabular
view. This is where the user can confirm
new (unread) fault messages (delivery con-
firmations). In addition, current malfunctions
can be acknowledged and settings relating
to automatic acknowledgement of malfunc-
tions can be displayed and configured (sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
used to display the number of new event
messages and to display and process the
unusual events that have occurred in a
graphically prepared tabular view (sec-
tion 4.3.5.2, p. 229). This is where the user
can confirm new (unread) event messages
(delivery confirmations).
used for detailed diagnoses and displays of
the operating cycle. This is where all past
status changes (status word 1 and status
word 2) for a selected time period are sorted
and displayed and where they can be pro-
cessed (section 4.3.5.3, p. 231).
The user interface for this menu option1) can
be used to switch the digital outputs manual-
ly and thus check the functions of the digital
outputs (fan, heat exchanger, liquid pump,
etc.) (section 4.3.5.4, p. 234).

4.3.1 Overview (start user interface)

Once the operator application (section 4.1.2, p. 13) has been opened, the
user interface for the "Overview" menu option is always automatically displayed
as the start user interface (Fig. 4.9). The main information on the device status
and the main current actual values are shown within this user interface.
1 4 5 2
7 8
Fig. 4.9: User interface for the "Overview" menu option (start user interface)
1. The link button takes the user to the user interface for the
menu option for the detailed view of the generator features
(section 4.3.2.3, p. 52). The current DC voltage in [V] and
current DC current in [A] are displayed in the display text
boxes here.
2. The link button takes the user to the user interface for the
detailed view of the grid values calculated (section 4.3.2.4.1,
p. 61). The main grid values are displayed in the display
text boxes here. The current grid voltage effective value in [V]
(as an average for all three linked voltages), the current grid
current in [A] of the device (as an average of the three phase
currents), the current total active power of the device in [kW]
and the power-related utilisation level of the device in [%] are
displayed here.

3. These display text boxes show the day yield currently achieved in [kWh],
the month yield currently achieved in [kWh] and the total yield currently
achieved in [kWh]. Details of how the energy is determined and the
conversion factors are configured are described in section 4.3.4.2.2,
p. 118.
4. This link button takes the user directly to the user inter-
face for the menu option for displaying and managing
fault messages (section 4.3.5.1, p. 221). The number
of new (not yet confirmed) fault messages is displayed
within the display text box.
5. This link button takes the user directly to the user inter-
face for the menu option for displaying and managing
event messages (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229). The number
of new (not yet confirmed) event messages is displayed
within the display text box.
6. This area of the start user interface contains an overview of the symbols
for displaying the main statuses and values of integrated device func-
tions. The symbols shown here are not link buttons and are therefore not
intended for navigating around the operator application.
Symbol with display of the state of the insulation moni-
tor (for details see section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136). If the
insulation resistance is not monitored by the device, the
symbol display is highly transparent.
Symbol with display of status of integrated function for
file transfer to an online destination server via FTP (for
details see section 4.3.4.7, p. 214). If file transfer is
deactivated, there is no status display and the symbol
display is highly transparent.
The DNS and/or FTP client is in an error state.
Automatic sending of files cannot take place. The
local internet connection of the PVMaster devices
may be faulty.
The DNS client is currently attempting to resolve
the names or the FTP client is currently sending a
file to the FTP destination server.
The DNS and FTP client are both in the "Ready" or
"OK" state.
Symbol used to display the current status of communica-
tion with any generator connection boxes (or sub-array
junction boxes) with string current measurement (see
section 4.3.4.6, p. 210). The status displayed here
relates merely to communication via the CAN interface
and does not constitute an assessment of the string
currents measured. If string current monitoring is deacti-
vated, there is no status display and the symbol display
is highly transparent.

Symbol used to display the statuses of the individual

activation functions for internal fans and heat exchang-
ers within the device and optional external fans and
heat exchangers (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179). The
statuses of the coolant pump activation functions are not
displayed here. The individual activation functions for
internal and optional external fans and heat exchangers
are also displayed in the user interface for the “State”
menu option of the "Status and Values" menu group
(section 4.3.2.1, p. 41, functions 16 to 21 in Tab. 4.10,
p. 43). The status of the coolant pump activation func-
tions is also activated in this user interface.
Symbol with display text box for displaying the current

percentage reduction of the device current (“Derat-
ing”) depending on the temperature values (see sec-
tion 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65). The percentage value relates to
the maximum generator current currently available.
Symbol with text box to display the currently effective
percentage active power maximum value of the device
as part of the power supply security and infeed manage-
ment (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141). If the function is
generally not used, the value 100% is always displayed.
Symbol with text box to display the current maximum
possible device active power taking into consideration
all reduction functions and the current grid voltage (see
section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
(7) The daily profile to date for the AC power of the device is shown in this
diagram. Clicking on the diagram takes the user directly to the user in-
terface for the menu option for the configurable daily diagram generator
(section 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86).
(8) This bar chart shows the day energy values achieved to date in a month
overview for the current month. By clicking on the bar chart, the user
can go directly to the user interface of the menu option for configurable
month graphs (section 4.3.3.2, p. 97).
4.3.2 Status and values

The "Status and Values" menu group contains menu options for displaying the
current device status, the current statuses of integrated device functions and
current actual values.
NOTE
There is generally no provision for configuring device settings in the menu op-
tions of the "Status and Values" menu group.
4.3.2.1 State
Within the “State” (Fig. 4.10) menu option, the current device status is shown in
a 7-segment display format (Tab. 4.4, p. 30 and Tab. 5.2, p. 238) in the up-
per section of the user interface. The device states are shown in the same way
as the display of statuses in the 7-segment displays of the basic device in the
PVMaster enclosure (see also Chapter 5.1.1, p. 40).

Fig. 4.10: U
ser interface of the “State” menu option in the "Status and Values"
menu group
The current device status and the statuses of the main integrated device func-
tions of the PVMaster are mapped in a total of three 32-bit status words.
The current decimal values of the three status words are displayed in the lower
section of the user interface of the “State” (Fig. 4.10) menu option. The display
of the three current status words with the corresponding descriptive texts are
displayed in the respective binary format in the middle section of the user inter-
face.
The following statuses of the respective function are possible:
The function is not available1) or is not in use or has been deactivated. In

this case, the descriptive text is also hidden.
"Inactive" state
"Active" state
1) …The availability of certain functions is dependent on the respective PVMaster device type
The first two status words (Tab. 4.10, p. 43 and Tab. 4.11, p. 46) contain
statuses and release conditions for the internal operating cycle controller. All
changes within status word 1 or status word 2 are recorded on the microSD
card by the internal data logger. All recorded status changes within the first two
status words within a selectable time period can be retrieved, displayed and
processed with the “State” menu option in the "Diagnosis" menu group (see
section 4.3.5.3, p. 231).

NOTE
A maximum total of the last 1000 status changes to the first two status words
are retained in the data memory for retrieval (section 4.3.5.3, p. 231). Entries
with older status changes are automatically deleted and can no longer be
retrieved.
The third status word (Tab. 4.12, p. 47) contains the statuses of special
device functions. Changes to some of these statuses are described as "Unu-
sual events" and recorded by the integrated data logger. "Unusual events" are
retrieved, displayed and processed conveniently in the "Events" menu option in
the "Diagnosis" menu group (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).
NOTE
A total of the last 100 event messages are retained in the data memory for
retrieval (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229). Entries with older events are automatically
deleted and can no longer be retrieved.
Tab. 4.10: Content of status word 1
No. Function Description
Display of switching state (e.g. of a circuit breaker) of a higher-level medium-
voltage switchgear.
The state is only displayed if this function is used. To this end, a digital input
for evaluating a corresponding auxiliary contact can be assigned the relevant
MVS (Medium-voltage
0 function (function 21 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). 1)
switchgear): switch state
If this function is used, the active state is a necessary condition for connection
and active infeed operation (see no. 6). If the switching state is inactive, the
device is in an error state (ID 10/11 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1,
p. 221).
Display of switching state (e.g. of a circuit breaker) of a higher-level low-volt-
age switchgear.
for evaluating a corresponding auxiliary contact can be assigned with the
LVS (Low-voltage switch- relevant function (function 25 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1,
1
gear): switch state p. 166). 1)
and active infeed operation (see no. 6). If the switching state is inactive, the
device is in an error state (ID 10/08 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1,
p. 221).
Display of state of an optional external release facility.
for evaluating an external release switch, for example, can be assigned the rel-
2 External release evant function (function 8 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
1)
and active infeed operation (see no. 6).
1) Alternatively, the signal can be sourced from another device in the InterCOM device network through InterCOM device
intercommunication (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198).
2) This function is not available for each PVMaster device type
3) If grid monitoring external to the device is used, whereby a digital input for evaluation is assigned the corresponding function (function
20 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), the release state according to the evaluated signal is displayed here. The
signal for grid monitoring external to the device can also be sourced from another device in the InterCOM device network through
InterCOM intercommunication (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198).
4) A display of the status of this function is also available in the relevant symbol on the initial "Overview" user interface (section 4.3.1,
p. 39)


Display of switching state of AC main switch within the PVMaster enclosure.
This function (function 5 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166)
is used for each PVMaster device type and can therefore not be deactivated.
As soon as the AC main switch is switched on, the internal evaluation of the
grid measured values and the corresponding monitoring as configured in the
3 AC main switch
grid monitoring functions starts (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
Activation of the AC main switch is a necessary condition for connection and
active infeed operation (see no. 6). In addition, any monitoring of the insulation
resistance will only take place when the AC main switch is switched on (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
Displays the switching state of the separately evaluated DC main switch (func-
tion 6 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166) within the PVMas-
ter enclosure.
4 DC main switch 2) Activation of the DC main switch is a necessary condition for connection and
active infeed operation (see no. 6). In addition, any monitoring of the insulation
resistance will only take place when the DC main switch is switched on (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
Displays the switching state of a separately evaluated release switch (function
7 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
5 Release switch 2)
Activation of the release switch is a necessary condition for connection and
active infeed operation (see no. 6).
Displays the full hardware release as a necessary condition for connection and
for active infeed operation. This state becomes active as soon as the condi-
6 Release (HW) complete tions (states no. 0 to no. 5, where used) are met.
This release is a necessary condition for connection and for active infeed
operation (see no. 11).
Displays the state of the software release. The state is active as soon as the
software release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) has been activated.
7 Release (SW)
Displays release through the integrated grid monitoring function (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). This refers to the first instance of the device-internal
Release grid monitoring redundant grid monitoring. This release only becomes active once the grid
8
(1) 3) parameters are permissible and the set connection delay has elapsed.
Displays release through the integrated grid monitoring function (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). This refers to the second instance of the device-inter-
nal redundant grid monitoring. This release only becomes active once the grid
Release grid monitoring parameters are permissible and the set connection delay has elapsed.
9
(2) 3) This release becomes active when there is no redundant grid monitoring in ac-
cordance with the set country code for grid monitoring.
p. 39)


Displays the connection condition as a result of any insulation monitor used
Release insulation moni- (see section 4.3.2.3.1, p. 52 and section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
10
toring This release is a necessary condition for connection and for active infeed
Displays the full release as a necessary condition for connection and for active
infeed operation. This state becomes active as soon as the conditions (states
no. 6 to no. 10, where used) are met, the device is not in an error state and the
11 Release complete
present current and active power limits are higher than 6%.
This release is the necessary condition for the quiescent or standby state of
the device (section 4.2.10, p. 28).
Displays the release by InterCOM device intercommunication (section 4.3.4.5,
p. 198) as a necessary condition for connection and for active infeed opera-
tion.
In stand-alone operation or if InterCOM intercommunication has been deacti-
vated, this release is always active. If InterCOM intercommunication is used,
12 InterCOM: release
release only takes place if InterCOM intercommunication has been configured
completely correctly and the InterCOM node has been synchronised correctly.
This switch-on release release is also used in an InterCOM device network
to coordinate the delayed activation of the individual InterCOM nodes (sec-
tion 4.3.4.5, p. 198).
Confirmation of switching state of the AC main contactor. (Function 10 in Tab.
4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166)
13 Main contactor (AC)
Switching of the AC main contactor is a necessary condition for active infeed
operation (MPP tracking, state no. 15).
Confirmation of switching state of 2nd main contactor (function 11 in Tab. 4.19,
p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
14 Main contactor 2 2)
Switching of the second main contactor (where present) is a necessary condi-
tion for active infeed operation (MPP tracking, state no. 15).
Displays status of active infeed operation. In active infeed operation, the maxi-
15 MPP tracking active mum possible power is drawn from the PV generator through tracking of the
maximum power point (MPP).
Confirmation of first activation function for any enclosure fan 2) where pre-
16 Fan 1 4)
sent, or an optional external fan or heat exchanger (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1,
p. 179).
Confirmation of second activation function for any second enclosure fan
17 Fan 2 4) 2)
where present, or an optional external fan or heat exchanger (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Confirmation of third activation function for any third enclosure fan 2) where
18 Fan 3 4) present, or an optional external fan or heat exchanger (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1,
p. 179).
Confirmation of fourth activation function for any fourth enclosure fan 2) where
19 Fan 4 4)
present, or an optional external fan or heat exchanger (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1,
p. 179).
Confirmation of first activation function of an external coolant pump, where
20 Cooler 1
present (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Confirmation of second activation function of an external coolant pump, where
21 Cooler 2
present (see section 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
p. 39)


The inverter measures the DC voltage of the PV generator continuously. If the
0 DC voltage critical low DC voltage is very low, this status becomes active and a disconnection of the
supply voltage to the device is possibly imminent.
Displays whether the current DC voltage measurement is above the threshold
1 DC voltage sufficient value Vdc_Start. This is a necessary condition for starting the switch-on proce-
dure (see also section 4.2.10, p. 28).
Switch-on procedure Displays the state of the switch-on procedure (analogous to state 10, 11 or 12
2
active in Tab. 4.4, p. 30).
Displays the state of the power measurement within the switch-on procedure
Switch-on procedure:
3 (analogous to state 11 in Tab. 4.4, p. 30). Each power measurement is per-
Pdc measurement
formed very quickly and is repeated at regular intervals as required.
If a PV generator power that exceeds the internal power consumption of
the PVMaster device is identified during the power measurement as part
Switch-on procedure:
4 of the switch-on procedure, the device switches to active infeed operation.
start
This switch-on process is displayed here (analogous to state 12 in Tab. 4.4,
p. 30).
In active infeed operation, the maximum possible power is drawn from the PV
5 MPP tracking active generator through targeted tracking of the maximum power point (MPP) and
fed into the supply network (analogous to state 13 in Tab. 4.4, p. 30).
If during active infeed operation the power fed into the supply network is nega-
tive, this is indicated here (analogous to state 15 in Tab. 4.4, p. 30). If the
6 MPP tracking: power low
power remains negative, after a short period of time the transition to the shut-
down procedure will take place.
If active infeed operation was interrupted because the available PV generator
Switch-off procedure: power fell below the internal power consumption of the PVMaster device, this
7
active is shown here (analogous to states 16 and 17 in Tab. 4.4, p. 30). The PV-
Master only measures the available PV generator power at regular intervals.
Displays the state of the power measurement within the shut-down procedure
Switch-off procedure:
8 (analogous to state 16 in Tab. 4.4, p. 30). Each power measurement is per-
Pdc measurement
formed very quickly and is repeated at regular intervals as required.
If an insufficient available PV generator power was identified several times
Switch-off procedure:
9 during the shut-down procedure, the main contactor will also be shut down and
disconnect...
the device will go into its quiescent state or standby mode.


Display of currently active limitation of the device current (see sec-
0 Current limit active
tion 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
Displays currently active limitation of the device current as a result of an
Current derating
1 elevated temperature (temperature-dependent derating, see section 4.3.2.4.3,
(temperature too high) 1)
p. 65).
If the maximum apparent power of the device has been reached, this is indi-
2 SacMax reached (unit)
cated here (see section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
If the maximum apparent power of the InterCOM device network has been
SacMax reached (total
3 reached (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198), this is indicated here (see section 4.3.2.4.3,
plant)
p. 65).
Display of currently active limitation of the active power (see section 4.3.2.4.3,
4 Pac limit active
p. 65).
Displays currently active limitation of the active power (see section 4.3.2.4.3,
5 Pac limit (power ramp) p. 65) as a result of the ramp function to achieve a specified increase in the
active power (section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
If the maximum active power of the device has been reached, this is indicated
6 PacMax reached (unit)
here (see section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
If the maximum active power of the InterCOM device network has been
PacMax reached (total
7 reached (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198), this is indicated here (see section 4.3.2.4.3,
plant)
p. 65).
Pac reduction: active (by Active power limitation as part of power supply security and infeed manage-
8
grid operator) ment (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
State of first signal of the digital setpoint specification (no. 27 in Tab. 4.19,
9 Pac reduction: Signal 1 p. 168, section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166) for active power limitation as part of power
supply security and infeed management (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
State of second signal of the digital setpoint specification (no. 28 in Tab. 4.19,
State of third signal of the digital setpoint specification (no. 29 in Tab. 4.19,
State of fourth signal of the digital setpoint specification (no. 30 in Tab. 4.19,
State of first signal of the optional digital derating function that can be activated
(section 4.3.4.8, p. 217) to reduce the AC active power (section 4.3.2.4.3,
13 Ext. derating signal 1 1)
p. 65). This function is used by selecting the corresponding function for a
digital input (function 31 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
State of second signal of the optional digital derating function that can be
activated (section 4.3.4.8, p. 217) to reduce the AC active power (sec-
14 Ext. derating signal 2 1) tion 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65). This function is used by selecting the correspond-
ing function for a digital input (function 32 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
State of third signal of the optional digital derating function that can be activat-
ed (section 4.3.4.8, p. 217) to reduce the AC active power (section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65). This function is used by selecting the corresponding function for a
If the grid frequency values are elevated, the current active power (where
16 Frequency stabilisation 1) used) may be reduced as appropriate as part of static frequency stabilisation
for grid stabilisation (section 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156). This state is displayed here.
1) A change to this state constitutes a "unusual event" and is recorded by the integrated data logger. "Unusual
events" are retrieved, displayed and processed conveniently in the "Events" menu option in the "Diagnosis"
menu group (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).


Displays the state of static voltage stabilisation for grid stabilisation (sec-
17 Voltage stabilisation tion 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147). If reactive power specification is active, this is indi-
cated here.
Displays the state of the dynamic grid stabilisation function (section 4.3.4.3.3,
p. 159) for brief grid voltage drops. Corresponding errors in the grid and re-
18 LVRT active 1)
sulting activity of the dynamic grid stabilisation function are rare and normally
of extremely short duration.
Displays the state of the temporary reactive power limitation (section 4.3.4.3.3,
19 LVRT: Q limit active 1)
p. 159) following clarification of the grid voltage error.
20 - - Not assigned -
21 - - Not assigned -
Displays the state of the optional coolant pressure monitoring available for
22 Coolant pressure low 1) activation. This function is used by selecting the corresponding function for a
Displays the state of the optional monitoring of a tracking system available for
23 Error tracking system 1) activation. This function is used by selecting the corresponding function for a
1) A change to this state constitutes a "unusual event" and is recorded by the integrated data logger. "Unusual
events" are retrieved, displayed and processed conveniently in the "Events" menu option in the "Diagnosis"
4.3.2.2 InterCOM
InterCOM communication is used for intercommunication between several PV-
Master devices within a local device network (e.g. within a PVMaster station). A
description of the functions of InterCOM device intercommunication and detailed
information about configuration can be found in section 4.3.4.5, p. 198.
If the InterCOM intercommunication has been activated and correctly configured
(see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198), the "InterCOM" menu option is available in the
"Status and Values" menu group.
The key statuses and actual values for InterCOM device intercommunication
are displayed within the user interface for this menu option (Fig. 4.11, p. 49).
Changes to device settings are not possible in this user interface.

5 6 7
a b c d e f g- m
1 2 3 4
Fig. 4.11: User interface of the "InterCOM" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
Current power values and the set power limits of the local InterCOM device
network are displayed in the lower section of the user interface.
1. Display of the current total apparent power in [kVA] of the entire local Inter-
COM device network is shown here in a display text box.
2. Display of the set maximum value for the apparent power in [kVA] of the
total local InterCOM device network in a configuration text box. This configu-
ration text box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries
in this user interface. This setting can be changed in the user interface of
the "General" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configura-
tion" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115).
3. Display of the current total active power in [kW] of the entire local InterCOM
device network is shown here in a display text box.
4. Display of the set maximum value for the active power in [kW] of the total
local InterCOM device network in a configuration text box. This configura-
tion text box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries in
this user interface. This setting can be changed in the user interface of the
"General" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration"
menu group (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115).
5. The set communication address of the respective InterCOM node (Inter-
COM node ID) is displayed in this section. All InterCOM devices of the local
InterCOM device network are generally listed sorted by the respective set
InterCOM node ID in this user interface.

6. The corresponding rated power of the respective InterCOM node is dis-

played in a configuration text box as an apparent power value in [kVA]. It is
not possible to edit these values.
7. The communication and synchronisation statuses and current device power
values are displayed in the scrollable section of this user interface, along
with energy values, device states and functional actual values. These val-
ues are displayed for each InterCOM node.
a) Display of communication status of individual InterCOM nodes.
If communication is functional, the status field shows the active
state. If communication of an InterCOM node is not functional
(or if, for example, the voltage supply to the InterCOM node is
switched off), the status field shows the inactive state.
b) Display of synchronisation status of InterCOM nodes. If syn-
chronisation of the InterCOM node is functional, the status field
shows the active state.
NOTE
If the synchronisation function is used, the active state shown here is a con-
dition for active infeed operation of the InterCOM node (see section 4.3.4.5,
p. 198). If synchronisation is not functional, an error state may be triggered in
the InterCOM node (see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
c) ithin a local InterCOM device network, an InterCOM node
W
always performs the role of master in communication. Depend-
ing on the configuration of the InterCOM device intercommu-
nication, the master function can be assigned statically to an
InterCOM node or (depending on the device state) it can be
dynamically assigned, which means that the master assignment
will vary accordingly (see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198). The active
status field in this section indicates the InterCOM node accord-
ingly using the current master assignment.
d) Display of reactive power values in [kVA] at this moment in time for the
respective InterCOM nodes in display text boxes.
e) Display of current active power values in [kVA] for the respective Inter-
COM nodes in display text boxes.
f) If the InterCOM "Transformer temperature" function (optional broadcast
communication object) is used for an InterCOM node (section 4.3.4.5.2,
p. 206), the current transformer temperature measured by this Inter-
COM node in [°C] is displayed in a display text box for this InterCOM
node.
g) If the InterCOM "Limit (by grid operator)" function (optional broadcast
communication object) is used for an InterCOM node (section 4.3.4.5.2,
p. 206), the current percentage active power maximum value is dis-
played in a display text box for this InterCOM node. The other InterCOM
nodes limit the active power fed in in accordance with this percentage
active power maximum value (based on the rated power of the devices).
h) If InterCOM functions are used for static voltage stabilisation (reactive
power control) for an InterCOM node (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198), the
transmitted analogue value in [%] is displayed in a display text box for
this InterCOM node or (up to four) digital signal states are displayed in
status fields for the setpoint specification for reactive power control as
part of static voltage stabilisation.
i) In a InterCOM device network, the connection of the individual Inter-
COM nodes is delayed (see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198). The "Switching
on" status field indicates each connection procedure for the respective
InterCOM nodes accordingly.

j) InterCOM device intercommunication offers a series of functions for

exchanging digital signals for total plant control and monitoring within
an InterCOM device network (see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198). The respec-
tive signal states of the InterCOM functions used are displayed in status
fields for the corresponding InterCOM nodes.
k) Display of total energy achieved to date in [kWh] for the respective Inter-
COM nodes in display text boxes.
NOTE
If the special "single MPPT" operating mode (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198) is
used, the connection and disconnection of the individual InterCOM nodes is
coordinated by the InterCOM master; this is also dependent on the respective
energy values.
l) Key device states, the statuses of the coordination of the connection of
other InterCOM nodes and the control setpoints for the current Inter-
COM master are displayed in the "InterCOM master" section within the
scrollable section of the user interface. In general, these data are only
displayed in the "InterCOM master" section in the special "single MPPT"
operating mode (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198).
The device states and the statuses of the coordination of the connection
of the InterCOM masters are also indicated via status fields. The present
current setpoints (for controlling the active and reactive power) of the
current InterCOM master in [A] are displayed in display text boxes.
PVMaster III With PVMaster III, the setpoint for the symmetry controller also contin-
ues to be displayed.
m) At the end of the scrollable section of this user interface, the key device
states for all InterCOM nodes of the local device network are displayed
in an overview of status fields.
NOTE
If the special "single MPPT" operating mode (section 4.3.4.5, p. 198) is used,
the connection and disconnection of the individual InterCOM nodes is coordi-
nated by the InterCOM master; this is also dependent on the respective device
states.

4.3.2.3 PV generator (DC side)

This menu sub-group contains menu options for displaying and visualising
actual values relating to the PV generator (DC side). This includes the display
of DC measured values (voltage, current, power) of the insulation state and,
where applicable, individual string current values and any Other values such as
solar radiation values, module temperatures, wind speeds and wind direction.
In addition, there are also a few diagnostic functions (e.g. a characteristic curve
measurement function for calculating and processing the current generator
characteristic).
4.3.2.3.1 DC values
The user interface for the "DC values" menu option is shown in Fig. 4.12 and
contains, for example, display elements for displaying current actual values in
the PV generator (DC side).
1
6
2 5
3 7
4 8
9
10
11
12 14
13 15
Fig. 4.12: U
ser interface of the "DC values" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
If a red link button is shown next to a display text box, this indicates that
this value has been recorded as standard by the integrated data logger
and that the corresponding recorded day history data can be called up in
the diagram generator. Pressing this link button calls up the corresponding
user interface to display the day history data (section 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86).

1. Display of last open-circuit voltage measured in the PV generator in [V] in a

display text box. The displayed value is not updated in active infeed opera-
tion when MPP tracking is active, only in passive mode. This value therefore
does not necessarily represent the current open-circuit voltage of the PV
generator.
2. Display of current generator DC voltage in [V] in a display text box. With the
PVMaster, the DC voltage is measured via two different analogue record-
ings at different resolutions. The high-resolution measurement is used for
MPP tracking in order to achieve high precision in MPP tracking in a station-
ary set-up. The displayed value ("LR" - standard measurement, "HR" - high-
resolution measurement) is selected via the selection box to the right of the
display text box.
3. The present generator DC current is displayed here in [A] in a display text
box.
4. Display of current generator DC power in [kW] in a display text box.
5. Display of the setpoint DC voltage transferred by the MPP tracking to the
control system in [V] in a configuration text box. Manual input of setpoint DC
voltages is only possible when MPP tracking is "frozen" using (6). Other-
wise, this configuration text box is locked for entries.
From Expert 6. This "Freeze" button is only available from the "Expert" user level upwards
and can be used for diagnostic purposes. By clicking on this button, MPP
tracking is "frozen" and the configuration text box (5) is enabled for manual
entries of setpoint DC voltages. The frozen state of MPP tracking is indi-
cated accordingly by the status lamp within the button.
PVMaster III 7. Display of the actual asymmetry of the DC-voltage in [V]. This value is only
displayed in the case of the PVMaster III because this generation of devices
is a so-called 3-level inverter generation which is fitted with a divided DC
link voltage capacitor.
From Expert 8. This button is available from the "Expert" user level upwards and can be
used for diagnostic purposes. If this button is pressed, the power measure-
ment within the switch-on procedure (section 4.2.10, p. 28) is skipped,
with the result that the device is connected directly to active infeed opera-
tion, provided that the current DC voltage is sufficiently high to allow the
device to be connected. The status of this function is indicated accordingly
by the status field within the button.
The states and measured values for the insulation or grounding resistance
monitoring are displayed in the middle section of the user interface for the "DC
values" menu option (section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
9. Display of current insulation resistance or grounding resistance in [kOhm] in
a display text box.
In a pure IT system, the displayed measured value represents the meas-
ured insulation resistance. If the PV generator is positively or negatively
grounded using the optionally available grounding kit (see PVMaster instal-
lation manual), the displayed value represents the measured grounding
resistance (see section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
NOTE
The display of the measured value via this display text box is not available for
all PVMaster device types.

10. The insulation monitoring state is displayed here via status fields and as a
plain text message in a display text box. The possible states are listed in
Tab. 4.18, p. 140.
11. Meteorological measured values, where present, that have been recorded
via analogue inputs of the PVMaster device are displayed in the lower sec-
tion of the user interface. The measured values are displayed in two tab
options, "Irradiation and Temperature" and "Wind".
12. Display of current solar radiation G1 in [W/m²] in a display text box. This
value is only available if a corresponding solar radiation measurement via
an analogue input of the PVMaster device is evaluated and this analogue
input has been assigned the respective function (see section 4.3.4.4.3,
p. 189, no. 6 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
13. Display of current solar radiation G2 in [W/m²] in a display text box. This
value is only available if a corresponding solar radiation measurement via
p. 189, no. 7 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
14. Display of current module temperature M1 in [°C] in a display text box. This
value is only available if a corresponding temperature measurement via an
analogue input of the PVMaster device is evaluated and this analogue input
has been assigned the respective function (see section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189,
no. 12 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
15. Display of current module temperature M2 in [°C] in a display text box. This
value is only available if a corresponding temperature measurement via an
analogue input of the PVMaster device is evaluated and this analogue input
has been assigned the respective function (see section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189,
no. 13 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
15 17
16 18
Fig. 4.13: " Wind" tab option in the user interface for the "DC values" menu op-
tion
16. Display of current wind speed V1 in [m/s] in a display text box (Fig. 4.13).
This value is only available if a corresponding wind speed measurement via
p. 189, no. 8 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
17. Display of current wind speed V2 in [m/s] in a display text box (Fig. 4.13).
This value is only available if a corresponding wind speed measurement via
p. 189, no. 9 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).

18. Display of current wind direction D1 in [°] in a display text box (Fig. 4.13).
This value is only available if a corresponding wind direction measure-
ment via an analogue input of the PVMaster device is evaluated and
this analogue input has been assigned the respective function (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189, no. 10 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
19. Display of current wind direction D2 in [°] in a display text box (Fig. 4.13).
This value is only available if a corresponding wind direction measure-
ment via an analogue input of the PVMaster device is evaluated and
this analogue input has been assigned the respective function (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189, no. 11 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190).
4.3.2.3.2 Generator scan

From Fitter The "Generator scan" menu option within the "PV generator" menu sub-group
in the "Status and Values" menu group is available from the "Fitter" user level
upwards. The user interface for this menu option (Fig. 4.14) contains a charac-
teristic curve measurement function for determining and processing the current
generator characteristic.
4 3
7
Fig. 4.14: User interface for "Generator scan" menu option

1. Current actual values in the PV generator (DC side) are displayed in the up-
per section of "DC values" and control elements for diagnostic purposes are
displayed in the same way as the upper section of the "DC values" menu
option (section 4.3.2.3.1, p. 52).
PVMaster III only 2. Display of the DC-voltage asymmetry in [V] at the current time. This value is
only displayed in the case of the PVMaster III because this generation of de-

vices is a so-called 3-level inverter generation which is fitted with a divided

DC link voltage capacitor.
3. It is only possible to click on this "Scan" button when the device is connect-
ed and in active infeed mode. Pressing this button activates the characteris-
tic curve measurement function and the DC voltage is initially reduced down
to the minimum DC voltage of the PVMaster device by means of a ramp
function. The DC voltage is then increased in ramp form until the open-
circuit voltage of the PV generator is reached and the respective measured
values for the generator current and generator power are recorded by the
integrated data logger. Finally, the characteristic curve measurement func-
tion is automatically exited and active infeed operation with MPP tracking
is continued. The corresponding diagram for the I-U and P-U characteristic
curve identified is displayed in the diagram field (5). An active characteristic
curve measurement function is indicated by the status field within the button
and can be aborted at any time by pressing the "Scan" button again.
4. Display of identified generator voltage [V], generator current [A] and genera-
tor power [kW] at the identified maximum power point (MPP) in display text
boxes. These values can only be displayed and updated on completion of
the scanning process with the "Scan" button (2).
5. Display of last open-circuit voltage measured in the PV generator in [V] in a
display text box. The displayed value is not updated in active infeed opera-
tion when MPP tracking is active, only in passive mode or when the charac-
teristic curve measurement function is active.
6. Diagram field for displaying the I-U characteristic curve (left scale, red) and
P-U characteristic curve (right scale, green) identified. The two character-
istic curves can only be displayed once the scanning process has been
performed with the "Scan" button (2).
7. Once a scanning process has been completed within the characteristic
curve measurement function using the "Scan" button (2), the characteristic
curve measured values can be stored in a .csv file on the local PC once this
button has been pressed. This button opens a file browser on the local PC
in order to specify a destination location and file name for the .csv file.
4.3.2.3.3 String currents

If individual string currents are measured via the optional String Combiner
Boxes (SCBs) with string current measurement, the corresponding states and
measured values are displayed via the user interface for the "String currents"
menu option within the "PV generator" menu sub-group in the "Status and
Values" menu group (Fig. 4.15). However, the PVMaster device must first be
configured as described in section 4.3.4.6, p. 210.
REFERENCE
A description of the optional String Combiner Box (SCB) with string current
measurement and detailed information about connection to the PVMaster can
be found in the relevant PVMaster installation manual and in the SCB operat-
ing instructions.

1
5
2
3 4
Fig. 4.15: U
ser interface of the "String currents" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. Number of SCBs connected to the PVMaster or activated via the configura-
tion (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210) in a display text box. According to the number
of available SCBs displayed here, the corresponding entries for selection of
the SCBs are available in the selection box (2).
2. Selection box for selecting the SCBs for displaying the corresponding states
and measured values within the user interface. Only those SCBs that have
been activated via the configuration (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210) can be select-
ed within this selection box. If an SCB is selected via the selection box, the
status of communication is displayed via (3) and (4), and the string currents
for this selected SCB are displayed in (6), (7) and (8). The actual values for
this selected SCB are also displayed in the other tab options,"Other values"
and "Average values".
3. If there is a malfunction in the CAN communication with the SCB selected
via the selection box (2), the communication error is indicated via this status
field. More detailed information is displayed in plain text message form
in the display text box (4). Information is generally only displayed via this
status field if communication with SCBs has been activated through the
configuration (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210).
4. Display text box with information about the status of CAN communication
as a plain text message. The possible messages and what they mean are
covered in Tab. 4.29, p. 213 (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210). Messages are gen-
erally only displayed in this display text box if communication with SCBs has
been activated through the configuration (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210).

5. The corresponding states and measured values of the SCBs selected via
selection box (2) are displayed in three tab options in the middle section of
the user interface.
a) "String currents": Present string current values are displayed and as-
sessed in this tab option (Fig. 4.15).
b) "Other values": Current meteorological measured values are displayed
in this tab option (Fig. 4.16).
From Fitter c) "Average values": This tab option (Fig. 4.17) is available from the "Fitter"
level upwards and is used to display chronological average values for
the string currents and meteorological measured values that are used
for the .csv files for upload to an FTP destination server (section 4.3.4.7,
p. 214).
6. The present string current values in [mA] for the SCBs selected via the
selection box (2) are displayed in display text boxes in this section of the
"String currents" tab option. A total of up to fifteen string currents per SCB
can be measured and displayed here. In addition to the respective display
text boxes, a status field for evaluating each measured value is also dis-
played. The evaluation of the string current values is always dependent on
the average value - displayed in text box (7) - for all activated string current
measurements for the selected SCBs. However, only individual string cur-
rent values in excess of 300 mA are evaluated.
If the evaluation of a string current for the SCBs selected via the
selection box (2) has been deactivated via the configuration (sec-
tion 4.3.4.6, p. 210), no value is displayed in the corresponding dis-
play text box. A "-" is simply displayed instead. In this case, a symbol
is always displayed in the corresponding status field.
In the case of a negative difference between the individual string cur-
rent value and the average value for all string current values for the
SCBs selected via the selection box (2) of less than 20%, this minor
negative difference is indicated with a green symbol in the relevant
status field. If there is no assessment of the string current value
because the string current value is less than 300 mA or the individual
string current value is higher than the average value, a green symbol
is again displayed in the relevant status field, regardless of the dif-
ference between the individual string current value and the average
value for all string current values.
If the negative difference between the individual string current value
and the average value for all string current values for the SCBs
selected via the selection box (2) is between 20% and 40%, this is
indicated with a yellow warning symbol in the relevant status field for
string current values greater than 300 mA.
If the negative difference between the individual string current value
and the average value for all string current values for the SCBs
selected via the selection box (2) is greater than 40%, this very large
difference is indicated with a red warning symbol in the relevant status
field for string current values greater than 300 mA.
7. To evaluate the individual string current values for the SCBs selected via the
selection box (2), an average value for all activated string current measure-
ments for the selected SCBs is calculated and displayed in this display text
box in [mA].

8. Up to fifteen string current values for the SCBs selected via the selection
box (2) are displayed in this diagram as a bar chart. The use of colours for
the individual string current bars (green, yellow or red) represents the as-
sessment of the string current values and corresponds to the status fields of
the individual display text boxes for the string current values (6).
The current meteorological measured values are displayed in the "Other values"
tab option (Fig. 4.16).
9 11
10
Fig. 4.16: " Other values" tab option in the user interface for the "String currents"
menu option in the "Status and Values" menu group
9. If the analogue input for the selected SCBs is used to evaluate a solar
radiation measurement and if the analogue input for the SCBs has been
assigned the respective function (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210), the current solar
radiation value in [W/m²] is displayed in this text box.
10. If the analogue input for the selected SCBs is used to evaluate a wind
speed measurement and if the analogue input for the SCBs has been as-
signed the respective function (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210), the current wind
speed in [m/s] is displayed in this text box.
11. If the PT100 input for the selected SCBs is used to measure the tempera-
ture, the current temperature measured value in [°C] is displayed in this text
box.
From Fitter The "Average values" tab option (Fig. 4.17) is available from the "Fitter" user
level upwards and is used to display sliding average values for the string cur-
rents and meteorological measured values. These sliding average values are
used to create string box .csv files; there is then the option of sending these
files to any FTP destination server via the integrated FTP client (section 4.3.4.7,
p. 214). The average value interval is dependent on the set data logger cycle
time (standard value of 15 minutes, for example).
REFERENCE
Any desired change to the average value interval must be made by configuring
the individual SCBs. Information about configuring the SCBs can be found in
the SCB installation manual.

14 16
15
12
13
Fig. 4.17: " Average values" tab option in the user interface for the "String cur-
rents" menu option in the "Status and Values" menu group
12. The sliding average values for the individual string currents for the SCBs
selected via the selection box (2) are displayed in [mA] in display text boxes
in this section of the "Average values" tab option.
13. Display of string current sliding average value in [mA] for all activated string
current measurements for the SCBs selected via the selection box (2).
14. Display of chronological sliding average value for current solar radiation
value in [W/m²] in a display text box (if analogue input for the selected SCBs
is used to measure the solar radiation).
15. Display of chronological sliding average value for current wind speed value
in [m/s] in a display text box (if analogue input for the selected SCBs is used
to measure the wind speed).
16. Display of chronological sliding average value for current temperature value
in [°C] in a display text box (if PT100 input for the selected SCBs is used to
measure the temperature).

4.3.2.4 Grid
The "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Status and Values" menu group contains
menu options for displaying actual values relating to the grid (AC side). The
subordinate menu options facilitate the display and visualisation of AC meas-
ured values (voltages, currents, frequency, powers, power factors), and the
display of active current and power limitations, energy values and the current
configuration and status of grid monitoring functions.
4.3.2.4.1 AC values
The user interface for the first "AC values" menu option of the "Grid" menu sub-
group (Fig. 4.18) contains display elements for displaying actual values in the
grid (AC side).
5
1
2
6
9
7
12
10
11
13
Fig. 4.18: U
ser interface of the "AC values" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group

1. Here, the values of the three phase voltages or power linked phase voltages
measured at the current time are displayed in text boxes in [V], depending
on the selection made in the left selection box (5).
2. Display of current linked voltage in [V] in a display text box. The value dis-
played is the average value for the three measured linked grid voltages.
3. As part of grid monitoring (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124), a chronological slid-
ing average value for each of the three grid phase voltages measured (1) is
calculated and monitored in order to monitor the quality of the grid voltage.
The moving averages are displayed in [V] in these display boxes, depending
on the selection made in the left selection box (5).
4. The current measured grid frequency in [Hz] is shown in this display text
box.
5. The grid voltage values and grid frequency are redundantly measured in
the PVMaster with two independent controllers (main and backup controller)
in order to meet specific requirements regarding functional safety (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). The selection box on the right is used to select the
values to be displayed for the grid voltage values and the grid frequency in
the display text boxes (1), (2), (3) and (4). If "µC1" is selected, the meas-
ured values of the main controller are displayed, while "µC2" will display the
measured values of the backup controller. The selection box on the left is
used to choose whether the grid voltage single values should be displayed
in the display text boxes (1) and (3) as phase values (setting “ph-n”) or as
linked voltages (setting “ph-ph”).
6. The direction of rotation of the grid voltage system identified is displayed
via these status fields depending on the phase sequence of the connec-
tion. The PVMaster has an automatic adaptation of the rotating field, which
means that the phase sequence is not relevant to the connection to the grid
voltage system.
7. The current grid currents measured for the three phases L1, L2 and L3 are
displayed in [A] via these display text boxes.
8. The current average value for the grid currents measured for the three
phases (7) is displayed here in [A] in a display text box.
9. This status field is used to indicate that current limitation is currently active
in the PVMaster device (e.g. due to active derating as a result of elevated
temperature values). Details of the current limitation are given in the user
interface for the "Limit" menu option of the "Grid" menu sub-group in the
"Status and Values" menu group (section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
10. Display of respective current active power values for the three phases L1,
L2 and L3 in [kW] in display text boxes.
11. The current total active power fed into the grid is displayed here in [kW] in
a display text box. This value represents the sum of the three phase active
powers (10).
12. This status field is used to indicate that active Limit is currently active in
the PVMaster device (e.g. due to active Limit by the grid operator as part
of infeed/grid security management (NSM). Details of the current active
Limit are given in the user interface for the "Limit" menu option of the "Grid"
menu sub-group in the "Status and Values" menu group (section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65).
13. Link button for direct navigation around the user interface of the "Limit"
menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Status and Values" menu
group, in order, for example, to have further details about currently active
current limitation or active Limit displayed.

4.3.2.4.2 Power
An overview of all current power values is given in the user interface for the
"Power" menu option of the "Grid" menu sub-group in the "Status and Values"
menu group (Fig. 4.19). All phase power values and apparent, reactive and ac-
tive Limits currently active are displayed here.
1 3
4 6
7 9
10
11
12
Fig. 4.19: U
ser interface for "Power" menu option in the "Status and Values"
menu group
1. Display of respective current apparent power values for all three phases L1,
L2 and L3 in [kVA] in display text boxes.
2. The current total apparent power is displayed here in [kVA] in a display text
box. This value represents the sum of the three current phase apparent
powers (1).
3. This status field is used to indicate that apparent Limit is currently active in
the PVMaster device (e.g. if the rated power of the PVMaster device has
been reached). Details of the current apparent Limit are given in the user
interface for the "Limit" menu option of the "Grid" menu sub-group in the
"Status and Values" menu group (section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).

4. Display of respective current reactive power values for all three phases L1,
L2 and L3 in [kVAr] in display text boxes.
5. The current total reactive power is displayed here in [kVAr] in a display text
box. This value represents the sum of the three current phase reactive pow-
ers (4).
6. This status field is used to indicate that reactive Limit is currently active in
the PVMaster device (e.g. if the PVMaster device has already reached its
maximum possible apparent power or, specifically with PVMaster II, it has
reached its minimum power factor of 0.85). Details of the current reactive
p. 65).
7. Display of respective current active power values for all three phases L1, L2
and L3 in [kW] in display text boxes.
8. The current total active power is displayed here in [kW] in a display text box.
This value represents the sum of the three current phase active powers (7).
9. This status field is used to indicate that active Limit is currently active in
the PVMaster device (e.g. due to active Limit by the grid operator as part
of infeed/grid security management (NSM). Details of the current active
p. 65).
10. Display of respective current power values for all three phases L1, L2 and
L3 in display text boxes.
11. The current power factor is displayed here in a display text box. This value
represents an average value for the current power factors for all three
phases (10).
12. Link button for direct navigation around the user interface of the "Limit"
menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Status and Values" menu
group, in order, for example, to have further details about currently appar-
ent, reactive or active Limit displayed.

4.3.2.4.3 Limit
The active limitations of the device current and the apparent, active and reactive
Limits are displayed in the “Limit” menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of
the "Status and Values" menu group.
4 3 2 1
10 9 8
13 12 11
14 15 16 17 18 19
Fig. 4.20: U
ser interface of the “Limit” menu option in the "Status and Values"
menu group
1. Display of rated current of the PVMaster device in [A] in a configuration text
box. This configuration text box is generally locked for entries, as this value
cannot be edited.
2. The maximum device current currently possible is displayed here in [A]
in a display text box. In addition to active temperature-dependent current
derating, where applicable, the displayed maximum possible device current
also takes account of the apparent Limit functions. If grid voltage values are
elevated, for example, it is possible to limit the maximum possible device
current.
3. The current average value for the grid currents measured for the three
phases is displayed here in [A] in a display text box. It is displayed in the
same way as the display in element (8) in Fig. 4.18 (section 4.3.2.4.1,
p. 61).
4. This status field is used to display any limitation of the device current or ap-
parent, reactive and/or active Limits currently active.
5. If temperature values are elevated, there is an automatic derating of the
current device current. Once a corresponding temperature threshold for a

measured temperature (heat sink temperature or temperature inside the

basic device, capacitor temperature of the base unit (PVMaster III), tem-
perature of filter inductor, transformer temperature or temperature inside the
enclosure) has been exceeded, the current device current is first "frozen" as
a value and limitation of the device current (e.g. to -10%/°C) is activated in
relation to this value. If temperature-based current derating is currently ac-
tive, this is indicated via this status field. The percentage value for the cur-
rently active temperature-based current derating is displayed in the display
text box for the symbol to the right of the status field. If temperature-based
current derating is inactive, a zero is displayed in the display text box.
6. Reduction functions are displayed in three tab options, "Active power" (Fig.
4.20), "Reactive power" (Fig. 4.21) and "Apparent power" (Fig. 4.22) in the
lower section of the user interface.
The statuses and values for all active Limit functions are displayed within the
first tab option, "Active power".
NOTE
If the resulting percentage active Limit of 1% is not reached, active infeed
operation is automatically deactivated and the main contactor(s) is (are) deac-
tivated.
7. Status field for displaying currently active active Limit, e.g. if the rated power
of the PVMaster device has been reached (10) or the active power of the
device is reduced as part of total active Limit (total active power of local
InterCOM device network) (14). The value displayed in this status field also
takes into account the functional active Limit functions (16), (17), (18) and
(19).
8. Configuration text box for displaying the rated active power in [kW] of the
PVMaster device. This configuration text box is generally locked for entries,
as this value cannot be edited. The rated active power of the device is also
the maximum active power of the device.
9. The total active power of the PVMaster device currently fed into the grid
is displayed here in a display text box in [kW] or [%]. The display in [kW]
is analogous to the display in element (11) in Fig. 4.18 (section 4.3.2.4.1,
p. 61). The selection as to whether the value is to be displayed in [kW] or
as a percentage value in relation to the rated active power of the device (8)
is made in the selection box to the right of the display box.
10. Status field for displaying currently active reduction of the current active
power of the PVMaster device (9) to the rated active power of the PVMaster
device (8).
11. Display of the set maximum value for the active power in [kW] of the total
local InterCOM device network in a configuration text box. This configura-
tion text box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries in
this user interface. This setting can be changed in the user interface of the
"General" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration"
12. The current total active power of the entire local InterCOM device network is
shown here in a display text box in [kW].
13. Status field for displaying currently active reduction of the current active
power of the entire local InterCOM device network (12) to the set maximum
value for the active power for the entire local InterCOM device network (11).
14. Symbol with display text box for displaying the current maximum possible
active power in [%]. In addition to the currently active functional active Limit
functions (16), (17), (18) and (19), the value displayed also factors in an
insufficient grid voltage, where applicable, and the associated reduction in

the maximum possible active power of the PVMaster device, dependent on

the device rated current.
15. Symbol with display text box for displaying the percentage active power
limitation of the PVMaster device for reducing the active power of the entire
local InterCOM device network. If this reduction function is active, this is
indicated via the corresponding status field.
16. Symbol with display text box for displaying the currently effective percent-
age active Limit of the device as part of the power supply security and
infeed management (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141). If the function is gener-
ally not used, the value 100% is always displayed. If this reduction function
is active, this is indicated via the corresponding status field.
17. Symbol with display text box for displaying the current percentage active
Limit of the device as part of the static frequency stabilisation (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156). If this reduction function is active, this is indicated
via the corresponding status field.
Limit of the device as a result of any active power ramp that is currently
active (see section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). This reduction function is used for
temporary reduction of the increase in active power following (re)connection
after a grid fault. If this reduction function is active, this is indicated via the
corresponding status field.
Limit of the device as part of the externally controlled active power derat-
ing (see section 4.3.4.8, p. 217). If this reduction function is active, this is
indicated via the corresponding status field.
The statuses and values for all reactive Limit functions are displayed within the
second tab option, "Reactive power".
20
23 22 21
24
26 25
Fig. 4.21: "Reactive power" tab option in the “Limit” menu option
20. Status field for indicating the active reactive power limit at the current time
(e.g. if the PVMaster device has already reached its maximum possible
apparent power or, specifically with PVMaster II, it has reached its minimum
power factor of 0.85)

21. Configuration text box for displaying the maximum reactive power of the
PVMaster device in [kVAr]. This configuration text box is generally locked for
entries, as this value cannot be edited.
22. The current total reactive power of the PVMaster device is displayed here in
[kVAr] in a display text box. This value represents the sum of the three cur-
rent phase reactive powers.
23. Status field for displaying currently active reduction of the current reactive
power of the PVMaster device (22) to the maximum reactive power of the
PVMaster device (21).
24. Once the LVRT process is complete (see section 4.3.4.3.3, p. 159), the
reactive power of the PVMaster device is reduced for a certain period of
time so that the PVMaster is not more underexcited in its reaction when the
grid voltage is restored than it was before the fault occurred. The status field
indicates the status of this reduction function accordingly.
25. The maximum chronological change in the reactive power of the PVMaster
device in [kVAr/s] is displayed in this configuration text box. This configura-
tion text box is generally locked for entries, as this value cannot be edited.
26. Status field for displaying the current status of the reactive Limit to limit the
rate of change in the reactive power in accordance with (25).
The statuses and values for all apparent Limit functions are displayed within the
third tab option, "Apparent power".
27
30 29 28
33 32 31
Fig. 4.22: "Apparent power" tab option in the “Limit” menu option
27. Status field for displaying currently active apparent Limit, e.g. if the rated ap-
parent power of the PVMaster device has been reached (30) or the appar-
ent power of the PVMaster device is active in order to reduce the apparent
power of the entire local InterCOM device network (32).
28. Configuration text box for displaying the rated apparent power of the PV-
Master device in [kVA]. The rated apparent power of the PVMaster device is
also the maximum apparent power of the device. This configuration text box
is generally locked for entries, as this value cannot be edited.
29. The current total apparent power of the PVMaster device is displayed here
in [kVA] in a display text box. This value represents the sum of the three cur-
rent phase apparent powers.
30. Status field for displaying currently active reduction of the current appar-
ent power of the PVMaster device (29) to the rated apparent power of the
PVMaster device (28).

31. Display of the set maximum value for the apparent power in [kVA] of the
total local InterCOM device network in a configuration text box. This configu-
ration text box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries
in this user interface. This setting can be changed in the user interface of
the "General" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configura-
32. The current total apparent power of the entire local InterCOM device net-
work is shown here in a display text box in [kVA].
33. Status field for displaying currently active reduction of the current apparent
power of the entire local InterCOM device network (32) to the set maximum
value for the apparent power for the entire local InterCOM device network
(31).
4.3.2.4.4 Energy
The user interface for the "Energy" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group
of the "Status and Values" menu group is used to display the energy values
achieved so far (fed-in energy) by the PVMaster device, device network or total
plant, as applicable.
NOTE
The device settings for determining energy, the correction of energy meter
values and editing conversion factors and the currency to be used for the pay-
ment display can be configured in the "Energy" menu option in the "Grid" menu
sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).

1 2
Fig. 4.23: U
ser interface of the "Energy" menu option in the "Status and Values"
menu group
The energy values achieved so far by the PVMaster device are displayed in the
“Inverter unit” tab option.
and that the corresponding recorded historical energy data can be called
up in the diagram generator. Pressing this link button calls up the cor-
responding user interface to display the energy diagrams (section 4.3.3,
p. 86).
1. The evaluation/counting of the energy fed in so far or the energy of the
PVMaster device can be implemented by evaluating the S0 pulse output of
an installed meter. To do this, the digital input used in the PVMaster device
must be assigned with the corresponding function (function 34 in Tab. 4.19,
p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). If an S0 pulse input is not evaluat-
ed, the energy forecast is implemented automatically through integration of
the measured grid-side active power. The option field shows the applicable
method used for energy determination of the PVMaster device. This option
field is for display purposes only.
2. If the fed-in energy is evaluated by evaluating the S0 pulse output of an
installed meter and if the PVMaster device digital output used for the
evaluation has been assigned the appropriate function (function 34 in Tab.
4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), then the recorded pulses are

displayed in this status field. The S0 pulse counting can be configured in the
"Energy" menu option within the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configura-
NOTE
It is possible that not every recorded pulse will be displayed via this status
field; this will depend on the current frequency of the S0 pulse interface and
the quality of the connection between the PVMaster device and the local PC.
3. A display text box is used here to display the energy fed in so far by the
PVMaster device or the energy for the current day in [kWh]. The day energy
value can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu option within the
"Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.2,
p. 118). The energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device, or day energy in
[kWh], is also displayed in the start user interface “Overview” (section 4.3.1,
p. 39).
4. Display of the energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or the energy for
the current month in [kWh] in a display text box. The month energy value
can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu option within the "Grid"
menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.2,
p. 118). The energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device, or month en-
ergy in [kWh], is also displayed in the start user interface “Overview” (sec-
tion 4.3.1, p. 39).
5. A display text box is used here to display the energy fed in so far by the PV-
Master device or the energy for the current year in [kWh]. The year energy
value can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu option within the
p. 118).
6. Display of the total energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device, or energy in
[kWh], in a display text box. The total energy value can be corrected manu-
ally in the "Energy" menu option within the "Grid" menu sub-group of the
"Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).
The total energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device, or energy in [kWh], is
also displayed in the "Overview" start user interface (section 4.3.1, p. 39).
7. This display text box is used to display the total CO2 avoidance in [kg]
achieved so far by the PVMaster device. The displayed value is derived
from the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the energy (6) pro-
duced by the PVMaster device with a predefined conversion factor. The
conversion factor used can be edited with the "Energy" menu option in the
p. 118).
8. The total payment achieved by the PVMaster device in the set currency
is displayed here. The displayed value is derived from the conversion of
the total energy fed in so far or the energy (6) produced by the PVMaster
device with a predefined payment factor. The payment factor used, and
the currency displayed, can be edited with the "Energy" menu option in the
p. 118).

If the S0 pulse output of an installed higher-level meter used to meter the total
energy of the total plant is evaluated by a PVMaster device digital input and this
digital input used for the evaluation has been assigned the appropriate function
(function 35 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), then a second
tab option "Total plant" can be selected (Fig. 4.24). This tab option then displays
the energy values achieved so far by the device network or the total plant.
9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Fig. 4.24: "Total plant" tab option in the "Energy" menu option
9. The activation field indicates whether an S0 pulse output of an installed
higher-level meter used to meter the total energy of the total plant is evalu-
ated via a PVMaster device digital input or if a PVMaster device digital input
has been assigned the relevant function (function 35 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168,
see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
10. This status field displays the pulses recorded by the S0 pulse interface.
The S0 pulse counting is configured in the "Energy" menu option within the
p. 118).
NOTE
field; this will depend on the current frequency of the S0 pulse interface and
the quality of the connection between the PVMaster device and the local PC.
11. A display text box is used here to display the energy fed in so far by the en-
tire device network or total plant, or the energy for the current day in [kWh].
The day energy value can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu
option within the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group
(section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).

12. Display of the energy fed in so far by the entire device network or total
plant, or the energy for the current month in [kWh] in a display text box. The
month energy value can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu option
within the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).
13. A display text box is used here to display the energy fed in so far by the en-
tire device network or total plant, or the energy for the current year in [kWh].
The year energy value can be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu
option within the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group
(section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).
14. Display of the total energy fed in so far by the entire device network or total
plant, or energy in [kWh], in a display text box. The total energy value can
be corrected manually in the "Energy" menu option within the "Grid" menu
sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.2, p. 118).
achieved so far by the entire device network or total plant. The displayed
value is derived from the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the
energy (6) produced by the entire device network or total plant with a prede-
fined conversion factor. The conversion factor used can be edited with the
"Energy" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration"
16. The total payment achieved so far by the entire device network or total plant
in the set currency is displayed here. The displayed value is derived from
the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the energy (6) produced
by the entire device network or total plant with a predefined payment factor.
The payment factor used, and the currency displayed, can be edited with
the "Energy" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configura-
4.3.2.4.5 Monitoring
The user interface for the "Monitoring" menu option (Fig. 4.25) in the "Grid"
menu sub-group of the "Status and Values" menu group contains elements for
displaying the current status of the integrated grid monitoring functions. Moni-
toring settings cannot be edited in this user interface. It is for display purposes
only.
NOTE
A detailed display of the current state of the integrated grid monitoring and
the respective settings for the grid monitoring functions is given in the user
interlace for the "Monitoring" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the
"Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). The respective set-
tings for the grid monitoring functions can be edited in this user interface from
the "Fitter" user level upwards.

1
2
3 4 5
Fig. 4.25: U
ser interface of the "Monitoring" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. The country code ("Grid code") used to initialise functions and limit values
of the integrated grid monitoring functions is displayed here in plain text in a
display text box.
2. Activation field for indicating whether parameters or limit values for the grid
monitoring functionalities were changed manually for a country code ("Grid
code") after initialisation and as result differ from the parameters or limit val-
ues stored for the country code ("Grid code"). This activation field is gener-
ally locked for changes and is merely intended for display purposes.
3. Display of rated grid voltage in [V] in a configuration text box. The limit value
percentages of the grid voltage monitoring functions (section 4.3.4.2.3,
p. 124) and grid voltage-dependent network support functions (sec-
tion 4.3.4.3, p. 147) are based on this rated value. This configuration text
box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries in this user
interface. This setting can be edited in the user interface for the "General"
menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" men (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115) or in the user interface of the "Monitoring" menu
option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu group (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).

4. Display of set rated grid frequency in [Hz] in a configuration text box.

The limit value percentages of the grid frequency monitoring functions
(section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) and static grid frequency stabilisation (sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156) are based on this rated value. This configuration text
box is merely used for display and is generally locked for entries in this user
interface. This setting can be edited in the user interface for the "General"
menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu
group (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115) or in the user interface of the "Monitor-
ing" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-group of the "Configuration" menu
group (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
5. Activation field for indicating whether or not the integrated active island-
ing detection ("anti-islanding") has been activated. This activation field is
generally locked for changes and is merely intended for display purposes.
The integrated active islanding detection can be activated or deactivated via
the user interface for the "Monitoring" menu option in the "Grid" menu sub-
group of the "Configuration" menu group (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
6. The active counting of the connection delay through the integrated grid
monitoring function (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) is shown as a progress dis-
play. This refers to the counting of the first instance connection delay (main
controller) of the device-internal redundant grid monitoring. Counting begins
as soon as all grid parameters are approved. Counting is reset to 0% after a
grid fault or device restart. If the counting of the first instance of the device-
internal redundant grid monitoring with approved grid parameters reaches
100%, the first release is issued for connection by the redundant grid moni-
toring (see no. 8 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
monitoring function (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) is shown as a progress
display. This refers to the counting of the second instance connection delay
(safety controller) of the device-internal redundant grid monitoring. Count-
ing begins as soon as all grid parameters are approved. Counting is reset to
0% after a grid fault or device restart. If the counting of the second instance
of the device-internal redundant grid monitoring with approved grid param-
eters reaches 100%, the second release is issued for connection by the
redundant grid monitoring (see no. 9 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1,
p. 41).
8. When using the active Limit function to temporarily reduce the increase
in active power following successful (re)connection after a grid fault (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124), the actual reduction value of the ramp function is
correspondingly shown in this progress display. If this active power ramp
function has been deactivated, this progress display is hidden in the user
interface.
9. The integrated grid monitoring state is displayed here via a status field and
as a plain text message in a display text box. The possible states are listed
in Tab. 4.13, p. 76.

Tab. 4.13: States of integrated grid monitoring

No. State/plain text message Description
The AC main switch of the PVMaster is
not switched on and the integrated grid
monitoring is therefore inactive. The
internal evaluation of the grid measured
0 ...AC switch inactive
values and the corresponding monitoring
as configured in the grid monitoring func-
tions do not start until the AC main switch
is switched on (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
switched on and the integrated grid moni-
toring is therefore active. The limit values
for the grid voltage and grid frequency
for the additional connection conditions
as part of the grid monitoring functions
1 ...Grid OK / Delay active
(section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) are currently
being met. The counting of the connec-
tion delay is therefore running. Connection
and active infeed operation can only take
place following the expiry of the connec-
tion delay.
toring is therefore active. All limit values
2 …Grid OK for the grid voltage and grid frequency as
part of the grid monitoring functions (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) are currently being
met.
toring is therefore active. The limit values
for the grid voltage and/or grid frequency
for the additional connection conditions as
part of the grid monitoring functions (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) are currently being
3 ...Wait for Grid OK met. The counting of the connection delay
is therefore not running or is being reset.
If the limit values for the grid voltage and
grid frequency for the additional connec-
tion conditions as part of the grid monitor-
ing functions are still not being met after
10 minutes, the corresponding error state
is triggered (see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
There is a malfunction in the grid and
the corresponding error state (see sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221) has been triggered.
4 ...Grid fault
Active infeed operation may have been
stopped and there may have been a dis-
connection from the grid.

4.3.2.5 Temperatures
A few important temperature values in the PVMaster device are measured to
monitor correct operation of the device. The user interface for the "Tempera-
tures" menu option (Fig. 4.26) in the "Status and Values" menu group contains
a display of all temperature measurements for the PVMaster device. Depend-
ing on some of these measured values, a temperature-dependent reduction
of the present device current (derating) takes place at elevated temperatures,
for example, to protect components inside the device against overheating. At
extremely high temperature levels, it is possible that the device will be deacti-
vated and the corresponding error state will be triggered (see section 4.3.5.1,
p. 221).
NOTE
Only temperature values measured internally in the PVMaster device or re-
corded via the PT100 or analogue inputs of the PVMaster are displayed in this
user interface. Temperature measurements via the PT100 inputs of connected
String Combiner Boxes (SCBs) are displayed in the "String currents" menu
option within the "PV generator" menu sub-group of the "Status and Values"
REFERENCE
A description of the available PT100 inputs and analogue inputs of the PVMas-
ter device, and information about the options for connecting further tempera-
ture sensors and measurements can be found in the respective PVMaster
installation manual.

1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
11
Fig. 4.26: U
ser interface of the "Temperatures" menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. The current heat sink temperature of the basic device in the PVMaster en-
closure is displayed here in [°C] in a display text box. If the values obtained
from this temperature measurement are elevated, a temperature-dependent
reduction of the present device current (derating) takes place to protect
components inside the device against overheating. If the heat sink tem-
perature is extremely high, it is possible that the device will be deactivated
and the corresponding error state will be triggered (ID 06/01, see Tab. 4.31,
p. 224).
NOTE
For PVMaster devices with liquid cooling, the rise in temperature of the heat
sink temperature in the basic device is also monitored and, in the case of sud-
den changes in the temperature, the corresponding error state is triggered (ID
06/02, see Tab. 4.31, p. 224). With PVMaster III devices, the rise in capacitor
temperature in the basic device is also monitored and, when there are sudden
changes in the temperature, the corresponding error state is triggered.
2. Display of the temperature of the capacitor at the current time inside the
basic device in the PVMaster enclosure in [°C] in a display text box. If the
capacitor temperature measurement is very high, the device current at the
current time is reduced according to the temperature (derating) in order to
protect components inside the device from overheating. If the temperature
of the power stage is extremely high, the device may be disabled and the
corresponding error state triggered.

3. Display of the current temperature inside the basic device in the PVMaster
enclosure in [°C] in a display text box. If the values obtained from this tem-
perature measurement are elevated, a temperature-dependent reduction
of the present device current (derating) takes place to protect components
inside the device against overheating. If the temperature inside the basic
device is extremely high, it is possible that the device will be deactivated
and the corresponding error state will be triggered (ID 06/03, Tab. 4.31,
p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
4. Display of the current temperature of the filter inductor in the PVMaster
enclosure in [°C] in a display text box. If the values obtained from this tem-
perature measurement are elevated, a temperature-dependent reduction
of the present device current (derating) takes place to protect components
inside the device against overheating. If the temperature of the filter inductor
is extremely high, it is possible that the device will be deactivated and the
corresponding error state will be triggered (ID 06/04, Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see
section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
5. Display text box for displaying the measured transformer temperature in
[°C]. If the values obtained from this temperature measurement are el-
evated, a temperature-dependent reduction of the present device current
(derating) takes place to protect the transformer and components inside the
device against overheating. If the temperature of the transformer is extreme-
ly high, it is possible that the PVMaster device will be deactivated and the
corresponding error state will be triggered (ID 06/05, Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see
section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
PVMaster TT/EN only For PVMaster devices with an integrated low-voltage transformer (TT model
series) or external low-voltage transformer (EN model series), the measured
transformer temperature is always displayed in this display text box.
PVMaster EM only For PVMaster devices with an external medium-voltage transformer, the
measured transformer temperature in [°C] is displayed in this display text
box if the temperature sensor is evaluated via a PT100 input of the PVMas-
ter device and this PT100 input has been assigned the corresponding func-
tion (function 2 in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, see section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
The transformer temperature is also displayed if this temperature value is
supplied by another InterCOM node in a local InterCOM device network
(function 0 in Tab. 4.28, p. 207, section 4.3.4.5.2, p. 206).
The measured value for the transformer temperature must be available and
displayed here (by means of direct measurement via a PT100 input or via
InterCOM device intercommunication) in order for the value to be monitored
and for the requisite temperature-dependent reduction of the present device
current (derating), where applicable, or the excess temperature shutdown
function to be monitored.
ATTENTION
In a device network with several PVMaster devices and the use of a com-
mon medium-voltage transformer, the temperature-dependent derating of
the current can only effectively protect the transformer against overheating if
the transformer temperature is known for all PVMaster devices in the device
network and as a result all devices are involved in the reduction of the present
current.

All devices 6. The current temperature inside the enclosure is displayed here in [°C] in a
display text box.
The temperature sensor required for this is available in each PVMaster as
standard and is evaluated via a PT100 input on the device. To this end, the
corresponding PT100 input of the device is assigned the corresponding
function as standard (no. 3 in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
There is also the option of using the PT100 input used for this to measure
another temperature if the number of free PT100 inputs is not sufficient for
temperature measurements required by the user.
7. Display of the measured value for an optional “Outdoor” temperature meas-
urement via a PT100 input of the PVMaster device in [°C] in a display text
box. This temperature is only displayed if a corresponding temperature sen-
sor has been connected to a PT100 input of the PVMaster device and this
PT100 input has been assigned the relevant function (no. 8 in Tab. 4.24,
p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
8. Display of the measured value for an optional “Cabinet ambient” tempera-
ture measurement via an PT100 input of the PVMaster device in [°C] in
a display text box. This temperature is only displayed if a corresponding
temperature sensor has been connected to a PT100 input of the PVMaster
device and this PT100 input has been assigned the relevant function (no. 6
in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
9. Display of the measured value for an optional “Station interior” temperature
measurement via a PT100 input of the PVMaster device in [°C] in a display
text box. This temperature is only displayed if a corresponding temperature
sensor has been connected to a PT100 input of the PVMaster device and
this PT100 input has been assigned the relevant function (no. 7 in Tab.
4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
10. Display of the measured value for an optional “Transformer ambient” tem-
perature measurement via a PT100 input of the PVMaster device in [°C]
in a display text box. This temperature is only displayed if a corresponding
in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
11. The optional temperature measurements "Main Combiner Box 1" to "Main
Combiner Box 4" obtained via the PT100 inputs of the PVMaster device
are displayed in [°C] in display text boxes in the "Main Combiner Box" tab
option. These temperature values are only displayed if corresponding tem-
perature sensors have been connected to PT100 inputs of the PVMaster
device and these PT100 inputs have been assigned the relevant functions
(nos. 9, 10, 11 and 12 in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).

11
12
Fig. 4.27: "Module temperature" tab option of the "Temperatures" user interface
12. Display of the measured value for an optional module temperature meas-
urement "Module temperature M1" via an analogue input of the PVMaster
device in [°C] in a display text box. This temperature is only displayed if
a corresponding temperature measurement is evaluated via an analogue
input of the PVMaster device and this analogue input has been assigned the
relevant function (no. 12 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
13. Display of the measured value for an optional module temperature meas-
urement "Module temperature M2" via an analogue input of the PVMaster
device in [°C] in a display text box. This temperature is only displayed if
a corresponding temperature measurement is evaluated via an analogue
input of the PVMaster device and this analogue input has been assigned the
relevant function (no. 13 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
13 15
14
Fig. 4.28: “Ext. Temperature” tab option of the "Temperatures" user interface
14. Display of measured value for an optional temperature measurement "Tem-
perature Ext. 1" via an analogue input of the PVMaster device in [°C] in a
display text box. This temperature is only displayed if a corresponding tem-
perature measurement is evaluated via an analogue input of the PVMaster
device and this analogue input has been assigned the relevant function (no.
14 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).

15. Display of measured value for a further optional temperature measurement

"Temperature Ext. 2" via an analogue input of the PVMaster device in [°C]
in a display text box. This temperature is only displayed if a correspond-
ing temperature measurement is evaluated via an analogue input of the
PVMaster device and this analogue input has been assigned the relevant
function (no. 15 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
16. Display of measured value for an optional temperature measurement “Ext.
Temperature” via a PT100 input of the PVMaster device in [°C] in a dis-
play text box. This “Ext. Temperature” is only displayed if a corresponding
in Tab. 4.24, p. 194, section 4.3.4.4.3.1, p. 193).
4.3.2.6 Inputs and outputs

This menu sub-group “In-/Outputs” of the "Status and Values" menu group
contains menu options for displaying the configuration and status of the avail-
able digital inputs and outputs, and the analogue inputs. The menu options in
this menu sub-group are only used for display purposes. Changes to settings
are not possible in these menu options. The inputs and outputs are configured
in the menu options in the “In-/Outputs” menu sub-group of the "Configuration"
REFERENCE
A description of the available digital inputs and outputs and analogue inputs of
the PVMaster device, and information about wiring can be found in the rel-
evant PVMaster installation manual.
4.3.2.6.1 Digital inputs
The user interface of the "Dig. Inputs" menu option (Fig. 4.29) in the “In-/Out-
puts” menu sub-group of the "Status and Values" menu group is used to display
the configuration and status of the individual digital inputs of the PVMaster
device.

1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.29: U
ser interface of the “Dig. Inputs” menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. Display of assignment numbers of the respective digital inputs of the PV-
Master device in display text boxes.
NOTE
The number of available digital inputs varies according to the PVMaster device
type.
2. The current physical statuses of the respective digital inputs are displayed in
these status fields.
3. If a logical inversion is activated via the configuration of the digital inputs
(section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), this setting is displayed accordingly via these
activation fields of the respective digital inputs.
4. The respective assigned functions of the digital inputs are displayed in these
display text boxes as plain text. The possible functions of digital inputs are
listed and described in Tab. 4.19, p. 168 (section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
5. These status fields indicate the respective function status dependent on
the physical status of the respective digital inputs and taking account of any
activated logical inversion of the signal status.

4.3.2.6.2 Digital outputs

The user interface of the “Dig. Outputs” menu option (Fig. 4.30) in the “In-/Out-
the configuration and status of the individual digital outputs of the PVMaster
device.
1 2 3 4
Fig. 4.30: U
ser interface of the “Dig. Outputs” menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. Display of assignment numbers of the respective digital outputs of the PV-
Master device in display text boxes.
NOTE
The number of available digital outputs varies according to the PVMaster
device type.
2. The respective assigned functions of the digital outputs are displayed in

these display text boxes as plain text. The possible functions of digital out-
puts are described in section 4.3.4.4.2, p. 176.
3. If a logical inversion is activated via the configuration of the digital outputs
(section 4.3.4.4.2, p. 176), this setting is displayed accordingly via these
activation fields of the respective digital outputs.
4. Status fields for displaying the current physical statuses of the respective
digital outputs.

4.3.2.6.3 Analogue inputs

The user interface of the “Ana. Inputs” menu option (Fig. 4.31) in the “In-/Out-
the configuration and status of the individual analogue inputs of the PVMaster
device.
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.31: U
ser interface of the “Ana. Inputs” menu option in the "Status and
Values" menu group
1. Display of assignment numbers of the respective analogue inputs of the
PVMaster device in display text boxes.
NOTE
The number of available analogue inputs varies according to the PVMaster
device type.
2. The current unscaled analogue raw values for the respective analogue
inputs of the PVMaster device are displayed here in display text boxes.
3. Display of physical unit of displayed analogue raw values for the respective
analogue inputs in display text boxes as plain text. The respective displayed
unit corresponds to the respective configuration of the signal type for the
analogue signal (section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
4. The respective assigned functions of the analogue inputs are displayed in
these display text boxes as plain text. The possible functions of analogue
inputs are listed and described in Tab. 4.23, p. 190 (section 4.3.4.4.3,
p. 189).

5. The respective function value is displayed here in display text boxes in the
corresponding unit for the function. The value displayed corresponds to the
filtered and scaled analogue raw value, in accordance with the configuration
of the respective analogue input (section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189).
4.3.3 History and statistics

The "History and Statistics" menu group contains menu options for retrieving,
displaying and processing recorded historic data and measured values.
ATTENTION
The retrievable historic data is stored on the microSD card in the basic de-
vice in the PVMaster enclosure in the form of a large number of binary files. If
these files are manually deleted from the microSD card, the historic data can
no longer be retrieved via the operator application. The relevant files required
are filed in the LOG_DAY, LOG_DEF, LOG_POR, LOG_SCB and LOG_TMP
directories.
NOTE
When the menu options of the "History and Statistics" menu group are
called up and if the respective time periods viewed for the recorded data are
changed, the requisite data are always downloaded from the microSD card of
the PVMaster device. Corresponding waiting times will be necessary depend-
ing on the quality of the connection between the PVMaster device and the
local PC.
4.3.3.1 Day
The menu options in the "Day" menu sub-group of the "History and Statistics"
menu group are used to retrieve, display and process recorded values through
the integrated data logger. This "day history data" for a selectable day can be
displayed graphically using the relevant diagram functions or displayed in tabu-
lar form.
NOTE
The individual day history data, recorded by the integrated data logger, is
retained for retrieval for a total of 365 days. Older data cannot be retrieved via
the operator application.
4.3.3.1.1 Diagram
The user interface of the first menu option "Diagram" (Fig. 4.32) in the "Day"
menu sub-group allows recorded measured values for a selectable day to be
retrieved, displayed and processed.
Within the individual user interfaces of the operator application, values

and signals that are recorded by the integrated data logger as standard
are indicated by a red link button next to the corresponding display text
box. The relevant recorded historic day history data can be retrieved in the
"Diagram" menu option. All the values and signals available as standard
are listed and described in Tab. 4.14, p. 91.
NOTE
The integrated data logger for this day history data works with a cycle time
of one minute. This is therefore the highest possible temporal resolution for
representation in the diagram or table.

1 2
3
4 5 6 7 8 9
10
Fig. 4.32: U
ser interface of the "Diagram" menu option in the "History and Sta-
tistics" menu group
1. This is where the required day or date for which the recorded values are to
be displayed is selected. The date can be selected and configured either via
the calendar function or by means of manual entries within the configuration
text box. However, only days in the past can be selected. Furthermore, it is
not possible to retrieve recorded values that are older than 365 days.
2. This selection box is used to specify the number of days to be displayed
from the desired day or date. You can select a maximum of 7 days. The
waiting times may increase correspondingly, depending on the choice of
days to display and the connection quality between the PVMaster device
and the local PC.
3. Three tab options are available in the user interface. The first tab option
"Diagram" (Fig. 4.32) contains a diagram generator for graphic representa-
tion of recorded data. The second tab option "Table" (Fig. 4.33, p. 89) is
used for tabular representation of the values and for saving the retrieved
day history data to the local PC. The last "User-defined signals" tab option
(Fig. 4.34) is used to configure up to four user-defined signals to be record-
ed by the integrated data logger.
4. The display of the selected signal in the left-hand scale of the diagram can
be activated or deactivated via this activation field.
5. Selection box for selecting the required signal on the left-hand scale of the
diagram. All the values and signals available as standard are listed and
described in Tab. 4.14, p. 91.

NOTE
Changes to the required signal via this selection box will not result in signifi-
cant waiting times, as all signals and values for a given day are always loaded
at the same time.
6. Selection box for selecting the signal colour to be used for the left-hand
scale of the diagram. The selected colour is used to label the left-hand scale
and for the corresponding signal.
7. The display of the second selected signal in the right-hand scale of the dia-
gram can be activated or deactivated via this activation field.
8. Selection box for selecting the second required signal on the right-hand
scale of the diagram. All the values and signals available as standard are
listed and described in Tab. 4.14, p. 91.
NOTE
Changes to the required signal via this selection box will not result in signifi-
cant waiting times, as all signals and values for a given day are always loaded
at the same time.
9. Selection box for selecting the signal colour to be used for the right-hand
scale of the diagram. The selected colour is used to label the right-hand
scale and for the corresponding signal.
10. The selected signals for the chosen date and the selected number of days
are displayed in the diagram in their selected colours. The overall signal
progression over the entire selected day or selected days is constantly dis-
played in the top section of the diagram. The left-hand and right-hand scales
are always scaled in the top section of the diagram such that the overall
signal progression is shown in full. The position and width of the window
shown in this section above the signal progression can be varied accord-
ingly. The user can determine the section of the signal progression to be
displayed in the bottom section of the diagram by adjusting the position and
width of this window. The left-hand and right-hand scales on the lower sec-
tion of the diagram are always configured such that selected section of the
selected signals is displayed in full. This creates a corresponding enlarge-
ment effect to allow partial sections of the day history data to be analysed in
more depth.

The second tab option “Table” (Fig. 4.33) is used for tabular presentation of the
values and for saving the retrieved day history data to the local PC.
12
11
Fig. 4.33: "Table" tab option in the "Diagram" menu option

11. The “scrollable” table field for a tabular display of the recorded values for
the selected day or selected days contains a separate column for each
recorded signal. All the values and signals available as standard are listed
and described in Tab. 4.14, p. 91. The time stamp for the recorded data,
consisting of the date and time, is always displayed in the first column.
12. The values shown in the table field (10) for the selected day or selected
days can be saved to the local PC in a .csv file. This button opens a file
browser on the local PC in order to specify a destination location and file
name for the .csv file.

The last "User-defined signals" tab option (Fig. 4.34) is used to configure up to
four user-defined signals to be recorded by the integrated data logger.
13 14
15 16
Fig. 4.34: "User-defined signals" tab option in the "Diagram" menu option
13. The respective signal names of the user-defined signals, via which the se-
lection in the diagram generator or the display in tabular view is performed,
are displayed here. A total of up to four user-defined signals ("User 1" to
"User 4") can be configured.
Changes from 14. The four user-defined signals to be recorded by the integrated data logger
Fitter are assigned via these selection boxes ("mapping"). The selection boxes
contain predefined signals for selection. The predefined signals available in
the selection boxes are listed and described in Tab. 4.15, p. 92. Following
selection of a predefined signal via these selection boxes, the correspond-
ing parameter ID is displayed in the relevant configuration text box (15) and
the corresponding parameter sub-ID in the respective configuration text box
(16). Alternatively, "User-defined" can be selected from the list in the selec-
tion box, and then the parameter ID and parameter sub-ID for the required
signal or parameter is entered manually via the configuration text boxes (15)
and (16).
15. Configuration text boxes for displaying and configuring the parameter ID for
the respective required signal or parameter for assignment ("mapping") to
a user-defined signal to be recorded by the integrated data logger. When
predefined signals are selected from selection box (14), only the parameter
ID is displayed and the configuration text box is locked for entries. If "User-
defined" is selected from the list in the selection box (14), the parameter
ID for the required signal or parameter must be entered manually via the
configuration text box.
16. Configuration text boxes for displaying and configuring the parameter sub-
ID for the respective required signal or parameter for assignment ("map-
ping") to a user-defined signal to be recorded by the integrated data logger.
When predefined signals are selected from the selection box (14), only the
parameter sub-ID is displayed and the configuration text box is locked for
entries. If "User-defined" is selected from the list in the selection box (14),
the parameter sub-ID for the required signal or parameter must be entered
manually via the configuration text box.

Tab. 4.14: Available signals and values recorded by the data logger
No. Description Description Table
0 DC voltage [V] DC generator voltage in [V] Vdc
1 DC current [A] DC generator current in [A] Idc
2 DC power [kW] DC generator power in [W] Pdc
Linked grid voltage as average value for the three linked
3 AC voltage [V] Uac
grid voltages in [V]
Average value for the measured grid currents for the three
4 AC current [A] Iac
phases in [A]
Total active power as a sum of the three phase active pow-
5 AC power [kW] Pac
ers in [W]
Power factor as an average value for the power factors for
6 Power factor cosPhi
all three phases
Total reactive power as a sum of the three phase reactive
7 Reactive power [kVAr] Q
powers in [kVAr]
8 Grid frequency [Hz] Grid frequency in [Hz] Freq
9 Temperature transformer [°C] Temperature of transformer in [°C] T_Transf
10 Temperature filter choke [°C] Temperature of filter inductor in [°C] T_Choke
11 Temperature heat sink [°C] Temperature of heat sink of basic device in [°C] T_Heats
12 Temperature cabinet [°C] Temperature inside enclosure in [°C] T_Cabinet
Optional Temperature Ext. measurement via a PT100 input
13 Temperature External [°C] T_Ext
of the PVMaster in [°C]
Solar radiation G1 via an analogue input of the PVMaster in
14 Irradiation 1 [W/m²] Irrad_1
[W/m²]
Solar radiation G2 via an analogue input of the PVMaster in
15 Irradiation 2 [W/m²] Irrad_2
[W/m²]
Module temperature M1 via an analogue input of the PV-
16 Module temperature 1 [°C] T_M1
Master in [°C]
Module temperature M2 via an analogue input of the PV-
17 Module temperature 2 [°C] T_M2
Master in [°C]
Temperature Ext. Ext1 via an analogue input of the PVMas-
18 External temperature 1 [°C] T_Ext1
ter in [°C]
Temperature Ext. Ext1 via an analogue input of the PVMas-
19 External temperature 2 [°C] T_Ext2
ter in [°C]
Wind speed V1 via an analogue input of the PVMaster in Wind_
20 Wind speed 1 [m/s]
[m/s] Speed1
Wind speed V2 via an analogue input of the PVMaster in Wind_
21 Wind speed 2 [m/s]
[m/s] Speed2
Wind direction D1 via an analogue input of the PVMaster in
22 Wind direction 1 [°] Wind_Dir1
[°]
Wind direction D2 via an analogue input of the PVMaster
23 Wind direction 2 [°] Wind_Dir2
in[°]
24 User-defined signal 1 User-defined signal, recorded by the data logger User1

Tab. 4.15: Available predefined assignments for user-defined signals

No. Description Description ID/sub-ID
Asymmetry within the divided DC link voltage of the de-
0 DC voltage asymmetry [V] 1) vice in [V]. This value is only available with the PVMas- 509/0
ter III.
1 Insulation resistance [kOhm] 1) 2) Insulation resistance or grounding resistance in [kOhm] 565/0
Capacitor temperature of the basic device in the PVMas-
2 Temperature of link capacitor [°C] 1) ter enclosure in [°C]. This value is only available on the 550/1
PVMaster III.
Temperature inside basic device in PVMaster enclosure
3 Temperature interior [°C] 551/0
in [°C]
Temperature transformer ambient
4 Ambient temperature of transformer in [°C] 553/8
[°C]
5 Temperature cabinet ambient [°C] Ambient temperature of enclosure in [°C] 553/9
6 Temperature station interior [°C] Interior temperature of station in [°C] 553/10
7 Temperature outdoor [°C] Temperature Ext. in [°C] 553/11
Temperature Main Combiner Box 1 Temperature measurement in the 1st Main Combiner
8 553/12
[°C] Box in [°C]
Temperature Main Combiner Box 2 Temperature measurement in the 2nd Main Combiner
9 553/13
[°C] Box in [°C]
Temperature Main Combiner Box 3 Temperature measurement in the 3rd Main Combiner
10 553/14
[°C] Box in [°C]
Temperature Main Combiner Box 4 Temperature measurement in the 4th Main Combiner
11 553/15
[°C] Box in [°C]
Average phase offset between grid voltage and current
12 Phase shift [°deg] 523/0
fed into the grid in [°deg]
Total apparent power as a sum of the three phase ap-
13 Apparent power [kVA] 538/0
parent powers in [kVA]
14 Grid voltage L1 [V] Grid phase voltage L1 in [V] 530/0
Sliding average value for grid phase voltage L1 for moni-
17 Average grid voltage L1 [V] 530/3
toring the voltage quality in [V]
20 Grid current L1 [A] Grid current for phase L1 in [A] 531/0
Maximum possible device current in [A] taking into ac-
count whether temperature-dependent current limitation
23 Max. grid current [A] 542/0
and apparent Limit are active (see section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65).
Total active power of the device in relation to the maxi-
24 Active power load [%] 543/0
mum possible active power in [%]
1) …This signal is not available for all PVMaster device types.
2) …This value is used for the first user-defined signal as standard.
3) …This value is used for the second user-defined signal as standard.
4) …This value is used for the third user-defined signal as standard.
5) …This value is used for the fourth user-defined signal as standard.

No. Description Description ID/sub-ID

Maximum possible active power in [%] taking into ac-
count whether any functional active Limit functions are
active and whether the grid voltage is low, with the re-
25 Max. active power [%] 546/0
sulting reduction of the maximum possible active power
of the PVMaster device based on the device rated cur-
rent. (See section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
26 GFDI error current [mA] 1) Ground fault current in [mA] 568/0
27 RCM error current [mA] 1) Fault current in [mA] 570/0
Decimal values for signal statuses of digital inputs
used for setpoint specification of the active Limit as
28 Power reduction digital signals 138/2
part of infeed/grid security management (NSM) (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Analogue value in [%] for analogue input used for set-
point specification of the active Limit as part of infeed/
29 Power reduction analog signal [%] 576/0
grid security management (NSM) (section 4.3.4.2.5,
p. 141).
Maximum percentage value for active power of device
30 Power reduction Pac-limit [%] 3) as part of power supply security and infeed manage- 545/2
ment (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Percentage active Limit of device as part of static fre-
31 Frequency stabil. Pac-limit [%] 4) 545/3
quency stabilisation (see section 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156)
Decimal values for signal statuses for digital inputs used
for setpoint specification of the reactive power control as
32 Q control digital signals 138/3
part of static grid voltage stabilisation (section 4.3.4.3.1,
p. 147).
Analogue value in [%] for analogue input used for
setpoint specification of the reactive power control as
33 Q control analogue signal [%] 581/0
part of static grid voltage stabilisation (section 4.3.4.3.1,
p. 147).
Setpoint specification for reactive power control as part
34 Q control reference value of static grid voltage stabilisation (section 4.3.4.3.1, 582/0
p. 147).
Decimal value for status of all digital inputs (ENPO, DI00
35 Digital input state (all) 138/0
- DI10).
Decimal value for status of digital inputs with release for
36 Digital input state (customer) 138/1
use by the user.
The user-defined signal is assigned ("mapped") by
manually specifying the parameter number, e.g. param-
37 User-defined 5) x/y
eter 768/0 for percentage current limitation by means of
temperature-dependent derating.
1) …This signal is not available for all PVMaster device types.
2) …This value is used for the first user-defined signal as standard.
3) …This value is used for the second user-defined signal as standard.
4) …This value is used for the third user-defined signal as standard.
5) …This value is used for the fourth user-defined signal as standard.
4.3.3.1.2 String currents

The user interface of the second menu option "String currents" (Fig. 4.35) in the
"Day" menu sub-group allows recorded SCB day history data from connected
String Combiner Boxes (SCBs) (string currents, solar radiation, wind speed,
temperature) for a selectable day to be retrieved, displayed and processed.

NOTE
The integrated data logger for this SCB day history data works with a cycle
time of fifteen minutes. This is therefore the highest possible time resolution for
representation in the diagram or table.
2 1
3
6
7
5
Fig. 4.35: U
ser interface of the "String currents" menu option in the "History and
Statistics" menu group
1. This is where the required day or date for which the recorded values from
the respective SCB are to be displayed is selected. The date can be select-
ed and configured either via the calendar function or by means of manual
entries within the configuration text box. However, only days in the past can
be selected. Furthermore, it is not possible to retrieve recorded values that
are older than 365 days.
2. Selection box for selecting the SCB for displaying the corresponding SCB
day history data within the user interface. Only those SCBs that have been
activated via the configuration (section 4.3.4.6, p. 210) can be selected
within this selection box.
3. Two tab options are available in the user interface. The first tab option "Dia-
gram" (Fig. 4.35) contains a diagram generator for graphic representation of
recorded SCB day history data. The second tab option "Table" (Fig. 4.36) is
used for tabular representation of the values and saving the retrieved SCB
history data to the local PC.

4. The diagram area is located in the upper section of the "Diagram" tab
option. The selected string currents (5) for the selected SCBs (2) for the se-
lected day (1) are shown here in their respective colours, with the left-hand
scale representing the scaling of the string currents in [mA]. The scaling is
always configured such that all selected string currents are displayed fully
in the diagram. In addition, there is also the option of displaying another
recorded signal (solar radiation, wind speed or temperature) in the dia-
gram, selectable from the selection box (6), with the right-hand scale in the
diagram representing the scaling of the selected signal. The colour of the
selected signal and the right-hand scale is the same as the colour selected
in the selection box (7).
5. The string currents to be displayed in the diagram (4) are selected via these
fifteen activation fields. The activated string currents are shown in the dia-
gram in their respective colours.
6. Selection box for selecting a further recorded SCB signal (solar radiation,
wind speed or temperature) for displaying in the diagram (4). The selected
signal is then displayed in the diagram in the colour selected in the selection
box (7), with the right-hand scale in the diagram representing the scaling of
the signal.
7. Selection box for selecting the colour to be used for the signal in the dia-
gram chosen via the selection box (6) and for the right-hand scale of the
diagram.
8. The displayed diagram is not updated automatically. If the current date has
been selected via (1), the diagram can be updated by pressing this button,
in order to have new SCB values recorded by the data logger included in
the diagram.

The second tab option "Table" (Fig. 4.36) is used for tabular representation of
the values and for saving the retrieved SCB day history data to the local PC.
10
9
Fig. 4.36: "Table" tab option in the "String currents" menu option
9. The "scrollable" table field for a tabular display of the values recorded for
the SCB for the selected day (1), selected via the selection box (2), contains
a separate column for each string current channel (I01 to I15). There are
up to fifteen string current values and these are displayed in [mA]. The last
three columns are used for displaying
a) the solar radiation (G0) in [W/m²]
b) the wind speed (W_V0) in [m/s]
c) the measured temperature (T0) in [°C].
The time stamp for the recorded values, consisting of the date and time, is
always displayed in the first column.
10. The values for the selected day (1) for the SCB selected via the selection
box (2), shown in the table field (9) can be saved to the local PC in a .csv
file. This button opens a file browser on the local PC in order to specify a
destination location and file name for the .csv file.

4.3.3.2 Month
The user interface for the "Month" menu option (Fig. 4.37) in the "History and
Statistics" menu group is used to retrieve, display and process the day energy
values of the PVMaster device recorded by the integrated data logger. The day
energy values for a selectable month can be displayed graphically using the ap-
propriate bar chart function or be displayed in tabular form.
1
2
4 5 6
Fig. 4.37: U
ser interface of the "Month" menu option in the "History and Statis-
tics" menu group
1. The required month for which the recorded day energy values of the PV-
Master device are to be displayed in an overview is selected here. The
month is selected via two selection boxes that can be used to select the
required year and month.
2. Two tab options are available in the user interface. The first tab option "Dia-
gram" (Fig. 4.37) contains a bar chart generator for representation of the
individual day energy values of the PVMaster device. The second tab option
"Table" (Fig. 4.38) is used for tabular representation of the values and for
saving the retrieved day energy values to the local PC.

3. The day energy values for the month selected via (1) - up to 31 - are repre-
sented in a bar chart in the diagram area of the "Diagram" tab option. The
bar chart is always scaled such that the highest day energy value for the
selected month is also shown in full.
4. Selection box for selecting the values to be displayed in the bar chart. The
"Energy [kWh]" is selected from the list as standard here, which means that
the day energy values for the selected month will be represented as energy
in [kWh] in the bar chart displayed. Alternatively, the calculated values for
the CO2 avoidance in [kg] or the calculated payment in the set currency can
be displayed in the bar chart. The conversion factors set and used accord-
ingly are indicated in the configuration text boxes (5) and (6).
5. Display of the set conversion factor for calculating the CO2 avoidance from
an energy value in a configuration text box. This configuration text box
is only used for display purposes and is generally locked for entries. The
p. 118).
6. Display of the set conversion factor for calculating the payment from an
energy value in a configuration text box. This configuration text box is only
used for display purposes and is generally locked for entries. The conver-
sion factor used can be edited with the "Energy" menu option in the "Grid"
p. 118).
7. Display of total energy in [kWh] for the selected month.
the values and saving the retrieved day energy values for the selected month to
the local PC.

Fig. 4.38: "Table" tab option in the "Month" menu option

8. The "scrollable" table field for a tabular display of the recorded day energy
values for the month selected via (1) contains a separate column for
a) the respective day energy in [kWh]
b) the respective calculated CO2 avoidance in [kg]
c) the respective calculated payment in the set currency
The corresponding time stamp for each of the recorded day values is dis-
played in the first column as a date.
9. The day energy values shown in the table field (8) for the selected month (1)
can be saved to the local PC in a .csv file. This button opens a file browser
on the local PC in order to specify a destination location and file name for
the .csv file.

4.3.3.3 Year
The user interface for the "Year" menu option (Fig. 4.39) in the "History and
Statistics" menu group is used to retrieve, display and process the month en-
ergy values of the PVMaster device recorded by the integrated data logger. The
month energy values for a selectable year can be displayed graphically using
the appropriate bar chart function or be displayed in tabular form.
1
2
4 5 6
Fig. 4.39: U
ser interface of the "Year" menu option in the "History and Statis-
tics" menu group
1. The required year for which the recorded month energy values of the PV-
Master device are to be displayed in an overview is selected here in a selec-
tion box.
2. Two tab options are available in the user interface. The first tab option
"Diagram" (Fig. 4.39) contains a bar chart generator for representation of
the individual month energy values of the PVMaster device. The second tab
option "Table" is used for tabular representation of the values and for saving
the retrieved month energy values to the local PC.
3. The month energy values for the year selected via (1) - up to 12 - are rep-
resented in a bar chart in the diagram area of the "Diagram" tab option. The
bar chart is always scaled such that the highest month energy value for the
selected year is also shown in full.

the month energy values for the selected year will be represented as energy
in [kWh] in the bar chart displayed. Alternatively, the calculated values for
the CO2 avoidance in [kg] or the calculated payment in the set currency can
be displayed in the bar chart. The conversion factors set and used accord-
ingly are indicated in the configuration text boxes (5) and (6).
p. 118).
p. 118).
7. Display of total energy in [kWh] for the selected year.
the values and saving the retrieved month energy values for the selected year
to the local PC.
Fig. 4.40: "Table" tab option in the "Year" menu option

8. The "scrollable" table field for a tabular display of the recorded month en-
ergy values for the year selected via (1) contains a separate column for
a) the respective month energy in [kWh]
b) the respective calculated CO2 avoidance in [kg]
c) the respective calculated payment in the set currency
The corresponding time stamp for each of the recorded month values is
displayed in the first column as a date.
9. The month energy values shown in the table field (8) for the selected year
(1) can be saved to the local PC in a .csv file. This button opens a file
browser on the local PC in order to specify a destination location and file
name for the .csv file.

4.3.3.4 Total
The user interface for the "Total" menu option (Fig. 4.41) in the "History and
Statistics" menu group is used to retrieve, display and process the year energy
values of the PVMaster device recorded by the integrated data logger. The year
energy values can be displayed graphically using the appropriate bar chart
function or be displayed in tabular form.
2 3 4
Fig. 4.41: U
ser interface of the "Total" menu option in the "History and Statis-
tics" menu group
1. The year energy values for the PVMaster device are represented in a bar
chart in the diagram area. The bar chart is always scaled such that the high-
est year energy value achieved is also shown in full.
the year energy values will be represented as energy in [kWh] in the bar
chart displayed. Alternatively, the calculated values for the CO2 avoidance
in [kg] or the calculated payment in the set currency can be displayed in the
bar chart. The conversion factors set and used accordingly are indicated in
the configuration text boxes (3) and (4).

p. 118).
p. 118).
5. Display of total energy in [kWh] for the PVMaster device.
4.3.4 Configuration
The menu group “Configuration” contains menu options for displaying/configur-
ing the actual device settings and for implementing software updates.
NOTE
Depending on the respective device parameters, changes made via the
corresponding configuration text box are effectively immediately in opera-
tion. However, some parameter changes first need to be permanently saved
(section 4.2.7, p. 26) and a new device start implemented (section 4.2.8,
p. 26) before the changes become effective.
NOTE
Changes to device settings via configuration text boxes (section 4.2.6.2,
p. 25) are only possible, in certain cases, when the software release switch
(section 4.2.5, p. 24) is deactivated. The permanent storage of changed
device settings (section 4.2.7, p. 26), and the manual implementation of
device restarts (section 4.2.8, p. 26), is normally only possible when the
software release switch is deactivated.
4.3.4.1 Device
This menu sub-group contains menu options for displaying general device
data (software versions, operating hours, microSD card status, ... see sec-
tion 4.3.4.1.1, p. 103), implementing software updates, displaying and setting
the system clock (section 4.3.4.1.2, p. 110), and displaying/configuring net-
work settings (section 4.3.4.1.3, p. 112).
4.3.4.1.1 General
The menu option “General” in the menu sub-group “Device” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available as of user level “Observer”. The corresponding user
interface (Fig. 4.42) is used to display the software versions, operating hours
and the status of the microSD card, as well as to implement software updates.

2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14
15 16
17
Fig. 4.42: U
ser interface of the menu option “General” in the menu sub-group
“General” of the menu group “Configuration”
1. In the section “Device description”, the device description, the device ID and
the article number of the device are displayed in three separate display text
boxes.
2. The software package version appears in this display text box. The soft-
ware package contains all the software components, which have their own
release notes in each case.
as of Fitter 3. This button is used to start the update wizard for running software updates
(section 4.3.4.1.1.1, p. 106). The option field on the right-hand side defines
the procedure for the software update. The software update can be imple-
mented either from the data carrier of the local PC (recommended) or from
the microSD card in the basic device of the PVMaster unit.
4. The firmware version in the main controller of the PVMaster device control
section is shown in this display text box. The main controller carries out the
operational control of the PVMaster device, as well as control processes
and monitoring functions.
NOTE
You may be asked for the firmware version of the main controller if you contact
LTI ReEnergy GmbH Support.
5. This display text box shows the device firmware CRC value (Cyclic Re-
dundancy Check). The check value can be used to detect any errors which
occur during storage or transmission.

6. The boot loader version for the main controller is shown in this display text
box.
7. The firmware version of the communication controller of the PVMaster
device control section is shown here in a display text box. The communica-
tion controller implements the communication tasks (Ethernet, Modbus/TCP,
data logging, DNS Client and FTP Client etc.).
8. This display text box shows the communication software CRC value (Cyclic
Redundancy Check). The check value can be used to detect any errors
which may occur during storage or transmission.
9. The boot loader version for the communication controller is shown in this
display text box.
10. The backup controller firmware version is shown in this display text box. The
backup controller implements monitoring functions in parallel with the main
controller (grid voltages and grid frequency etc.).
11. This display text box shows the ENS software CRC value (Cyclic Redun-
dancy Check). The check value can be used to detect any errors which may
occur during storage or transmission.
12. The ID of the active power stage data record is shown in this display text
box.
13. The version number of the user application (web application) is shown here.
NOTE
When you contact LTI ReEnergy GmbH Support, you may be asked for the
version number of the user application.
14. The software version of the 4.3” touch display (if present) in the enclosure
door of the PVMaster device (Chap. 3.2, Page 11) is shown in this display
text box.
15. The operating hours counter of the PVMaster device is shown in this display
text box, divided into hours and minutes. This counter takes into account the
entire operation (passive/standby and active infeed operation) of the PV-
Master device.
16. The operating hours of the PVMaster device during active infeed mode are
recorded by a separate operating hours counter and shown in this display
text box divided into hours and minutes.
17. The status of the micro SD card in the basic device of the PVMaster device
is shown in this section. The total capacity and the storage space used on
the micro SD card is shown here.
NOTE
To protect the file system of the microSD card from unwanted fragmentation,
most of the files required during the operating time of the device are already
present on the microSD card. There will therefore only be minor changes to
the occupied storage space during the operating time.

4.3.4.1.1.1 Software update

as of Fitter The button (11) in Fig. 4.42, p. 104 is used to start the update wizard for run-
ning software updates. The procedure for the software update must be selected
in the option field on the right before this button is pressed to start the update
wizard. The software update can be implemented either from the data carrier of
the local PC or from the microSD card in the basic device of the PVMaster unit.
The first option is the easiest method and is therefore recommended in normal
cases.
If a software update is implemented from the microSD card in the basic de-
vice of the PVMaster unit, all the required files on the microSD card must first
be manually copied (see Fig. 5.1, p. 245). The instructions in section 5.1.5,
p. 244 must be followed to do this. The update process can also be initiated in
this case via the 7-segment displays by using the two pushbuttons.
When carrying out a software update from the data carrier of the local PC, the
required update file must be present in compressed .upa archive file format (ZIP
format) on a data carrier of the local PC.
NOTE
The latest PVMaster software, and older software versions, are available to
download at any time on an FTP server: http://files.lt-i.com/
The necessary .upa files for the software update are supplied together with
each PVMaster software release (Tab. 4.17, p. 109). In normal cases, the .upa
file “PVM2 00cVx.xxxx ParaRevXX_UpdateComplete.upa” should be used (No.
1 in Tab. 4.17, p. 109).
After starting the update wizard, the user must follow the instructions in the indi-
vidual dialogue boxes in order to implement the software update. The individual
dialogue boxes of the update wizard are described in Tab. 4.16, p. 107.

Tab. 4.16: Procedure for the software update using the update wizard
No. Dialogue Description
After starting the update wizard, the Start dialogue box ap-
pears with two buttons. The update wizard can be closed
Start dia- again with the "Main screen" button. This automatically
1
logue returns the user to the (main) operator application. The next
dialogue box of the update wizard can be called up with the
"Next" button.
This dialogue box (Fig. 4.43, p. 108) is used to select the
.upa file for the software update from the local PC via a
browser. The user can return to the "Start dialogue box"
with the "Back" button. The file browser opens as soon as
"Search for update package" is pressed. After the file has
been selected, the name of the .upa file will be displayed
Dialogue
under the button and the "Install" button will be enabled.
box for
2 The update process is started when the "Install" button is
selection of
pressed and the dialogue box displaying the update pro-
the .upa file
gress is then shown.
This dialogue box is only displayed if the option "Update
from local PC" has been previously selected in the (main)
operator application in the option field (see (11) in Fig. 4.42,
p. 104). Otherwise the dialogue box displaying the update
progress is displayed directly.
Dialogue
After the update procedure has been started, the actual
box dis-
status and progress during the ongoing update procedure is
3 playing
displayed. The update procedure can be stopped using the
the update
"Exit" button (should not normally be used).
progress
When the software update is completed (Fig. 4.44, p. 108),
a display appears to indicate whether the update procedure
was fully and successfully implemented or not. In addition,
all the steps implemented during the update procedure are
displayed, together with all the relevant diagnosis output in
Dialogue the case of an error. The update wizard can be closed by
box after pressing the "Close" button. A dialogue box may appear with
comple- the prompt to delete any temporary files still present in the
4
tion of the internet browser.
update NOTE
procedure
Following a software update which also
updated the operator application (web ap-
plication), the temporary files in the internet
browser must be deleted (see also sec-
tion 4.1.2.1, p. 15).

Fig. 4.43: Dialogue box for selecting the .upa file required for the update
Fig. 4.44: Dialogue box following the completed software update

Tab. 4.17: Description of the folders and files of a PVMaster software release
No. Description
…\ SWpackage (upa-Update) \ PVM2 00cVx.xxxx ParaRevXX_Update-
Complete.upa
Using this .upa file as part of a software update means that all firmware
components and parameter data of the PVMaster device, and the opera-
tor application (web application), will be updated. System-specific or
customer-specific settings are not lost during this process but will auto-
1 matically be restored at the end.
NOTE
In normal cases, the software update of the PVMaster de-
vice should be implemented using this .upa file. This always
ensures that all software components have the same and
updated status.
…\ SWpackage (upa-Update) \ PVM2 00cVx.xxxx ParaRevXX_Up-
dateWebInterface.upa
This .upa file will only update the software of the operator application
(web application). The firmware components and parameter data of the
2
PVMaster device are not updated when this .upa file is used.
The use of this .upa file is applicable if, for example, there are problems
with the execution of the operator application (web application) (e.g. be-
cause necessary files on the microSD card are corrupt).
…\ SWpackage (upa-Update) \ PVM2 00cVx.xxxx ParaRevXX_Updat-
eDevice.upa
Using this .upa file for a software update means that all firmware com-
3 ponents and parameter data of the PVMaster device will be updated.
System-specific or customer-specific settings are not lost during this pro-
cess but will automatically be restored at the end. The operator applica-
tion (web application) is not updated when this .upa file is used.
…\ SWpackage (upa-Update) \ PVM2 00cVx.xxxx ParaRevXX_Produc-
tion.upa
This .upa file is used to restore the default parameters. Using this .upa
file for a software update means that all firmware components and pa-
rameter data of the PVMaster device will be updated and the default pa-
rameter settings restored. System-specific and customer-specific settings
are completely lost during this process and must subsequently be reset
4 manually where necessary. The operator application (web application) is
not updated when this .upa file is used.
NOTE
This .upa file should only be used in exceptional cases for
a software update. Always contact Support at LTI ReEnergy
GmbH before doing so in order to obtain alternative solu-
tions for the problems that have occurred.
…\PVMasterII Packet Vx.xxxx (SD-Image)\...
Folder with the files for the microSD card required to implement the
operator application. The files in this folder can be manually copied to the
microSD card to restore the functions or update the operator application.
If the previously recorded data (day history data, energy data, status his-
5 tory, etc.) need to be kept, the folders "LOG_DAY", "LOG_DEF", "LOG_
POR" and "LOG_SCB" on the microSD card must not be overwritten.
NOTE
In the event that the file system on the microSD card is
corrupt, the microSD card must be formatted before the
copying procedure (FAT32, no quick format).

as of Fitter
NOTE
The update wizard for implementing the software updates can alternatively
be called up directly via the browser, by entering the IP address of the device
in the address line of the internet browser with the suffix ...\update.htm. If the
network settings of the destination device are unchanged (delivery condition,
cf. also section 5.1.2, p. 241), the entry in the address line is then, e.g.:
http://192.168.36.1\update.htm or 192.168.36.1\update.htm
This makes sense, e.g. when problems occur during the execution of the
operator application (web application). If, however, the update wizard is called
up directly via the browser, the dialogue texts are not translated into the set
language and various status outputs will be omitted during and after a software
update. In normal cases, therefore, the update wizard should always be ac-
cessed using the button (11) in Fig. 4.42, p. 104 within the operator applica-
tion.
NOTE
It is recommended, when implementing a software update with remote data
transmission, that the update is carried out via the control centre PC (Chap-
ter 3.2, p. 108), particularly if the remote data transmission is unsafe and slow
and/or when several PVMaster devices in a device network need updating in a
common local network. In this case, the use of a "Remote desktop" connection
to the control centre PC is recommended to implement the software update.
This avoids waiting times and unexpected interruptions during the update pro-
cedure and the data traffic via the remote data transmission can be minimised
as the update file only needs to be uploaded once to the control centre PC.
4.3.4.1.2 System clock

as of Fitter The menu option “System clock” in the menu sub-group “Device” of the menu
group “Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”, and the corresponding
user interface (Fig. 4.45, p. 111) is used to display and edit the system clock
settings.
NOTE
The system clock buffer for the PVMaster is limited therefore it is possible that
the system clock settings will be lost after a relatively long "standstill" without
a supply voltage. In this case, following switch-on, a fault state is triggered (ID
13/02 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) and the system clock
must be reset again.
NOTE
Changes to the system clock settings are usually only possible when the
software release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) is deactivated. After any
changes are made, the changed device settings must be permanently saved
(section 4.2.7, p. 26) and the device must be restarted again manually (sec-
tion 4.2.8, p. 26).

1 2 4 3
Fig. 4.45: U ser interface of the menu option “System clock” in the menu sub-
group “General” of the menu group “Configuration”
1. The actual date is displayed in a calendar view in this section. The date
setting can be changed manually, if the option “Set manually” is activated in
option field (3), in the calendar view.
2. The actual time is shown in an analogue clock display, and the hours,
minutes and seconds are also shown in separate selection boxes. The time
setting can also be changed manually in the selection boxes if the option
“Set manually” is activated in option field (3).
3. The method to set or configure the system clock is selected via this option
field. The system clock can be set, e.g. manually via the calendar view (1)
and the selection boxes (2) (option “Set manually”). Alternatively, the system
clock of the PVMaster device can be synchronised with the system clock of
the local PC (option “Sync. with PC”). If the local PC has an internet con-
nection, the system clock of the PVMaster device can also be synchronised
with an internet time server (SNTP server) (option “Sync. with time server”).
The UTC offset setting will be taken into account here.
The system clock of the PVMaster device is only changed after the button
(6) “Set” is pressed.
4. This activation field is used to activate or deactivate the automatic changeo-
ver between summer and winter time or to display the activated setting.
5. The time zone of the PVMaster device is set as the UTC offset using this
selection box. The activated setting is taken into account, e.g. when setting
the system clock of the PVMaster device through synchronisation with an

internet time server (SNTP server). The UTC offset parameter setting is also
taken into account in the created .csv files (see section 4.3.4.7, p. 214) so
that the online portal system being used can implement the correspondingly
required correction of the time stamp.
6. Manually implemented changes to the system clock settings of the PVMas-
ter device are accepted by pressing the “Set” button. When the options
“Sync. with PC” or “Sync. with time server” are selected, the system clock is
only changed after the “Set” button has been pressed.
NOTE
After any changes are made, the changed device settings must be perma-
nently saved (section 4.2.7, p. 26) and the device must be restarted again
manually (section 4.2.8, p. 26).
NOTE
From device firmware V1.07-00 on the PVMaster, the system clock is resyn-
chronised with a time server automatically via an integrated SNTP client after
each switch-on procedure.
4.3.4.1.3 Network
as of Fitter The menu option “Network” in the menu sub-group “Device” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The user interface of this
menu option (Fig. 4.46) is used to display and edit the network settings of the
PVMaster device and to administrate the list with the network addresses of all
PVMaster devices in the local network.

4 7
Fig. 4.46: U
ser interface of the menu option “Network” in the menu sub-group
“General” of the menu group “Configuration”“
1. The MAC address of the PVMaster device is shown in this display text box.
It is not possible to manually change the MAC address.
2. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit the IP address,
the subnet mask settings and the default gateway of the PVMaster device in
decimal format.
NOTE
The IP address of the modem or router used (GSM, DSL, etc.) should be used
to set the default gateway of the PVMaster device so that all the remote data
transmission functions are operational.
NOTE
Alternatively, the IP address setting can be displayed and configured via the
7-segment displays by using the two buttons (see section 5.1.2, p. 241).

3. Changes to the network settings of the PVMaster device via the configura-
tion text boxes (2) are permanently saved in the device by pressing the
“Set” button. It is not necessary to press “Save” (section 4.2.7, p. 26). A
dialogue box then appears with the prompt to carry out a new device start.
NOTE
The "Set" button should only be pressed when the software release switch
(section 4.2.5, p. 24) is deactivated.
The changes to the network settings of the PVMaster device only become
effective after the device is started again.
The network list with the connection settings of all PVMaster devices in the
local network is administrated in the lower section of the user interface (Fig.
4.46, p. 113). All added destination devices and network addresses are then
available in the selection box for selecting the destination device (section 4.2.3,
p. 23) in order to enable the rapid switchover to other destination devices in
the network.
4. The network settings of added PVMaster devices are shown in this table
field. The table field comprises four columns. The respective IP address
of the individual destination devices are shown in the first column. After all
added connections have been checked using the button (6) “Check connec-
tion”, the communication state is shown in the “Connection” column. The
actual state of the respective destination device software release switches
(section 4.2.5, p. 24) is shown in the “SW enabled” column. If the soft-
ware release switches of the destination devices are activated, it is not
possible to carry out a save process for the network lists of these destina-
tion devices using the “Broadcast” button (7). The “Updated” column shows
whether the network list has been successfully saved in the destination
devices after the “Broadcast” button (7) has been pressed.
New connections can be added and existing entries edited or deleted using
the buttons (5) in the table field.
NOTE
The PVMaster device currently used for the "Host" function (initial connection
takes place via this device) is always shown as an entry in the network list.
The IP address of this device is shown in bold. This entry in the network list
cannot be deleted or edited using the buttons (5).
5. These buttons can be used to add new connections to PVMaster destination
devices in the network list or to edit/delete existing entries in the network
list.
6. This button can be used to check the connection settings of all destina-
tion device entries in the network list (4). After this button is pressed, the
connection settings of the individual entries in the network list are checked
sequentially. The corresponding progress of the connection check is shown
to the right of the button. After completion of the connection checks, the con-
nection states and the state of the software release switch (section 4.2.5,
p. 24) of the respective destination devices are shown in the correspond-
ing columns “Connection” and “SW enabled” in the network list (4).
7. After the connection check has been made using the “Check connection”
button (6), the changed or updated network list can be permanently saved
to all destination devices listed as entries in the network list by pressing the
“Broadcast” button. The requirement is that the software release switches
(section 4.2.5, p. 24) of the respective destination devices are not acti-
vated. The successful, permanent storage of the network list is shown in the
“Updated” column for each entry in the network list.
The permanent storage of the network list with all PVMaster devices in the

local network using the “Broadcast” function ensures that, if another PV-
Master device is to be used as the “Host” device within the local network, it
is possible to rapidly switch the connection to the other destination devices
using the selection box (section 4.2.3, p. 23).
4.3.4.2 Grid
This menu sub-group contains the menu options to display the main measured
values (voltages, frequency, active power, total system output values) and to
display/edit settings (rated voltage, rated frequency, total system Limits, etc.) re-
lating to the grid aspects. In addition, energy values and conversion factors can
be edited here. The menu option for displaying and editing grid monitoring func-
tion settings also plays an important role. This menu sub-group also includes
menu options for displaying/editing the settings for insulation monitoring, and for
configuration and checking of the active Limit by the grid operator as part of grid
feed/Limit (by grid operator).
4.3.4.2.1 General
as of Fitter The first menu option “General” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The corresponding user
interface (Fig. 4.47, p. 116) contains elements for displaying actual values on
the grid side (AC side), and for displaying/editing the rated values of the grid
voltage and grid frequency. In addition, this user interface can also display and
edit the maximum apparent and active power of the local InterCOM device net-
work (see also section 4.3.2.2, p. 48 and section 4.3.4.5, p. 198).

1 2
5 6 7 8
Fig. 4.47: U
ser interface of the menu option “General” in the menu sub-group
“Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
Changes as of Expert 1. This configuration text box is used to display the rated value of the grid volt-
age in [V]. The limit values as a percentage of the grid voltage monitoring
functions (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) and grid voltage-dependent grid stabili-
sation functions (section 4.3.4.3, p. 147) are based on this rated value.
NOTE
In some cases it may be necessary to change the rated value of the grid volt-
age so that the monitoring function based on this value can function correctly
and accurately. The rated value can be changed as of user level "Expert". This
setting can also be changed in the user interface of the menu option "Monitor-
ing" in the menu sub-group "Grid" of the menu group "Configuration" (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).

2. The rated value for the grid frequency in [Hz] is displayed and can be edited
in a selection box. The limit values as a percentage of the grid frequency
monitoring functions (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) and static grid frequency
stabilisation (section 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156) are based on this rated value.
The PVMaster can be operated in a grid with either the rated frequency
50Hz or 60Hz. The standard rated frequency of 50Hz is preset in the deliv-
ery condition or default setting of the PVMaster.
This setting can also be changed in the user interface of the menu option
“Monitoring” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
(section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
NOTE
The setting for the rated frequency must be implemented correctly, particularly
when the grid monitoring functions are deactivated. This could otherwise lead
to instability of the control system.
3. This section contains display text boxes that display the actual measured
values of the three phase voltages in [V], the actual linked grid voltage in [V]
as an average of the three measured linked grid voltages, the three sliding
averages of the measured phase voltages in [V] for monitoring the grid volt-
age quality and the actual measured grid frequency in [Hz].
The grid voltage values and grid frequency are redundantly measured in the
PVMaster with two independent controllers in order to meet specific require-
ments regarding functional safety (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124). This selection
box is used to select the values to be displayed for the grid voltage values
and the grid frequency in the display text boxes in this section. If “µC1” is
selected, the measured values of the main controller are displayed, while
“µC2” will display the measured values of the safety controller.
These actual values can also be displayed using the menu option “AC
values” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values”
(section 4.3.2.4.1, p. 61).
4. The actual total active power fed into the grid is displayed here in [kW] in
a display text box. This value represents the sum of the three phase active
powers. This actual value can also be displayed using the menu option “AC
values” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values”
(section 4.3.2.4.1, p. 61).
5. The actual total apparent power in [kVA] of the entire local InterCOM device
network is shown here in a display text box. This actual value can also be
displayed using the menu option “InterCOM” in the menu group “Status and
Values” (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).
6. The set maximum value for the apparent power in [kVA] of the entire local
InterCOM device network can be displayed and edited in this configuration
text box.
Any change to the maximum value for the apparent power of the entire local
InterCOM device network is automatically taken over by the other InterCOM
nodes if communication with all InterCOM nodes is functional within an In-
terCOM device network (see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198). However, permanent
storage of the new maximum value in the device settings of all InterCOM
nodes must be implemented by using the button (9).

7. The actual total active power in [kW] of the entire local InterCOM device
network is shown here in a display text box. This actual value can also be
displayed using the menu option “InterCOM” in the menu group “Status and
Values” (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).
8. The set maximum value for the active power in [kW] of the entire local Inter-
COM device network can be displayed and edited in this configuration text
box.
Any change to the maximum value for the active power of the entire local
InterCOM device network is automatically taken over by the other InterCOM
nodes if communication with all InterCOM nodes is functional within an In-
terCOM device network (see section 4.3.4.5, p. 198). However, permanent
storage of the new maximum value in the device settings of all InterCOM
nodes must be implemented by using the button (9).
9. The “Save” button is used to permanently store the changed maximum
power values of the entire local InterCOM device network in the device set-
tings of all InterCOM nodes.
NOTE
The requirement for the successful permanent storage of the changed maxi-
mum powers in the device settings of all InterCOM nodes using the "Save"
button is that the software release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) in each
device is not activated and that communication with all InterCOM nodes in the
local InterCOM device network is active.
4.3.4.2.2 Energy
as of Fitter The menu option “Energy” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The corresponding user
interface (Fig. 4.48) contains elements for the display and configuration of the
meter values with the energy values achieved so far (fed-in energy) of the PV-
Master device, device network or total plant, as applicable, and for the configu-
ration of device settings for energy determination and changing of conversion
factors or the currency to be used in the payment display.
The energy values achieved so far can be displayed and manually corrected, if
necessary, in the tab option “Inverter unit”. The device settings for energy deter-
mination can also be configured here and changes can be made to the conver-
sion factors and the currency used for the payment display of the PVMaster
device.
NOTE
A manual correction of the energy values must always be implemented so that
the meter states for the actual date, month, year and meter status with the
total energy achieved so far always remain consistent with each other.
NOTE
A manual correction of the energy values using the corresponding configura-
tion text boxes does not lead to subsequent correction of the recorded energy
values that can be called up via the corresponding bar diagram generators
(section 4.3.3.2, p. 97 to section 4.3.3.4, p. 102).

1 3
2
10
11 12 13
Fig. 4.48: U
ser interface of the menu option “Energy” in the menu sub-group
and that the corresponding recorded historical energy data can be called
up in the diagram generator. Pressing this link button calls up the cor-
responding user interface to display the energy diagram (section 4.3.3,
p. 86).
as of Fitter 1. The evaluation/counting of the energy fed in so far or the energy of the
PVMaster device can be implemented by evaluating the S0 pulse output of
an installed meter. To do this, the digital input used in the PVMaster device
must be assigned with the corresponding function (function 34 in Tab. 4.19,
p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). If an S0 pulse input is not evaluat-
ed, the energy forecast is implemented automatically through integration of
the measured grid-side active power. The displayed option field shows the
applicable method used for energy determination of the PVMaster device.
This option field is for display purposes only.

2. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit the S0 inter-
face relationship for the energy metering. These configuration text boxes
are used to define as of which number of counted S0 pulses [P] the energy
meter should be increased by the set energy in [Wh].
These configuration text boxes are only released for user inputs when the
evaluation of an energy consumption meter S0 pulse output takes place and
the digital output of the PVMaster device used for this purpose has been
assigned the corresponding function (function 34 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see
section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
Any changes to this setting first need to be permanently saved (sec-
tion 4.2.7, p. 26) and a new device start implemented (section 4.2.8,
3. This configuration text box is used to display and edit another factor to be
taken into account during the evaluation of an energy consumption meter
S0 interface (e.g. to take into account a current transformer upstream of the
energy consumption meter).
This configuration text box is only released for user inputs when the evalu-
ation of an energy consumption meter S0 pulse output takes place and
the digital output of the PVMaster device used for this purpose has been
assigned the corresponding function (function 34 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see
section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166).
4. If the fed-in energy or the energy is evaluated by evaluating the S0 pulse
output of an installed meter and if the PVMaster device digital output used
for the evaluation is assigned the appropriate function (function 34 in Tab.
4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), then the recorded pulses are
displayed in this status field.
NOTE
field; this depends on the actual frequency of the S0 pulse interface and the
connection quality between the PVMaster device and the local PC.
5. A configuration text box is used here to display and manually correct (where
necessary) the energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or the energy of
the actual day in [kWh].
The energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or the yield for the actual
day in [kWh] is also displayed in the start user interface “Overview” (sec-
tion 4.3.1, p. 39) and in the menu option “Yield” in the menu sub-group
“Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.4, p. 69).
6. This configuration text box is used here to display and manually correct
(where necessary) the energy fed in by the PVMaster device or the energy
of the actual month in [kWh].
The total energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or yield in [kWh] for
the current month is displayed in the start user interface “Overview” (sec-
tion 4.3.1, p. 39) and in the menu option “Yield” in the menu sub-group
“Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.4, p. 69).
(where necessary) the energy fed in by the PVMaster device or the energy
of the actual year in [kWh].
The energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or the energy of the actual
year in [kWh] is also displayed in the user interface of the menu option
“Yield” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values”
(section 4.3.2.4.4, p. 69).

(where necessary) the total energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or
the energy in [kWh].
The total energy fed in so far by the PVMaster device or the energy in
[kWh] is also displayed in the Start user interface “Overview” (section 4.3.1,
p. 39) and in the user interface of the menu option “Energy” in the menu
sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.4,
p. 69).
achieved so far by the PVMaster device. The displayed value results from
the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the energy (8) produced by
the PVMaster device with the set conversion factor (11).
The total CO2 avoidance in [kg] achieved so far by the PVMaster device
is displayed in the user interface of the menu option “Energy” in the menu
p. 69).
10. The total payment achieved by the PVMaster device in the set currency (13)
is displayed here. The displayed value results from the conversion of the
total energy fed in so far or the energy (8) produced by the PVMaster device
with the set payment factor (12).
The total payment achieved so far by the PVMaster device in the set curren-
cy is displayed in the user interface of the menu option “Energy” in the menu
p. 69).
11. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the conversion factor
in [kg/kWh] for calculating the CO2 avoidance from the fed-in energy [kWh]
of the PVMaster.
The conversion factor is preset to the value 0.596 in the default setting or
delivery condition of the PVMaster.
(Source: Federal Office for the Environment, FG I 4.5., as at April 2008).
12. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the conversion factor
for calculating the payment based on the fed-in energy [kWh] in a configu-
ration text box.
The conversion factor is preset to the value 0.2 in the default setting or de-
livery condition of the PVMaster.
13. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the displayed currency
or payment unit.
The currency “EUR” is preset in the default setting or delivery condition of
the PVMaster.
as of Fitter If the S0 pulse output of an installed higher-level meter used to meter the
total energy of the total plant is evaluated by a PVMaster device digital
output and this digital output used for the evaluation was assigned the ap-
propriate function (function 35 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1,
p. 166), then a second tab option “Total plant” can be selected (Fig. 4.49,
p. 122). This tab option then displays the energy values achieved so far by
the device network or the total plant and these can be corrected manually
where necessary.

15
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Fig. 4.49: Tab option “Total plant” in the menu option “Energy” (Configuration)
14. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit the S0 interface
relationship for the energy metering by a higher-level energy consumption
meter used to meter the energy of the total plant. These configuration text
boxes are used to define as of which number of counted S0 pulses [P] the
energy meter should be increased by the set energy in [Wh].
15. This configuration text box is used to display and edit another factor to be
taken into account during the evaluation of an energy consumption meter
S0 interface (e.g. to take into account a current transformer upstream of the
energy consumption meter).
16. This status field displays the pulses recorded by the S0 pulse interface of
the energy consumption meter for the total plant.
NOTE
field; this depends on the actual frequency of the S0 pulse interface and the
connection quality between the PVMaster device and the local PC.

necessary) the energy fed in so far by the entire device network or total
plant, or the energy of the actual day in [kWh].
The energy fed in so far by the entire device network or total plant, or the
energy of the actual day in [kWh], is also displayed in the tag option “Total
plant” in the user interface of the menu option “Energy” in the menu sub-
group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.4,
p. 69)
necessary) the energy fed in so far by the entire device network or total
plant, or the energy of the actual month in [kWh].
These actual values can also be displayed in the tab option “Total plant” in
the user interface “Energy” of the menu sub-group “Grid” in the menu group
“Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.4, p. 69).
necessary) the energy fed in by the entire device network or total plant, or
the energy of the actual year in [kWh].
(where necessary) the total energy fed in so far by the entire device network
or total plant or the energy in [kWh].
achieved so far by the entire device network or total plant. The displayed
value results from the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the
energy (8) produced by the entire device network or total plant with the set
conversion factor (11).
22. The total payment achieved so far by the entire device network or total plant
in the set currency (13) is displayed here. The displayed value results from
the conversion of the total energy fed in so far or the energy (8) produced by
the entire device network or total plant with the set conversion factor (12).

4.3.4.2.3 Monitoring
The PVMaster offers integrated monitoring functions for grid voltage monitoring.
The scope and flexible concept of the monitoring functions permit the realisa-
tion of grid monitoring in compliance with numerous application regulations and
guidelines. The PVMaster already has numerous country codes (“Grid codes”)
stored for direct selection in order to automatically initialise the individual moni-
toring functions and corresponding limit values.
The grid voltage values and grid frequency are redundantly measured and
monitored in the PVMaster with two independent controllers (main and backup
controller) in order to meet specific requirements regarding functional safety.
The main contactor(s) are also always controlled by the two controllers.
The PVMaster differentiates between permanently active grid monitoring func-
tions and auxiliary grid monitoring functions (with stricter limit values) which are
only active during the checking of the connection conditions.
To monitor the supply voltages and voltage averages, the PVMaster can moni-
tor the phase voltage values (ph-n) and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph) in each
case. Independent monitoring functions are used internally for this purpose. The
monitoring of phase (ph-n) and / or linked voltages (ph-ph) is enabled or disa-
bled via the corresponding checkboxes next to the relevant monitoring functions
(see (7) and (8) in Fig. 4.50, p. 125 and (17) - (22) in Fig. 4.51, p. 130).
After the AC main switch or AC load-break switch is switched on or after a
(daily) device restart, the enabled grid monitoring functions and the enabled
supplementary grid monitoring functions for checking the connection condi-
tions are active. If all the limit values of all activated grid monitoring functions
are maintained without interruptions during the set connection delay, the main
contactor(s) can be connected following the expiry of the connection delay and
the active infeed operation can commence (as soon as the generator power
suffices).
The respective connection releases of the main and backup controllers are
displayed in the first status word (see nos. 8 and 9 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, sec-
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41). The display of the respective progress of the elapsed
connection delay is implemented separately for both controllers via corre-
sponding progress bars in the user interfaces of the menu options “Monitoring”
in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu groups “Status and Values” (sec-
tion 4.3.2.4.5, p. 73) and “Configuration” (Fig. 4.50, p. 125).
The menu option “Monitoring” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available in every user level. The corresponding user interface
(Fig. 4.50, p. 125) contains elements to display and edit the settings, and the
display of the actual state of the integrated PVMaster monitoring functions for
grid monitoring.
NOTE
The user level "Observer" is used solely to display all settings (limit values,
etc.) and the actual state of the integrated monitoring functions for grid moni-
toring. Modifications are not possible in this user level.

The upper section of the user interface (Fig. 4.50) is used to display and edit
general settings of the integrated grid monitoring functions.
1 2
3 4 5
7 8
9 10
11 12
13
14
15 16
Fig. 4.50: U
ser interface of the menu option “Monitoring” in the menu sub-group
Changes as of Fitter 1. The country codes (“Grid codes”) for initialising functions and limit values of
the integrated grid monitoring functions are displayed and configured here
in a selection box.
The functions and limit values are initialised according to the selected grid
code after the grid code has been configured by selecting an element in
the selection box. In addition, grid stabilisation functions (section 4.3.4.3,
p. 147) are appropriately configured and activated/deactivated as neces-
sary. A dialogue box then appears with the prompt to carry out a new device
start. The changes to the grid monitoring functions of the PVMaster device
only become effective after the device is started again.
The grid code used to initialise grid monitoring can also be displayed in the
menu option “Monitoring” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group

Changes as of Expert 2. The activation field “User-defined settings” can be used to activate/deacti-
vate manually specified function and limit value settings for the integrated
grid monitoring functions that differ from those of the set country code.
After the activation field is activated, the configuration text boxes and other
elements used to configure monitoring function and limit value settings are
released for input by the user.
When the activation field is deactivated, all monitoring function and limit
value settings are initialised again according to the set country code. A
dialogue box then appears with the prompt to carry out a new device start.
The changes to the grid monitoring functions of the PVMaster device only
become effective after the device is started again.
Changes as of Fitter 3. This configuration box is used to display the rated value of the grid voltage
in [V]. The limit values in percent of the grid voltage monitoring functions
and grid voltage-dependent grid stabilisation functions (section 4.3.4.3,
p. 147) are based on this rated value.
NOTE
In some cases it may be necessary to change the rated value of the grid volt-
age so that the monitoring function based on this value can function correctly
and accurately. This setting can also be changed in the user interface of the
menu option "General" in the menu sub-group "Grid" of the menu group "Con-
figuration" (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115).
4. The rated value for the grid frequency in [Hz] is displayed and can be
edited in a selection box. The limit values as a percentage of the grid
frequency monitoring functions and static grid frequency stabilisation (sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156) are based on this rated value.
This setting can also be changed in the user interface of the menu option
“General” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
(section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115).
NOTE
The setting for the rated frequency must be implemented correctly, particularly
when the grid monitoring functions are deactivated. This could otherwise lead
to instability of the control system.
Changes as of Expert 5. The activation display and the grid monitoring functions of the backup con-
troller are enabled or disabled via this checkbox.
To implement redundant grid monitoring, the monitoring functions of the
backup controller must be enabled via this checkbox. However, this is not
mandatory for all country codes.
When initializing the functions and limits by selecting a country code via the
selection box (1), the backup controller enables monitoring or not according
to requirements.
From user level “Expert” up, different configurations from the selected coun-
try code can be set, but only when the checkbox (2) “Custom Settings” is
enabled. Normally, it is not necessary to change this checkbox.
6. The lower section of the user interface displays the state of the integrated
grid monitoring in a status field and a plain text message in a display text
box. The possible states are listed in Tab. 4.13, p. 76 (section 4.3.2.4.5,
p. 73).

NOTE
The respective activated and configured grid monitoring functions in the PV-
Master are active as soon as the AC main switch or AC load-break switch of
the device is switched on. A corresponding plain text message is shown in this
display text box if the AC main switch is deactivated. The state display of the
AC main switch is also shown in the user interface of the menu option "State"
in the menu group "Status and Values", in the first status word (see no. 3 in
Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
The first tab option “(Re-)connection” (Fig. 4.50, p. 125) contains the following
elements: the display and configuration (where necessary) of the functions and
limit values for additional checking of connection conditions before connection
and before begin of active infeed operation of the PVMaster; the status display
of the release by the functions for grid monitoring; the activation, configura-
tion and status display of the active power ramp for limiting the active power
increase after connection/reconnection of the PVMaster (e.g. following a fault
state of the device due to the grid monitoring functions).
Changes as of Expert In this tab option, the grid monitoring function configurations and limit values
differing from the set country code can be edited as of user level “Expert”. The
individual elements (configuration text boxes, activation fields, etc.) for this pur-
pose will, however, only be released for user inputs after the activation field (2)
“User-defined settings” has been activated.
7. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the lower limit value
of the grid voltage for the additional check of the connection condition. The
display or configuration is implemented (via the selection box) either in [%]
related to the set grid voltage (3) or in [V ph-n] as an absolute phase voltage
limit value or in [V ph-ph] as an absolute limit for the linked grid voltage.
If the AC main switch or AC load-break switch is activated (grid monitor-
ing functions active), the corresponding fault state (ID 15/01 or ID 21/01 in
Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered when this limit
value is not complied with during the check of the connection condition. The
fault state is, however, only triggered when the connection condition has not
been met after a defined time (standard is after 10 minutes).
The checkboxes next to the configuration text box are used to display and
configure or enable or disable this additional monitoring function to check
the connection condition. Here, the network phase voltages (ph-n)and / or
linked grid voltages (ph-ph) can be monitored.
8. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the upper limit value
of the grid voltage for the additional check of the connection condition. The
display or configuration is implemented (via the selection box) either in [%]
related to the set grid voltage (3) or in [V ph-n] as an absolute phase voltage
limit value or in [V ph-ph] as an absolute limit for the linked grid voltage.
The checkboxes next to the configuration text box are used to display and
configure or enable or disable this additional monitoring function to check
the connection condition. Here, the network phase voltages (ph-n)and / or
linked grid voltages (ph-ph) can be monitored.

9. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the lower limit value
of the grid frequency for the additional check of the connection condition.
The display or configuration is implemented (via the selection box) either in
[%] related to the set rated grid frequency (4) or in [V] as an absolute grid
frequency limit value.
The display and configuration of the activation/deactivation of this supple-
mentary monitoring function for checking the connection condition is imple-
mented via the activation field next to the configuration text box.
10. This configuration text box is used to display and edit the upper limit value
of the grid frequency for the additional check of the connection condition.
The display or configuration is implemented (via the selection box) either in
[%] related to the set rated grid frequency (4) or in [V] as an absolute grid
frequency limit value.
The display and configuration of the activation/deactivation of this supple-
mentary monitoring function for checking the connection condition is imple-
mented via the activation field next to the configuration text box.
11. The display and configuration (where necessary) of the connection delay is
implemented in [s] via this configuration text box.
After the AC main switch or AC load-break switch is switched on or after a
(daily) device restart, the activated grid monitoring functions and the acti-
vated supplementary grid monitoring functions for testing the connection
conditions become active. If all the limit values of all activated grid monitor-
ing functions are maintained without interruptions during the set connection
delay, the main contactor(s) can be connected following the expiry of the
connection delay and the active infeed operation can commence (as soon
as the generator power suffices). The respective connection releases of the
main and safety controllers are displayed in the first status word (see nos. 8
and 9 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
The display of the respective progress of the elapsed connection delay is
implemented separately for both controllers via the progress bars (12) and
(13).
monitoring function is shown as a progress display. This refers to the count-
ing of the first instance connection delay (main controller) of the device-
internal redundant grid monitoring. Counting begins as soon as all grid
parameters are approved. Counting is reset to 0% after a grid fault or device
restart. If the counting of the first instance of the device-internal redundant
grid monitoring with approved grid parameters exceeds 100%, the first re-
lease is issued for connection by the redundant grid monitoring (see no. 8 in
Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).

13. The active counting of connection delay through the integrated grid moni-
toring function is shown as a progress display. This refers to the counting
of the second instance connection delay (backup controller) of the device-
internal redundant grid monitoring. Counting begins as soon as all grid
parameters are approved. Counting is reset to 0% after a grid fault or device
restart. If the counting of the second instance of the device-internal redun-
dant grid monitoring with approved grid parameters exceeds 100%, the
second release is issued for connection by the redundant grid monitoring
(see no. 9 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
14. This section is used to display and change the configuration of the active
power ramp for limiting the active power increase after successful recon-
nection after a grid failure. The configuration text box is used to display and
edit, where necessary, the maximum permissible active power increase per
minute. The active power ramp is enabled/disabled in the checkbox next to
the configuration text box.
15. This section is used to display and change the configuration of the active
power ramp for limiting the active power increase after each reconnection.
The configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the
maximum permissible active power increase per minute. The active power
ramp is enabled/diabled in the checkbox next to the configuration text box.
16. When using the active power ramp to reduce the increase in active power
following successful (re)connection (e.g. after a grid fault), the actual reduc-
tion value of the ramp function is correspondingly shown in this progress
display. If all the active power ramps are disabled via checkboxes (14) and
(15), the progress bar on the interface may disappear.
The second tab option “Limits” (Fig. 4.51) contains the display and configura-
tion editing options (where necessary) and the limit values for the permanently
active monitoring functions for grid monitoring before and after connection, and
during active infeed operation of the PVMaster.
Changes as of Expert Fault triggering and corresponding device switch-off due to the respective
monitoring functions for monitoring the grid voltage V<<(1), V<<(2), V>>(1) and
V>>(2), elements (16) to (19), occur with a delay in compliance with the respec-
tively set delay times.
These delays can prevent unwanted disconnections, e.g. due to brief grid volt-
age drops, which need to be “ridden through” as part of the dynamic grid stabili-
sation function (section 4.3.4.3.3, p. 159).
A graphic visualisation of the switch-off limits and the behaviour over time of
the individual monitoring functions for monitoring grid voltages is shown in the
tab option “Overview” in the user interface of the menu option “LVRT” in the
menu sub-group “Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration” (sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.3, p. 159).

17 18 19 20
21 22 23
24 25 26 27
Fig. 4.51: Tab option “Limits” in the menu option “Monitoring”

Changes as of Expert 17. This section is used to display and edit the first function for monitoring the
voltage drop V<<(1). The checkboxes are used to display and configure or
enable or disable this monitoring function. Here, the network phase voltages
(ph-n) can be monitored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).
The upper configuration text box is used to display and edit the lower limit
value of the grid voltage. The display or configuration is implemented (via
the selection box) either in [%] in relation to the set grid voltage (3) or in [V
ph-n] as an absolute phase voltage limit value or in [V ph-ph] as an absolute
limit for the linked grid voltage.
The lower configuration text box is used to display and edit the delay time
in [ms] for this monitoring function. The triggering of the corresponding
fault state (ID 15/05 or ID 21/05 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1,
p. 221) and therefore the switch-off of the PVMaster device is only actu-
ated in this monitoring function when the set lower grid voltage limit value is
undershot continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
18. This section is used to display and edit the second function for monitoring
the voltage drop V<<(2). The checkboxes are used to display and configure
or enable or disable this monitoring function. Here, the network phase volt-
ages (ph-n) can be monitored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).

ated in this monitoring function when the set lower grid voltage limit value is
undershot continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
19. This section is used to display and edit the first function for monitoring the
voltage rise V>>(1). The checkboxes are used to display and configure or
enable or disable this monitoring function. Here, the network phase voltages
(ph-n) can be monitored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).
The upper configuration text box is used to display and edit the upper limit
ated in this monitoring function when the set upper grid voltage limit value is
exceeded continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
the voltage rise V>>(2). The checkboxes are used to display and configure
or enable or disable this monitoring function. Here, the network phase volt-
ages (ph-n) can be monitored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).
ated in this monitoring function when the set upper grid voltage limit value is
exceeded continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
sliding grid voltage average used for monitoring the voltage quality V<. The
checkboxes are used to display and configure or enable or disable this mon-
itoring function. Here, the network phase voltages (ph-n) can be monitored,
and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).
This configuration text box is used to display and edit the lower limit value of
the sliding grid voltage average. The display or configuration is implemented
(via the selection box) either in [%] in relation to the set grid voltage (3) or
in [V ph-n] as an absolute phase voltage limit value or in [V ph-ph] as an
absolute limit for the linked grid voltage.
If the actual grid voltage average undershoots the set limit value, the cor-
responding fault state (ID 15/09 or ID 21/09 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221) and the switch-off of the device are triggered immedi-
ately.
The cycle time of the sliding average value formation is displayed and con-
figured in [s] in the configuration text box (23).

the sliding grid voltage average used for monitoring the voltage quality V>.
The checkboxes are used to display and configure or enable or disable this
monitoring function. Here, the network phase voltages (ph-n) can be moni-
tored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph).
This configuration text box is used to display and edit the upper limit value
of the sliding grid voltage average. The display or configuration is imple-
mented (via the selection box) either in [%] in relation to the set grid voltage
(3) or in [V ph-n] as an absolute phase voltage limit value or in [V ph-ph] as
an absolute limit for the linked grid voltage.
If the actual grid voltage average undershoots the set limit value, the cor-
responding fault state (ID 15/10 or ID 21/10 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
ately.
The cycle time of the sliding average value formation is displayed and con-
figured in [s] in the configuration text box (23).
23. The cycle time of the sliding average value formation, based on the meas-
ured grid voltage for monitoring the voltage quality (21) and (22), is dis-
played and configured, where necessary, in [s] in this configuration text box.
24. This section is used to display and edit the function for monitoring the grid
frequency change rate (ROCOF: Rate of Change of Frequency). This moni-
toring function is frequently used as a passive method for islanding detec-
tion.
This monitoring function can be displayed and the activation/deactivation
changed in the activation field. This configuration text box is used to display
and edit the maximum permissible grid frequency change in [Hz/s].
If the actual frequency change rate exceeds the set limit value, the corre-
sponding fault state (ID 15/15 or ID 21/15 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
ately.
frequency drop f<<(1). This monitoring function can be displayed and the
activation/deactivation changed in the activation field.
value of the grid frequency. The display or configuration is implemented (via
the selection box) either in [%] related to the set rated grid frequency (4) or
in [V] as absolute grid frequency limit value.
ated in this monitoring function when the set lower grid frequency limit value
is undershot continuously for the duration of the set delay time.

the frequency drop f<<(2). This monitoring function can be displayed and
the activation/deactivation changed in the activation field.
in [V] as an absolute grid frequency limit value.
is undershot continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
frequency rise f>>(1). This monitoring function can be displayed and the
activation/deactivation changed in the activation field.
in [V] as an absolute grid frequency limit value.
is exceeded continuously for the duration of the set delay time.
The configuration and threshold values for the passive and active island-
ing detection functions are displayed and, where applicable, changed in the
third tab option “Islanding Detection” (Fig. 4.53, p. 137).

28
29 30
31
32
33
34
35
Fig. 4.52: Use

Changes as of Expert 28. This section is used to display and edit the function for monitoring the grid
frequency change rate (ROCOF: Rate of Change of Frequency). This moni-
toring function is frequently used as a passive method for islanding detec-
tion.
The checkbox is used to display and change the enablement/disablement
of this monitoring function. This configuration text box is used to display and
edit the maximum permissible grid frequency change in [Hz/s].
If the frequency change rate at the current time exceeds the set limit value,
the corresponding fault state (ID 15/15 or ID 21/15 in Tab. 4.30, p. 217,
see (section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is immediately triggered and the device shuts
down.
29. This checkbox indicates whether the integrated enabled “anti-islanding” de-
tection is used or can be used for enabling or disabling. The checkbox set-
tings can only be changed when the “User-defined setting” (2) is enabled.
NOTE
The PVMaster uses the so-called "accelerated frequency drift method" for ac-
tive islanding detection. In this method, a control method constantly attempts
to increase the reactive power supply when there are changes in grid fre-
quency in a feedback connection so that disconnection due to grid frequency
monitoring is rapid if unwanted island formation occurs. Through the use of
reactive power increase feedback, there is a very low additional reactive power
exchange with the grid in normal operation (no island formation), while the
high reliability and rapidity of impermissible island formation detection remain
unchanged.

30. This checkbox can be used to enable or disable the phase angle monitor for
the grid voltages. Ideally, the phase angle in question is 120°. Where phase
angles differ greatly (<90° or >150°), the relevant error state (ID 15/19 in
Tab. 4.30, p. 217, see (section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered.
31. The Q-factor describes the quality of the LCR resonant circuit, which may
lead to undesired islanding. The active method for islanding detection can
recognise undesired islanding sufficiently quickly using a trained resonant
circuit with a parameterised Q factor and trigger a shutdown.
32. Configuration text box to display and change the additional safety factor for
the limit stability for the positive feedback of the frequency / phase shift, tak-
ing into account the parameterised resonant circuit quality (21).
33. - 35. A test signal is superimposed on the grid current in order to constantly
monitor enabled islanding monitoring or the backup controller. These
configuration text boxes are used to display and change the configuration
of this monitoring function. If this test signal cannot be detected in the grid
current, the relevant error state is (ID 21/17 in Tab. 4.30, p. 217, see (sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221) after the delay set via the configuration text box (35).
NOTE
Only experts should change the configuration of functions for islanding detec-
tion. Please contact the support team at LTI REEnergy GmbH to discuss this.

4.3.4.2.4 Insulation monitoring (or monitoring the grounding resistance)

The PVMaster is fitted with an optional integrated unit for measuring and moni-
toring the insulation or earthing resistance. The insulation resistance is moni-
tored in photovoltaic generators (IT system) which are not earthed.
NOTE
When several PVMaster devices are operated in parallel on the AC and DC
side within an InterCOM device network using the special "Single MPPT"
infeed operation mode, only one unit within the entire device network oper-
ated in parallel may be used to measure the insulation or grounding resistance
as otherwise the active measuring processes of several measuring units will
interfere with each other negatively.
The PV generator must be grounded positively or negatively dependent on the

photovoltaic modules being used (e.g. for modules based on thin-film or back
contact cells).
NOTE
If not appropriately grounded during operation, certain module types based on
back contact cells can be subject to module degradation due to the so-called
"polarisation effect". In this case, the cells are not permanently damaged as
this degradation can be reversed with suitable measures.
NOTE
If not appropriately grounded during operation, certain module types based on
thin-film cells can be subject to permanent and non-reversible module degra-
dation due to the so-called "corrosion effect".
The necessary grounding of the PVMaster photovoltaic generator is imple-

mented by means of an optionally available “grounding kit”. To avoid the above-
mentioned effects, the necessary positive or negative bias voltage of the PV
generator compared to the ground potential is ensured by means of ohmic
resistance of 10 kOhm. This “grounding resistance” is appropriately measured
and monitored via the integrated unit.
REFERENCE
A detailed description of the optionally available "grounding kit" and detailed
information about connection are included in the PVMaster installation manual.
The monitoring functions for monitoring the insulation or grounding resistance

become active as soon as the AC and DC main switches (see functions 5 and
6 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166) of the PVMaster device are
switched on. The monitoring function is in the waiting state when the AC/DC
main switch is deactivated (state no.1 in Tab. 4.18, p. 140)
The display of the actual state, and the display and configuration of applicable
configuration settings for the integrated insulation and grounding resistance
monitoring, is implemented in the user interface of the menu option “Insulation
monitoring” within the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
(Fig. 4.53, p. 137).
This menu option is available at all user levels to display the actual state and to
display the active settings for the insulation and grounding resistance monitor-
ing. Changes to the monitoring settings are, however, not possible in the user
level “Observer”.

5 6
7 8
Fig. 4.53: U
ser interface of the menu option “Insulation monitoring” in the menu
sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
1. An option field displays the existing unit and interface used for measuring/
monitoring the insulation or grounding resistance. This option field is for
information display purposes only.
In normal cases, measurement of the insulation or grounding resistance
is implemented via an integrated measuring unit in the base device of the
PVMaster (“Internal insulation monitoring”) or via the evaluation of the ana-
logue signal (function no.3 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189)
from a separate measuring unit in the PVMaster enclosure (“Analogue
interface”).
NOTE
In some PVMaster device variants, there are no units for monitoring insula-
tion or grounding resistance integrated in the device. In the case of "Insulation
monitoring not used", the other elements (2) to (8) in the user interface are
hidden.
NOTE
In some PVMaster device variants, communication between the control
component of the PVMaster device and the unit for monitoring the insulation
or grounding resistance is implemented via two digital signals (see functions
13 and 14 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). In this case, the
"Digital interface" is displayed in the option field and the display of the actual
measured resistance value in the display text box (3) is not available.

2. The insulation monitoring state is displayed here via status fields and as a
plain text message in a display text box. The possible states are listed in
Tab. 4.18, p. 140.
A corresponding display of the insulation or grounding resistance monitoring
state is also available in the corresponding symbol on the Start user inter-
face “Overview” (section 4.3.1, p. 39).
3. This display text box is used to display the actual insulation resistance or
the grounding resistance in [kOhm].
In a pure IT system, the displayed measured value represents the meas-
ured insulation resistance. If the PV generator is positively or negatively
grounded using the optionally available grounding kit (see PVMaster instal-
lation manual), the displayed value represents the measured grounding
resistance (see section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
NOTE
The measured value display via this display text box is not available for all
PVMaster device types, see (1).
Changes as of Fitter 4. This option field is used to select whether the insulation resistance of a pure
IT system or the grounding resistance of a positively or negatively grounded
photovoltaic generator should be monitored.
In the insulation monitoring of an IT system (selection of the first option
“IT system”), the minimum limit values for insulation monitoring are pre-
initialised according to the expected connected photovoltaic generator peak
power and according to the rated device power of the PVMaster, then cor-
respondingly displayed in the configuration text boxes (6) and (8).
NOTE
If the peak power of the connected photovoltaic generator significantly ex-
ceeds the rated power of the PVMaster device, it may be necessary to manu-
ally adjust the pre-initialised limit values for the insulation monitoring in the
configuration text boxes (6) and (8).
If the grounding resistance of a positively or negatively grounded photo-
voltaic generator is monitored (selection of the second or third option), the
elements (9) and (10) are also shown, see Fig. 4.54, p. 139, to display and
edit, where necessary, the maximum permissible values for the grounding
resistance. The limit values for the monitoring of the grounding resistance
are already pre-initialised with 5 kOhm and 25 kOhm.
Changes as of Expert 5. The monitoring function for monitoring the insulation or grounding resistance
initially checks the connection condition before connection and before active
infeed operation. The measured resistance value must lie between the limit
values set in (6) and (8).
If the connection condition is met, the connection release is issued by the in-
sulation or grounding resistance monitoring. The connection release by the
insulation or grounding resistance monitoring is displayed in the first status
word (no. 10 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
If no permissible resistance value for the insulation or grounding resistance
can be determined during the checking of the connection condition within
the set timeout time, then no release is issued for connection and the fault
state (ID 23/01 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is trig-
gered.
This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the
timeout time for checking the connection condition in [min].

NOTE
The issuing of the connection release by the insulation or grounding resistance
monitoring requires a certain waiting time after the (daily) device new start,
due to initialisation and self-testing of the insulation measurement unit (state
no. 2 in Tab. 4.18, p. 140). The time period before the first valid measured
resistance value is available also depends on the size of the photovoltaic gen-
erator and the cell technology used (higher leakage capacitance levels in thin
layer modules).
6. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the
lower resistance limit value in [kOhm] for the check of the connection condi-
tion.
7. The monitoring of the insulation or grounding resistance is also imple-
mented continuously during active infeed operation, but the monitoring limit
values may be different. The measured resistance value must lie between
the limit values set in (8) and (10), if applicable.
If the resistance values for the insulation or grounding resistance remain
continuously impermissible, the PVMaster is switched off after the timeout
elapses and the fault state (ID 23/02 or ID 23/03 or ID 23/04 in Tab. 4.31,
p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) will be triggered.
This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the
timeout time in [min] for monitoring in active infeed operation.
8. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary,
the lower resistance limit value in [kOhm] for the monitoring in active infeed
operation.
10
Fig. 4.54: Additional parameters for grounded systems

Changes as of Expert 9. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the
maximum grounding resistance value in [kOhm] for the check of the connec-
tion condition.
This configuration text box is only shown if the option “Grounded negative”
or “Grounded positive” is selected in the option field (4).
10. (10) This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where neces-
sary, the maximum grounding resistance value in [kOhm] used for monitor-
ing the grounding resistance during active infeed operation.
This configuration text box is only shown if the option “Grounded negative”
or “Grounded positive” is selected in the option field (4).

Tab. 4.18: Insulation monitoring states

State /
No Description
plain text message
The PVMaster does not have insulation or ground-
ing resistance monitoring or it has been deacti-
Monitoring not
0 - vated. The release condition for connection by the
used
insulation monitoring is always met in this case
(no. 10 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43).
Monitoring in The insulation monitoring is in standby when the
1
standby AC or DC main switch is switched off.
The measurement of the insulation or grounding
resistance requires a certain amount of time. A de-
Wait for valid
2 lay due to the measurement can occur particularly
measurement
when checking the connection condition immedi-
ately after the device is switched on.
The measured resistance value for the insulation
Resistance or grounding resistance is outside the permitted
3
value at limit range. The delay time until error triggering is now
running.
Resistance
or grounding resistance is below the permitted
4 value at mini-
range. The delay time until error triggering is now
mum limit
running.
Resistance
or grounding resistance is above the permitted
5 value at maxi-
range. The delay time until error triggering is now
mum limit
running.
The measured insulation resistance is sufficiently
Resistance
6 high or the measured grounding resistance is in
value OK
the permitted range.
No permissible resistance value was determined
for the insulation or grounding resistance within the
Timeout while set timeout time during the checking of the connec-
11 switch-on condition condition. No release is issued for connection
tion by the insulation monitoring (no. 10 in Tab. 4.10,
p. 43) and the fault state (ID 23/01 in Tab. 4.31,
p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered.
If an invalid insulation or grounding resistance
value is determined during the active infeed opera-
Resistance
12 tion, the fault state (ID 23/02 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224,
value out of limit
see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered after the
set delay time has elapsed.
If an invalid low insulation or grounding resistance
value is determined during the active infeed opera-
Insulation resist-
13 tion, the fault state (ID 23/03 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224,
ance too low
see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered after the
set delay time has elapsed.
If an invalid high grounding resistance value is
determined during the active infeed operation, the
Insulation resist-
14 fault state (ID 23/04 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
ance too high
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered after the set delay
time has elapsed.

State /
No Description
plain text message
If there is a malfunction in the device-internal
measurement of the insulation or grounding
15 Error device
resistance, the fault state (ID 23/05 in Tab. 4.31,
p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered.
If there is a malfunction in the interface to the insu-
lation measuring unit or a wire break is detected,
16 Error interface
the fault state (ID 23/06 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see
section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered.
If the configuration of the settings for the insulation
Error configura- or grounding resistance monitoring is incorrect, the
17
tion fault state (ID 23/07 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221) is triggered.
4.3.4.2.5 Limit (infeed/grid security management)

The PVMaster offers the possibility of acquiring and appropriately implementing
setpoint specifications via interfaces (e.g. from the grid operator) for the active
Limit as a percentage as part of infeed/grid security management (NSM).
The setpoint specification can be implemented optionally via up to four digital
inputs (e.g. for evaluating the potential-free contacts of a ripple-control signal
receiver), via an analogue input (e.g. for evaluating the analogue output signals
of a ripple-control signal receiver), via the Modbus/TCP protocol (Ethernet inter-
face) or via the InterCOM device intercommunication.
A display of the actual active Limit as a percentage as part of infeed/grid
security management (NSM) is also available in the corresponding symbol on
the Start user interface “Overview” (section 4.3.1, p. 39). The display is also
available in the user interface “Limit” of the menu sub-group “Grid” in the menu
group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
The state of this active Limit is displayed in status word 3 (see nos. 8 to 12 in
Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
The menu option “Limit” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group
“Configuration” is available in every user level. The corresponding user inter-
faces (Fig. 4.55 to Fig. 4.58, p. 147) are used to display the actual state and to
display and edit the settings for the setpoint specification functions for the active
Limit as part of infeed/grid security management (NSM). At the “Observer” user
level, only the actual state and active settings are displayed. Changes to the
settings are only possible as of the user level “Fitter”.

The elements displayed in the user interface vary depending on the interface
used for setpoint specification.
4 5 3
Fig. 4.55: U
ser interface of the menu option “Limit” in the menu sub-group
1. This option field is used to display the interface used for setpoint specifica-
tion of the active Limit as part of infeed/grid security management (NSM).
The option field is for display only; the selection of the interface for setpoint
specification is implemented via the function assignment of the digital inputs
or an analogue PVMaster input, or by activating the corresponding func-
tional InterCOM communication object if the device is in a local InterCOM
device network. The option field is always displayed in the user interface,
irrespective of the interface used for setpoint specification
If setpoint specification is implemented via digital inputs, i.e. where the
digital inputs of the PVMaster have been assigned the functions 27, 28, 29
and/or 30 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168 (section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), then the user
interface is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.56 (section 4.3.4.2.5.2, p. 144).
If setpoint specification is implemented via an analogue input, i.e. where the
analogue input of the PVMaster has been assigned the function 4 in Tab.
4.23, p. 190 (section 4.3.2.6.3, p. 85), then the user interface is dis-
played as shown in Fig. 4.57, p. 146 (section 4.3.4.2.5.3, p. 145).

NOTE
Only one interface at a time can be used for active Limit setpoint specification.
Once the applicable functions for setpoint specification have been activated
respectively for the digital inputs and an analogue input, the setpoint specifica-
tion is implemented via the digital inputs.
If the setpoint specification is implemented via the InterCOM device in-
tercommunication through another InterCOM node in the local InterCOM
device network (InterCOM communication object no.1 in Tab. 4.28, p. 207,
section 4.3.4.5.2, p. 206), then the user interface is displayed as shown in
Fig. 4.58, p. 147 (section 4.3.4.2.5.4, p. 147).
If none of the above interfaces were activated for setpoint specification, then
the user interface is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.55, p. 142 and the set-
point specification can be implemented manually via a configuration text box
(3) or via Modbus/TCP communication (section 4.3.4.2.5.1, p. 144).
2. Symbol with display text box to display the actual active power maximum
value in per cent of the device as part of grid security or infeed manage-
ment. This element is always displayed in the user interface, irrespective of
the interface used for setpoint specification
The displayed value takes into account the setpoint specification ramp func-
tion (if used) and any activated delay times (if used) for the setpoint. If the
function is not generally used, the value 100% is always displayed.
The display is also available in the Start user interface “Overview” (sec-
tion 4.3.1, p. 39) and in the menu option “Limit” user interface of the menu
sub-group “Grid” in the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65).
Changes as of Fitter 3. The actual setpoint in per cent for the active Limit is shown here in a con-
figuration text box, without taking into account the ramp function (if used) or
the activated delay time (if used). This display is always available in the user
interface, irrespective of the interface used for setpoint specification.
The configuration text box is normally only used to display the actual set-
point for the active Limit. If the option “Not used (manual or MODBUS TCP)”
is active in the option field (1), the setpoint specification can be implemented
manually via this configuration text box. The configuration text box is re-
leased for manual input by the user after the “Manual” button (5) is pressed.
4. This area is used to display and change the configuration of the ramp func-
tion for limiting the setpoint gradient for active Limit. The maximum change
to the active Limit in per cent [%/s] is displayed and configured via the
configuration text box. The activation/deactivation of the active power ramp
is implemented in the activation field next to the configuration text box.

4.3.4.2.5.1 Manual setpoint specification or via Modbus/TCP

If none of the functions for the digital inputs or an analogue input for setpoint
specification were activated and if the setpoint in per cent for the active Limit is
not transmitted via the InterCOM device intercommunication, then the user in-
terface will be displayed as shown in Fig. 4.55, p. 142 with the activated option
“Not used (Manual or MODBUS TCP)” in the option field (1). In this case, the
setpoint specification can be implemented manually via the configuration text
box (3) or via the Modbus/TCP communication.
Changes as of Fitter 5. This button is used to release the configuration text box (3) for manual set-
ting of the setpoint in percent for active Limit.
4.3.4.2.5.2 Setpoint specifications via digital inputs

If setpoint specification is implemented via digital inputs, i.e. where the digital
inputs of the PVMaster have been assigned the functions 27, 28, 29 and/or
30 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168 (section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166), then the user interface is
displayed as shown in Fig. 4.56.
Fig. 4.56: U
“Grid” of the menu group “Configuration” (Digital inputs)
Changes as of Fitter 6. The visualisation of the possible combinations for up to four digital signals
for active Limit setpoint specifications is shown in this area. The display text
boxes show the corresponding decimal value of the respective signal combi-
nations. The state fields visualise the respective signal states of the possible
signal combinations, dependent on the number of digital signals used for
setpoint specification. Unused signal combinations are indicated by grey

state fields for the corresponding signals (e.g. if only three digital inputs are
used). The actual active signal combinations are marked according to the
actual signal states of the digital inputs used.
The signal states of the digital inputs used are also displayed in status word
3 (see nos. 9 to 12 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
7. This area is used to display and edit, where necessary, the active Limit
values in per cent based on the rated device power in the configuration text
boxes for all possible combinations of the up to four digital signals for set-
point specification (maximum 16 states if all four digital signals for setpoint
specification are used).
8. A special trigger mode for setpoint specification of the active Limit via
digital inputs can be activated/deactivated using this button. In this mode,
up to maximum 5 different setpoint specifications for the active Limit can
be implemented if all four digital signals are used. The correspondingly
set setpoints are only changed if the flanks of the digital signals rise, i.e. a
specified setpoint remains active until the rising flank of a digital signal for a
different setpoint is detected.
9. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, a
delay time in [ms] for setpoint acceptance after a signal state change. The
corresponding active Limit setpoint of a new signal state or a new combina-
tion of signal states is only accepted as the setpoint after this delay time has
elapsed.
4.3.4.2.5.3 Setpoint specification via analogue input

If setpoint specification is implemented via an analogue input, i.e. where the
analogue input of the PVMaster has been assigned the function 4 in Tab. 4.23,
p. 190 (section 4.3.2.6.3, p. 85), then the user interface is displayed as
shown in Fig. 4.57.
In this case, the setpoints in per cent for the active Limit are generated via a
configurable characteristic curve function, dependent on the actual value of the
analogue input as the input value of the characteristic curve. The characteris-
tic curve is defined by specification of 21 data points for the active power limit
values. The operation of the characteristic curve function for setpoint generation
can be implemented here with or without linear interpolation between the data
points.

13 12
10
11 14
Fig. 4.57: U ser interface of the menu option “Limit” in the menu sub-group
“Grid” of the menu group “Configuration” (analogue input)
Changes as of Fitter 10. This diagram area is used to display and edit, where necessary, the charac-
teristic curve function with the corresponding data points used to generate
the setpoints for active Limit. The output value of the displayed characteris-
tic curve is the setpoint for the active Limit in [%] based on the rated power
of the PVMaster device. The value of the analogue input represents the
input value of the displayed characteristic curve. The characteristic curve
displayed in the diagram area is modified appropriately dependent on the
selection of the interpolation mode in the option field (12).
When a data point in the diagram area is selected, the corresponding
numerical value of the active power limit value in per cent is shown in the
configuration text box (11) in [%/PN] and can subsequently be changed in
this configuration text box. Individual data points can also be changed by
vertically shifting the data points in the diagram area.
respective active power limit value in per cent [%/PN] of the characteristic
curve data point selected in the diagram area (10).
Changes as of Fitter 12. The interpolation mode for the set characteristic curve is selected in this
option field.
If the option “No interpolation” is selected, the setpoint specification is imple-
mented within a characteristic curve section according to the left-hand data
point of the characteristic curve section. There is an inevitable discontinu-
ity in the setpoint specification each time the characteristic curve section is
changed due to the analogue signal changing.

If the option “Linear interpolation” is selected in the option field, then the
setpoint is generated within a characteristic curve section by the linear inter-
polation of the active power limit values in per cent of the left and right data
points in the characteristic curve section.
delay time in [ms] for setpoint acceptance after a characteristic curve sec-
tion change. The corresponding active Limit setpoints of a new character-
istic curve section are only accepted as setpoints after this delay time has
elapsed.
14. The actual value of the analogue input used for the active Limit setpoint
specification is displayed in this display text box in [%]. This value repre-
sents the input value of the characteristic curve function.
4.3.4.2.5.4 Setpoint specifications

via InterCOM device intercommunication
If the setpoint specification is implemented via the InterCOM device intercom-
munication through another InterCOM node in the local InterCOM device
network (InterCOM communication object no.1 in Tab. 4.28, p. 207, sec-
tion 4.3.4.5.2, p. 206), then the user interface is displayed as shown in Fig.
4.58.
4 3
Fig. 4.58: U
“Grid” of the menu group “Configuration” (InterCOM)
The actual setpoint in per cent for the active Limit is also displayed in this case
in the user interface of the menu option “InterCOM” in the menu group “State
and Values” (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48). The setpoint is displayed there in the cor-
responding display text box of the InterCOM node broadcasting the setpoint to
the other InterCOM nodes. The other InterCOM nodes limit the active power fed
in in accordance with this active power maximum value in per cent (based on
the rated power of the device).
4.3.4.3 Grid stabilisation

The menu options in this menu sub-group are used to display the actual state
and the display and configuration of function settings for static and dynamic grid
stabilisation. This includes the static voltage stabilisation (reactive power con-
trol), static frequency stabilisation (automatic frequency-dependent reduction of
active power) and dynamic grid stabilisation in case of an error (LVRT).
4.3.4.3.1 Voltage (reactive power control for stat-

ic grid voltage stabilisation)
The PVMaster offers various options and interfaces for generating/acquiring set-
points for the reactive power control as part of static grid voltage stabilisation.
Setpoint generation or specification can be implemented either statically (per-
manently fixed setpoint or controlled by digital inputs), dynamically (via a freely
configurable characteristic curve function) or via the Modbus/TCP protocol
(Ethernet interface).

Setpoint generation or specification can be implemented as required as a phase

offset value in [°deg], as a power factor cosPhi or tanPhi, or as a direct reactive
power value in [kVAr]. However, within the control structure of the PVMaster,
all values are converted into the corresponding reactive power setpoints for
the control system. A corresponding limitation of the gradients of the resulting
reactive power setpoints is implemented dependent on the rated power of the
PVMaster device and cannot be changed.
NOTE
Regardless of the type of setpoint specification, the PVMaster II can only
implement reactive power setpoints in accordance with a power factor cosPhi
greater than 0.8. Operation with a lower power factor is generally not applica-
ble with PVMaster II.
PVMaster III, on the other hand, supports pure phase shift operation when the
setpoint is specified as a direct reactive power value in [kVAr].
NOTE
The priority of the PVMaster reactive power control is always higher than the
active power control. The conversion of reactive power setpoints for overex-
cited operation always requires a higher DC voltage than the rectified value
of the actual grid voltage. If necessary, the PVMaster automatically raises the
DC voltage to realise the specified overexcited operation. In which case, this
automatically causes a shift in the operating point (MPP) in the direction of the
open-circuit voltage of the generator, combined with a lower infeed power.
NOTE
The measurement of the actual reactive power for controlling the reactive
power is implemented at the AC output of the PVMaster device. However,
there is often the requirement (e.g. by the grid operator) that a specific be-
haviour needs to be met with a certain accuracy with regard to the reactive
power or the power factor at a higher-level grid node point. A higher-level
"Park control system" can, for example, be used here to evaluate the required
measurements at the grid node point and specify appropriate setpoints for the
reactive power control of the PVMaster device(s), e.g. via Modbus/TCP com-
munication.
Alternatively, the specification of an additive reactive power setpoint can be
implemented to take into account the reactive power requirement, e.g. of the
medium voltage transformer, the medium voltage lines, etc. To do this, a com-
parison measurement may be necessary at the grid node point to determine
the additive reactive power setpoint.
NOTE
The Power Plant Master from LTi can be used for precise control of active
power and / or reactive power or power factor at the higer level grid node
point. For more information, please refer to the Power Plant Master Operating
Instructions.
The actual reactive power and the actual power factor (as phase and total or
average value) is displayed in the user interface of the menu option “Power” in
the menu sub-group of the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.2,
p. 63).
The state of the static grid voltage stabilisation is shown via status word 3 (see
no. 17 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
The menu option “Voltage” in the menu sub-group “Grid stabilisation” of the
menu group “Configuration” is available in every user level. The corresponding
user interfaces (Fig. 4.59 to Fig. 4.62, p. 155) are used to display the actual
state and to display and edit the settings for the setpoint specification/genera-
tion functions for the reactive power control as part of static grid voltage stabili-

sation. At the “Observer” user level, only the actual state and active settings are
displayed. Changes to the settings are only possible as of the user level “Fitter”.
Fig. 4.59: U
ser interface of the menu option “Voltage” in the menu sub-group
“Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration” (option: no
reactive power)
The elements displayed in the user interface vary depending on the interface
used for setpoint specification.
Changes as of Fitter 1. This option field is used to display and select the method or interface used
for setpoint specification/generation for reactive power control as part of
static grid voltage stabilisation. The option field is always displayed in the
user interface, irrespective of the method or interface used for setpoint
specification/generation.
a) “No reactive power (max. power factor)”: the active infeed operation
is always implemented with the maximum possible power factor. The
setpoint for reactive power control is always zero. The user interface for
this option is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.59.
b) “Fixed reference value”: If this option is selected, the setpoint specifica-
tion for the reactive power control is always implemented as a fixed set-
point or dependent on the signal states of the digital inputs used for this
purpose (section 4.3.4.3.1.1, p. 150). In total, up to four digital inputs
can be used for setpoint specification (functions 39, 40, 41 and/or 42 in
Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). The user interface
for this option is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.60, p. 151.

c) “Table function”: This option enables dynamic setpoint generation for

the reactive power control based on an adjustable characteristic curve
function, dependent on the actual grid voltage, the actual active power,
the actual time or the actual value of the applicable analogue input used
(function no. 5 in Tab. 4.23, p. 190, see section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189). The
user interface for this option is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.61, p. 153.
d) “Manual or MODBUS TCP”: This option enables manual setpoint specifi-
cation for reactive power control via a configuration text box or via Mod-
bus/TCP communication. The user interface for this option is displayed
as shown in Fig. 4.62, p. 155.
2. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where necessary, an
additive reactive power setpoint in [VAr] to take into account the reactive
power requirement, e.g. of the medium voltage transformer, the medium
voltage lines, etc.
4.3.4.3.1.1 Fixed reference value specification or via digital inputs

If the option “Fixed reference value” is selected in the option field (1), the
setpoint specification for the reactive power control is always implemented as
a fixed setpoint or dependent on the signal states of the digital inputs used for
this purpose. In total, up to four digital inputs can be used for setpoint specifica-
tion (functions 39, 40, 41 and/or 42 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1,
p. 166). The user interface for this option is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.60,
p. 151.

9
3
Fig. 4.60: U ser interface of the menu option “Voltage” in the menu sub-group
“Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration” (option: fixed
setpoint)
Changes as of Fitter 3. The type of setpoint is selected in this selection box. Setpoint generation
or specification can be implemented as required as a phase offset value
in [°deg], as a power factor cosPhi or tanPhi, or as a direct reactive power
value in [kVAr].
4. The visualisation of the possible combinations for up to four digital signals
for reactive power control is shown in this area. The display text boxes show
the corresponding decimal value of the respective signal combinations.
The state fields visualise the respective signal states of the possible signal
combinations, dependent on the number of digital signals used for setpoint
specification. Unused signal combinations are indicated by grey state fields
for the corresponding signals (e.g. if only three digital inputs are used). The
actual active signal combinations are marked according to the actual signal
states of the digital inputs used.
Changes as of Fitter 5. This area is used to display and edit, where necessary, the setpoints in the
configuration text boxes for all possible combinations of the up to four digital
signals for setpoint specification (maximum 16 states if all four digital signals
for setpoint specification are used).
If no digital input is used for setpoint specification, then the set setpoint of
the first element (signal combination 0) is always used.
The input limits and the initialisation of the values in the individual configu-
ration text boxes are dependent on the selection of the setpoint type in the
selection box (3).

6. These selection boxes are only available when the setpoint type “cosPhi”
is activated (via selection box (3)) and are used to display and edit, where
necessary, the setpoint type (inductive or capacitive) for all possible com-
binations of the digital signals (of which there are up to four) for setpoint
specification (maximum 16 states if all four digital signals for setpoint speci-
fication are used).
7. A special trigger mode for setpoint specification via digital inputs can be acti-
vated/deactivated using this button. In this mode, up to maximum 5 different
setpoint specifications for the reactive power control can be implemented
if all four digital signals are used. The correspondingly set setpoints are
only changed if the flanks of the digital signals rise, i.e. a specified setpoint
remains active until the rising flank of a digital signal for a different setpoint
is detected.
delay time in [ms] for setpoint acceptance after a signal state change. The
corresponding setpoint of a new signal state or a new combination of signal
states is only accepted as the setpoint after this delay time has elapsed.
9. The actual reactive Limit setpoint is shown here in a configuration text box,
without taking into account the activated delay time (if used). This display is
always available in the user interface, irrespective of the method or interface
used for setpoint specification/generation.
If the setpoint type “cosPhi” was selected via the selection box (3), then a
status field is displayed next to the configuration text box. This status field is
active as soon as setpoint specification is set to inductive.
The configuration text box is normally only used to display the actual set-
point. If the option “Manual or MODBUS TCP)” is active in the option field
(1), the setpoint specification can be implemented manually via this configu-
ration text box. The configuration text box is released for manual input by
the user after the “Manual” button (22) is pressed.
4.3.4.3.1.2 Table or characteristic curve function

If the option “Table function” is selected in the option field (1), the setpoint speci-
fication for the reactive power control is implemented dynamically (via a freely
configurable characteristic curve function), dependent on the actual grid volt-
age, the actual AC active power of the PVMaster device, the actual time or the
actual value of the correspondingly used analogue input (function no. 5 in Tab.
4.23, p. 190, see section 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189). The user interface for this option
is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.61, p. 153.

16 17
20
13 11 18
10
14 12 19 15
Fig. 4.61: U
“Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration” (option: table
function)
Changes as of Fitter 10. This diagram area is used to display and edit, where necessary, the charac-
teristic curve function with the corresponding data points used to generate
the setpoints for reactive power control. The output value of the displayed
characteristic curve is the setpoint for the reactive power control depending
on the selection of the setpoint type via the selection box (13). The input
value of the displayed characteristic curve is displayed or selected via the
selection box (12).
The characteristic curve displayed in the diagram area is modified appropri-
ately dependent on the selection of the interpolation mode in the option field
(16).
When a data point in the diagram area is selected, the corresponding
numerical value of the setpoint is shown in the configuration text box (11)
and can subsequently be changed in this configuration text box. Individual
data points can also be changed by vertically shifting the data points in the
diagram area.
If the setpoint type “cosPhi” was set in the selection box (13), then the type
of setpoint is indicated by the colour of the individual data points (blue = in-
ductive or red = capacitive). The setpoint type of the individual data points
can be changed in this case via the additional selection box next to the
configuration text box (11).

the respective setpoint of the characteristic curve data point selected in the
diagram area (10).
If the setpoint type “cosPhi” was set in the selection box (13), then another
selection box will be available next to the configuration text box to select the
setpoint type (inductive or capacitive) of the individual data points.
12. This selection box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the input
signal of the characteristic curve function:
a) “Pac/PN[%]”: the actual AC active power based on the rated power of
the PVMaster device is used as the input value for the characteristic
curve function (e.g. for activation of a cosPhi=f(P) characteristic curve).
b) “Veff/VN[%]”: the actual grid voltage based on the set rated value of the
grid voltage is used as the input value for the characteristic curve func-
tion (e.g. for activation of a Q=f(U) characteristic curve).
c) “Time [hh:mm]”: the actual time is used as the input value for the char-
acteristic curve function (for activation of a time plan for reactive power
setpoint specification).
NOTE
If an analogue input is allocated function no. 5 (Tab. 4.23, p. 190, see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.3, p. 189), then it is not possible to select the input signal via the
selection box and the value of the analogue input is used as the input signal.
13. The selection of the characteristic curve function output signal type for the
reactive power control setpoint specification is implemented in this selection
box. Setpoint generation or specification can be implemented as required
as a phase offset value in [°deg], as a power factor cosPhi or tanPhi, or as a
direct reactive power value in [kVAr].
14. The value range of the input signal is configurable so that the characteristic
curve function with its 21 data points can be carried out for any part of the
input signal.
This configuration text box is used to specify the lower value of the input
signal range for the scaling of the characteristic curve. The setpoint specifi-
cation is implemented according to the first data point for input signal values
below this specified minimum value.
15. The value range of the input signal is configurable so that the characteristic
curve function with its 21 data points can be carried out for any part of the
input signal.
This configuration text box is used to specify the upper value of the input
signal range for the scaling of the characteristic curve. The setpoint speci-
fication is implemented according to the 21st data point for input signal
values above this specified end value.
16. The interpolation mode for the set characteristic curve is selected in this
option field.
If the option “No interpolation” is selected, the setpoint specification is imple-
mented within a characteristic curve section according to the left-hand data
point of the characteristic curve section. There is an inevitable discontinu-
ity in the setpoint specification each time the characteristic curve section is
changed due to the characteristic curve input signal changing.
If the option “Linear interpolation” is selected in the option field, then the
setpoint is generated within a characteristic curve section by the linear inter-
polation of the setpoints of the left and right data points in the characteristic
curve section.

17. This area contains elements for using the zoom functions in the diagram
function. The zoom mode in the diagram area is activated/deactivated via
the button.
If the zoom mode is activated, this is shown in the status field next to the
button and the area to be enlarged can be selected in the diagram area. If
the zoom mode is activated, the data points cannot be shifted in the dia-
gram area. To do this, the zoom function must first be deactivated via the
button, e.g. after the required diagram area has been enlarged.
Pressing the “Reset” button returns the diagram area display to the normal
display without any enlargement.
18. Pressing the “Initialise” button initialises the 21 data points for the respective
setpoints according to the setpoint type set in the selection box (13). If the
setpoint type “cosPhi” is activated, pressing the “Initialise” button will initial-
ise all data points to the value 1. With the other setpoint types “Phi [°deg]”,
“tanPhi” and “Q [kVAr]”, all data points are initialised to the value zero when
the button is pressed.
19. The actual value of the characteristic curve function input signal for setpoint
generation is displayed in this display text box with the applicable unit of the
input signal type selected in the selection box (12).
This display text box is not available for the input signal type “Time
[hh:mm]”.
delay time in [ms] for setpoint acceptance after a characteristic curve sec-
tion change. The corresponding active Limit setpoints of a new character-
istic curve section are only accepted as setpoints after this delay time has
elapsed.
4.3.4.3.1.3 Manual setpoint specification or via Modbus/TCP

If the option “Manual or MODBUS TCP” is selected in the option field (1), the
setpoint specification for reactive power control can be implemented manually
via the configuration text box (9) or via Modbus/TCP communication. The user
interface for this option is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.62.
21
22
Fig. 4.62: U
“Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration” (Option: Manual
or Modbus TCP)
Changes as of Fitter 21. The type of setpoint is selected in this selection box. Setpoint generation
or specification can be implemented as required as a phase offset value
in [°deg], as a power factor cosPhi or tanPhi, or as a direct reactive power
value in [kVAr].
22. This button is used to release the configuration text box (9) for manual set-
ting of the setpoint for reactive power control.

4.3.4.3.2 Frequency stabilisation

The menu option “Frequency stabilisation” in the menu sub-group “Grid stabi-
lisation” of the menu group “Configuration” is available in every user level. The
corresponding user interface (Fig. 4.63) is used to display the actual state and
display and edit function settings for static frequency stabilisation (automatic
frequency-dependent reduction of actual active power if grid frequency values
are too high).
At the “Observer” user level, only the actual state and active settings are dis-
played. Changes to the settings are only possible as of the user level “Fitter”.
After the grid code (see section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) is selected in the corre-
sponding selection box, the activation/deactivation and the configuration of
the function for static grid frequency stabilisation is initialised according to the
selected grid code.
The state of the static grid frequency stabilisation function is shown via status
word 3 (see no. 16 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). Any change
to this state represents a “special event” and will be recorded by the integrated
data logger. The retrieval, display and further processing of the “unusual events”
that have occurred can be easily implemented in the menu option “Events” of
the menu group “Diagnosis” (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).
The display of the actual effective active Limit in per cent due to the grid fre-
quency stabilisation function is also available in the user interface “Limit”
of the menu sub-group “Grid” in the menu group “Status and Values” (sec-
tion 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).

2 4 11
12
13 7 14
8
5
3
9
10
6
Fig. 4.63: U
ser interface of the menu option “Frequency stabilisation” in the
menu sub-group “Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configura-
tion” (option: frequency stabilisation active, hysteresis operation)
Changes as of Fitter 1. This option field is used for the activation/deactivation of the function for
static grid frequency stabilisation. If the option “Frequency stabilisation not
used” is selected, then no additional elements are displayed in the user
interface.
2. This option field is used to display and edit, where necessary, the operation
mode of the characteristic curve for static grid frequency stabilisation.
If the first option “Hysteresis operation” (Fig. 4.63, p. 157) is selected, the
actual active power is only reduced according to the set reduction gradi-
ent in the configuration text box (9) after the start value (7) is exceeded by
the actual grid frequency (3) during the activity of active Limit for static grid
frequency stabilisation. Increasing the active power is only then possible
when the grid frequency (3) drops below the end value (13) again. The
characteristic curve in the area of active Limit is therefore only “operated” in
one direction.
If the second option “Curve operation” (Fig. 4.64) is selected, the actual
active power is initially also reduced according to the set reduction gradi-
ent in the configuration text box (9) after the start value (7) is exceeded by
the actual grid frequency (3) during the activity of active Limit for static grid
frequency stabilisation. However, in this operation mode for the static grid
frequency stabilisation function, the characteristic curve is “operated” in both
directions so that an increase in active power can occur as soon as the grid
frequency value (3) drops.

If the operation mode is changed, the visualised characteristic curve in the

user interface is automatically modified (compare Fig. 4.63, p. 157 and Fig.
4.64).
3. The actual measured grid frequency in [Hz] is shown in this display text box.
The actual grid frequency is also displayed in the menu option “AC values”
in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and Values” (sec-
tion 4.3.2.4.1, p. 61).
4. The actual total active power is displayed here in [kW] in a display text box.
This value represents the sum of the three actual phase active powers. The
actual total active power is also displayed in the menu options “AC values”
and “Power” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Status and
Values” (section 4.3.2.4.1, p. 61 and section 4.3.2.4.2, p. 63).
5. The rated value for the grid frequency in [Hz] is displayed here in a configu-
ration text box. The limit values in per cent of the grid frequency monitoring
functions (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) and static grid frequency stabilisation
are based on this rated value.
This setting can also be changed in the user interfaces of the menu options
“General” and “Monitoring” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group
“Configuration” (section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115 and section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
6. This area displays the visualisation of the characteristic curve for the static
grid frequency stabilisation as the function dP=f(f).
The displayed visualisation is automatically adapted, depending on the op-
eration mode of the characteristic curve in the option field (2) (cf. Fig. 4.63,
p. 157 and Fig. 4.64).
Fig. 4.64: Static frequency stabilisation in characteristic curve operation

start value of the grid frequency for the static grid frequency stabilisation
function in [Hz]. The value is preset as the differential value to the set rated
frequency (5).
If the actual grid frequency in active infeed operation exceeds this start
value, then the static grid frequency stabilisation function becomes active
and the value of the actual fed-in AC active power is “frozen”. This “frozen”
value PM is displayed in the display text box (8).

8. When the function for static grid frequency stabilisation becomes active,
the “frozen” value of the AC active power in [kW] PM is displayed in this
display text box. The active Limit for static frequency stabilisation relates to
this “frozen” value. No value is displayed here if the function for static grid
frequency stabilisation is not active.
the reduction gradient in [%PM/Hz] for active Limit in case of raised grid
frequency values, i.e. the reduction in per cent of the actual active power
(related to the “frozen” active power value) per Hz above the start value of
the function for static grid frequency stabilisation.
10. If the static grid frequency stabilisation function is actually active in case of
raised grid frequency, the actual absolute active Limit is displayed here in
[kW] (difference between “frozen” active power value and the actual AC ac-
tive power). No value is displayed here if the function for static grid frequen-
cy stabilisation is not active.
11. The resulting absolute active Limit by the function for static grid frequency
stabilisation is displayed in this display text box in [kW]. No value is dis-
played here if the function for static grid frequency stabilisation is not active.
12. Symbol with display text box for displaying the resulting actual active Limit
in per cent of the device (based on the device rated power) due to the active
function for static grid frequency stabilisation. This display is also available
in the user interface “Limit” of the menu sub-group “Grid” in the menu group
the end value of the grid frequency for the static grid frequency stabilisation
function in [Hz]. The value is preset as the differential value to the set rated
frequency (5).
If the actual grid frequency in active infeed operation drops below this end
value, then the previously active static grid frequency stabilisation function
is deactivated again.
14. The upper limit value of the grid frequency in [Hz] is shown in this configu-
ration text box. If the actual grid frequency exceeds this limit value, the
PVMaster device is switched off due to the grid monitoring functions (see
section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
4.3.4.3.3 LVRT (dynamic grid stabilisation)

The PVMaster offers the possibility of participating in dynamic grid stabilisation
in the case of brief faults (short circuits) in the higher-level supply grid within the
scope of the LVRT functions (“Low Voltage Ride Through”).
If the applicable functions are activated and configured, then no switch-off
occurs during brief grid voltage drops and the PVMaster can participate in the
dynamic stabilisation of the grid voltage by feeding in an additional reactive cur-
rent, dependent on the remaining grid voltage.
After the grid code (see section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) is changed in the corre-
sponding selection box, the activation/deactivation and the configuration of
the function for static grid frequency stabilisation is initialised according to the
selected grid code.
The menu option “LVRT” in the menu sub-group “Grid stabilisation” of the menu
group “Configuration” is available in every user level. The corresponding user
interface (Fig. 4.65) is used to display the actual state and the display and con-
figuration of function settings for dynamic grid stabilisation.

At the “Observer” user level, only the actual state and active settings are dis-
played. Changes are only possible as of the user level “Fitter”.
The state of the dynamic grid stabilisation function is shown via status word 3
(see nos. 18 and 19 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). Any change
to these states represents a “special event” and will be recorded by the inte-
grated data logger. The retrieval, display and further processing of the “unu-
sual events” that have occurred can be easily implemented in the menu option
“Events” of the menu group “Diagnosis” (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).
1 3
2 6
5 7 4
Fig. 4.65: U
ser interface of the menu option “LVRT” in the menu sub-group
“Grid stabilisation” of the menu group “Configuration”
Changes as of Fitter 1. This selection box is used to activate the additional reactive current infeed in
the case of a fault or for selecting the appropriate reactive current response
required. Any changes in this option field are automatically reflected in the
visualised switch-off diagram (8) and the visualised reactive current re-
sponse (10) in the tab option “Reactive current response”.
If the option “No reactive current” is selected, no additional reactive current
is fed in for grid stabilisation if there is a fault due to brief grid voltage drops.
If the option “Reactive current response 1 (TC2007)” is selected, then the
additional reactive current in the case of grid voltage drops is determined
dependent on the remaining grid voltage based on the reactive current
response according to the “VDN - TransmissionCode 2007” (see Fig. 4.66,
p. 163).

If the option “Reactive current response 2 (SDLWindV)” is selected, then the

additional reactive current in the case of grid voltage drops is determined
dependent on the remaining grid voltage based on the reactive current
response according to the Wind System Services Regulation (“SDLWindV”)
(see Fig. 4.67, p. 164).
Selecting the option “reactive current response 3 (GB / T 19964)” deter-
mines the absolute (not additional) reactive current depending on the
remaining grid voltage and the set k-factor. With a k-factor of 1.5, this cor-
responds to the reactive current feed of Chinese Guideline GB/T 19964 in
the event of failure.
2. The rated value of the grid voltage in [V] and the rated value of the device
current of the PVMaster in [A] are displayed in this display text box.
The limit values in percent of the grid voltage monitoring functions (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124) and grid voltage-dependent grid stabilisation func-
tions are based on the rated value of the grid voltage. In the case of dynam-
ic grid stabilisation function, the determination of the relevant grid voltage
drop for determining the additional reactive current is based on this rated
value.
Any change, where necessary, to the rated value of the grid voltage can
be implemented via the user interfaces of the menu options “General” and
“Monitoring” in the menu sub-group “Grid” of the menu group “Configuration”
(see section 4.3.4.2.1, p. 115 and section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124)
The determination of the absolute additional reactive current during grid
voltage drops is based on the rated value of the device current, depend-
ent on the reactive current response. This rated value cannot generally be
changed.
3. This display text box is used to display the value of the relevant grid voltage
deviation ∆V / VN at the current time in percent. If the percentage relevant
grid voltage deviation exceeds the set deadband (5), then the additional
reactive current infeed is implemented according to the set reactive current
response (1), dependent on the percentage relevant grid voltage deviation.
4. The actual imbalance in per cent of the grid voltages is shown in this display
text box. The value results from the sum of the grid voltage indicator in the
counter-system based on the rated value of the grid voltage.
5. The additional reactive current infeed in the event of a fault only occurs
when the percentage relevant grid voltage deviation (3) lies outside a dead-
band. This configuration text box is used to display and edit, where neces-
sary, the percentage deadband.
Any changes to the deadband are automatically reflected in the visualised
switch-off diagram (8), the tab option “Overview” and the visualised reactive
current response (10) in the tab option “Reactive current response”. The
deadband is always shown as a green area in these displays.
6. The states of the dynamic grid stabilisation functions are displayed in these
status fields.
When a grid voltage drop is detected, the “LVRT active” status field is acti-
vated and remains active for the duration of the additional reactive current
infeed.
When the grid voltage returns (fault rectified) into the set deadband (5),
the setpoint in the reactive power controller is limited for the time set via
the configuration text box (7) to the reactive power setpoint before the fault
occurred (minutes average). This limitation is to ensure that operation does
not occur with less excitation than before the grid voltage drop. The second
status field “Q limit” is active during active limitation of the reactive power
setpoint.

The states are also displayed in status word 3 (see nos. 18 and 19 in Tab.
4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). Any change to these states repre-
sents a “special event” and will be recorded by the integrated data logger.
The retrieval, display and further processing of the “unusual events” that
have occurred can be easily implemented in the menu option “Events” of the
menu group “Diagnosis” (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).
7. When the grid voltage returns (fault rectified) into the deadband (5), the set-
point in the reactive power controller is limited for the time set via the con-
figuration text box to the reactive power setpoint before the fault occurred
(minutes average). This limitation is to ensure that operation does not occur
with less excitation than before the grid voltage drop.
8. This diagram area is used to visualise the switch-off diagram dependent on
the configuration of the grid voltage monitoring functions (section 4.3.4.2.3,
p. 124). In addition, the configuration of the dynamic grid stabilisation func-
tion is visualised in the diagram area (deadband as green section and sec-
tion of overexcited operation due to additional reactive current infeed in red).
Changes as of Expert 9. This area of the user interface is used to display and edit the functions for
monitoring the voltage drop V<< and voltage rise V>> in the same way as in
section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124. Manual modification of these settings is also only
possible here when the “User-defined settings” are activated.
The checkboxes are used to display and configure or enable or disable this
monitoring function. Here, the network phase voltages (ph-n) can be moni-
tored, and / or linked grid voltages (ph-ph). The upper configuration text box
is used to display and change the limit value, in [%] or in [V ph-n] according
to choice, as an absolute phase voltage limit or [V ph-ph] as an absolute
limit for the linked grid voltage. The lower configuration text box is used
to display and edit the delay time in [ms] for the monitoring functions. The
triggering of the corresponding fault state and therefore the switch-off of the
PVMaster device is actuated in this monitoring function when the respective
grid voltage limit value is exceeded continuously for the duration of the set
delay time. Changes to the settings are automatically reflected in the visual-
ised switch-off diagram (8).
The second tab option “Reactive current response” (Fig. 4.66) in the user
interface is used to visualise the set reactive current response in a diagram
field and to display applicable actual values, as well as to display and edit
other dynamic grid stabilisation function settings.

11 12 13
10
17
14 15 16
Fig. 4.66: T
ab option “Reactive current response” in menu option “LVRT”
(option: Reactive current response 1 as per TC2007)
Changes as of Fitter 10. This diagram area is used to visualise the set reactive current response
based on the settings in the selection box (1). The horizontal axis here
represents the relevant grid voltage change ∆V / VN in per cent, while the
vertical axis shows the additional reactive current ∆IB / IN in per cent.
The displayed diagram is automatically updated if the k factor (14) or the
dead time (5) is changed.
11. This display is used to show the percentage additional reactive current
∆IB / IN at the current time (in relation to the nominal current of the PVMas-
ter device) used for grid stabilisation in the case of a failure.
12. This display text box is used to display the reactive current value as an
amplitude value before the failure occurs îB0 (minute average value of the
setpoint) in [A].
13. The relevant change in grid voltage can be calculated in relation to the grid
voltage since the input value of the response can be determined in differ-
ent ways and on different bases. This selection box shows the values used
as the basis for the calculation method. Changes via this selection box are
not possible. Each calculation method differs depending on the PVMaster
device variant and the country code used if necessary.
14. The proportion of the additional reactive current infeed, dependent on the
actual relevant grid voltage deviation in percent ∆V / VN, is determined by
the so-called k factor (gradient within the reactive current response). The k
factor is normally selected by the grid operator. The k factor is set via this
configuration text box and is preset at k=2 in the condition as supplied or the
default setting of the PVMaster.

Any change to the k factor in this configuration text box is automatically

reflected in the visualisation of the reactive current response in the diagram
area. In the example (Fig. 4.66, p. 163, response according to TC2007) a
k factor of 2 has been set, and in the second example (Fig. 4.67, response
according to SDLWindV) the k factor is 5.
Fig. 4.67: T
ab option “Reactive current response” in menu option “LVRT”
(option: Reactive current response 2 as per SDLWindV)
Changes as of Expert 15. After a grid voltage drop, the additional reactive current infeed is maintained
according to the reactive current response (for reactive current response
according to TC2007 only), even after the grid voltage returns or the fault is
rectified (grid voltage back in deadband).
The duration for which the additional reactive current infeed is maintained
is set via this configuration text box in [ms]. The value is preset at 500 ms in
the default setting or condition of the PVMaster II as supplied.
16. This configuration text box shows the set value for the time delay of the
setpoint ramp for the additional reactive current in the case of LVRT failure
in [ms]. This configuration box is used for display purposes only. Manual
changes to the setpoint ramp for the additional reactive current are gener-
ally not possible.
17. The percentage additional reactive current is limited according to the type of
error (symmetry or asymmetry errors). The percentage limits concerned are
only displayed via these two configuration text boxes. Manual changes via
this configuration text box are not possible.

18 19
20 24
21 22 23
Fig. 4.68: Tab option “Settings” in menu option “LVRT”

Changes as of Expert 18. During the fault occurrence in the LVRT case, the active and reactive power
can be limited independently of each other. The corresponding limit values
for the active power and reactive power component are displayed via these
configuration text boxes and changed if necessary.
The settings can only be changed from the user level “Expert” up.
19. The percentage asymmetry of the grid voltage (4) is monitored to differenti-
ate between a symmetrical and unsymmetrical grid voltage drop. The per-
centage limit value for differentiating a symmetry from an asymmetry error is
displayed in this configuration text box. Manual changes are not possible.
20. Temporary or feed-in modulation pauses (e.g. immediately after a grid volt-
age drop or grid voltage return for a few ms) are used depending on the PV-
Master device variant and the country code used to initialise the grid moni-
toring and support functions. The method of temporary modulation pauses
used at the current time is shown above this selection box. Manual changes
via this selection text box are not possible.
21. Configuration text box for showing the duration for maintaining the tempo-
rary modulation pause immediately after the grid voltage drop in [ms]. This
configuration box is used for display purposes only. Manual changes via this
configuration text box are not possible.
22. Configuration text box for showing the duration for maintaining the tempo-
rary modulation pause immediately after the grid voltage return in [ms]. This
configuration box is used for display purposes only. Manual changes via this
configuration text box are not possible.

23. Configuration text box for showing the percentage limit for the relevant grid
voltage drop, where temporary modulation pauses are used when the limit
is exceeded during an LVRT event. When the grid voltage drops below this
limit, there are no temporary or feed-modulation pauses. This configuration
box is used for display purposes only. Manual changes via this configuration
text box are not possible.
24. Selection box for showing the enabled mode of the current regulator Dif-
ferent methods of current regulation are used depending on the PVMaster
device version. For example, with the PVMaster III the positive and negative
sequence current are controlled separately, where the negative sequence
current is always regulated to zero in order always to feed symmetrical grid
currents independently of the grid voltage. This selection box is used for dis-
play purposes only. Manual changes via this selection box are not possible.
4.3.4.4 In-/Outputs
as of Fitter This menu sub-group is available as of user level “Fitter” and contains menu
options for displaying and editing the configuration of digital inputs and outputs,
and the analogue and temperature inputs of the device. Freely selectable func-
tions can be assigned to the digital inputs and outputs and the analogue and
temperature inputs. Digital inputs and outputs can be inverted. Low-pass filter
time constants for digital and analogue inputs and the temperature inputs can
be set. The signal type used and the scaling to be used for the analogue inputs
can be freely set. In addition, fan actuation can be configured or general thresh-
old value functions for the digital outputs can be defined and used.
REFERENCE
A description of the available digital inputs and outputs, and analogue inputs of
the PVMaster device, and information about wiring can be found in the rel-
evant PVMaster installation manual.
4.3.4.4.1 Digital inputs

as of Fitter The menu option “Dig. Inputs” in the menu sub-group “In-/Outputs” of the menu
group “Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The user interfaces of
this menu option (Fig. 4.69) are used to display and edit the configurations, and
to display the actual state of the individual digital inputs of the PVMaster device.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 4.69: U
ser interface of the menu option “Dig. Inputs” in the menu sub-
group “In-/Outputs” of the menu group “Configuration”
as of Fitter 1. Display of the assignment numbers for the respective digital inputs of the
NOTE
The number of available digital inputs varies according to the PVMaster device
type.
2. The current physical states of the respective digital inputs are displayed in
these status fields.
3. A logical inversion can be activated in these activation fields for the evalua-
tion of the respective digital inputs.
4. Low-pass filters (Pt1 behaviour) can be activated to filter the states for
evaluation of the individual digital inputs. Activation is implemented by speci-
fying the filter time constant in [ms] in these configuration text boxes. If 0ms
is set, the respective state is evaluated without filtering.
5. The respective assigned functions of the digital inputs are displayed and
configured in these selection boxes. The possible functions of digital inputs
are listed and described in Tab. 4.19, p. 168.
NOTE
The available functions for the digital inputs vary according to the PVMaster
device type.

6. These status fields indicate the respective function state dependent on the
physical state of the respective digital inputs and taking account of any acti-
vated logical inversion and filtering of the signal state.
Tab. 4.19: Possible function assignments of the digital inputs

The digital input does not have a function with
0 No function
this function assignment.
Release of power stage and start of control or
1 Start control 1)
infeed operation.
If this function is used, the input will trigger
the fault state of the device if the signal state
2 External error
is active: Fault ID 10/01 "External error by
digital input", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
If this function is used, a warning signal is
3 External warning issued by the input when the signal state is
active: Warning ID 20
Function that can be activated optionally for
externally implemented acknowledgement of
4 Reset error state device fault states. If there is an active device
fault state, it is immediately acknowledged
with the rising flank of the input signal.
The digital input evaluates the feedback of
the AC main switch or AC load-break switch
switching state (via auxiliary contact) of the
PVMaster device.
The state is shown in status word 1 (no. 3 in
Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
As soon as the AC main switch is switched
on, the internal evaluation of the grid meas-
ured values and the corresponding moni-
5 AC switch 2)
toring as configured in the grid monitoring
functions starts (section 4.3.4.2.3, p. 124).
In addition, any monitoring of the insulation
resistance will only take place when the AC
main switch is switched on (section 4.3.4.2.4,
p. 136).
The activated AC main switch is a necessary
condition for connection and active infeed
operation.
1) This function is only available for specific PVMaster device types.
2) This function is already internally used in all PVMaster device types and is therefore usually
not available for free use.
3) A change to this state constitutes an "unusual event" and is recorded by the integrated
data logger. The retrieval, display and further processing of the "unusual events" that
have occurred can be easily implemented in the menu option "Events" of the menu group
"Diagnosis" (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).


the DC main switch switching state (via auxil-
iary contact) of the PVMaster device.
The state of the DC main switch is shown in
status word 1 (no. 4 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43,
section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
6 DC switch 1)
The activated DC main switch is a necessary
operation. In addition, any monitoring of the
insulation resistance will only take place
when the DC main switch is switched on
(section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136).
Evaluation of a release switch or enclosure
door switch.
The evaluation state of the release switch or
enclosure door switch is shown in status word
1 (no. 5 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1,
p. 41).
The activated signal state is a necessary
7 Release switch 2) condition for connection and active infeed
operation.
The state of this optional external release is
shown in status word 1 (no. 2 in Tab. 4.10,
p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
If this function is used, the active signal state
is a necessary condition for connection and
active infeed operation.
Optional evaluation of an additional external
8 External release
release switch.
Evaluation of the entire internal hardware
release chain.
9 Release signal 2) The activated signal state is a necessary
operation.
the AC main contactor switching state (via
auxiliary contact).
The switching state of the AC main contactor
10 Main contactor AC 2) is shown in status word 1 (no. 13 in Tab. 4.10,
p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
Switching of the AC main contactor is a nec-
essary condition for active infeed operation
(MPP tracking).


The digital input evaluates the feedback of a
2nd main contactor switching state (via auxil-
iary contact).
The switching state of the 2nd main contac-
Main contactor 2 tor, if present, is shown in status word 1 (no.
11
feedback 1) 14 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1,
p. 41).
If this function is used, the switched 2nd main
contactor is a necessary condition for active
infeed operation (MPP tracking).
The digital input evaluates the feedback from
overvoltage protection elements (DC and/or
AC overvoltage protection).
12 Overvoltage protection 2) The input triggers the fault state of the device
if the signal state is active: Fault ID 10/03
"External overvoltage error", see Tab. 4.31,
p. 224
The digital input evaluates the feedback of an
insulation monitor (section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136)
(warning threshold and condition for start of
infeed operation).
The evaluation of the insulation monitor
Insulation monitoring feedback signal is shown in status word 1
13
(warning) 1) (no. 10 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, section 4.3.2.1,
p. 41).
If this function is used, the positive feedback
of the insulation monitor is a necessary condi-
tion for connection and active infeed opera-
tion.
Insulation monitoring
14 insulation monitor (section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136)
(error) 1)
(monitoring in active infeed operation).
Combination of functions 13 and 14.
I.e. the signal of the digital input is used both
15 Insulation monitoring 1)
to test the connection condition and to moni-
tor the enabled grid mode.
Evaluation of an RCM module feedback.
The input triggers the fault state of the device
16 RCM (error) 1) if the signal state is active: Fault ID 19/01
from "Residual current monitor", see Tab.
4.31, p. 224
RCM module at a higher level than the device
17 RCM (global warning) 1) network.
The input issues a warning message if the
signal state is active: Warning ID 23.


RCM module at a higher level than the device
network.
18 RCM (global error) 1) The input triggers the fault state of the device
from "Global residual current monitor", see
Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Evaluation of an external GFDI module feed-
back.
The input triggers the fault state of the device
19 GFDI error
from "Ground fault current to high(GFDI) or
blown fuse", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Optional evaluation of feedback from external
grid monitoring.
If this function is used, the state is shown
in status word 1 (nos. 8 and 9 in Tab. 4.10,
20 External grid monitoring
p. 43, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). The input
triggers the device fault state if the signal
state is inactive: Fault ID 10/15 from "External
grid error", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Optional feedback evaluation of higher level
low voltage switchgear switching state (e.g. of
a power switch).
The state of this optional evaluation is shown
in status word 1 (no. 1 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43,
section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
21 LVS switching state
active infeed operation. The input triggers the
fault state of the device if the signal state is
inactive: Fault ID 10/08 from "External error
LVS switch", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Optional evaluation of feedback from over-
voltage protection of a low voltage switch-
gear.
LVS overvoltage protec-
22 If this function is used, the input will trigger
tion
is active: Fault ID 10/07 from "External error
LVS overvoltage", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Optional evaluation of feedback from overcur-
rent protection of a low voltage switchgear.
LVS overcurrent protec- If this function is used, the input will trigger
23
tion the fault state of the device if the signal state
is active: Fault ID 10/10 from "External error
LVS overcurrent", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224


Optional evaluation of feedback from overcur-
rent protection of a low voltage switchgear.
24 LVS fuse state
is inactive: Fault ID 10/09 from "External error
LVS fuse", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Optional feedback evaluation of higher level
medium voltage switchgear switching state
(e.g. of a power switch).
The state of this optional evaluation is shown
in status word 1 (no. 2 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43,
section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
25 MVS switching state
active infeed operation. The input triggers the
fault state of the device if the signal state is
inactive: Fault ID 10/11 from "External error
MVS switch", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
transformer monitoring (e.g. Buchholz relay).
26 Transformer state
Transformer", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Signal 1 for setpoint specification of active
Limit in percent (e.g. by grid operator) as part
of infeed/grid security management via digital
27 Power reduction signal 1 3) inputs (see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
The state of the signal is shown in status
word 3 (no. 9 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, sec-
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).


tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
Signal 1 for optional function for controlled
“Derating” of the AC active power available
for activation (see section 4.3.4.8, p. 217).
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
Optional function available for activation for
the evaluation of S0 pulses from an en-
34 S0 interface ergy consumption meter (section 4.3.4.2.2,
p. 118) to count the energy fed in or the
energy achieved by the PVMaster device.
Optional function available for activation for
the evaluation of S0 pulses from an en-
ergy consumption meter (section 4.3.4.2.2,
35 S0 interface (total plant)
p. 118) to count the energy fed in or the
energy achieved by the entire device network
(total system).
fuse protection.
36 Fuse state
is active: Fault ID 10/04 from "External fuse
error", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224


Optional evaluation of feedback from coolant
pressure monitoring.
37 Water pressure 3)
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
issued by the input when the signal state is
Optional evaluation of feedback from active
tracking system monitoring.
38 Tracking system 3)
tion 4.3.2.1, p. 41).
issued by the input when the signal state is
Signal 1 for setpoint specification for reactive
power control (e.g. by grid operator) as part
39 Reactive power signal 1
of static grid voltage stabilisation via digital
inputs (see section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
grid protection unit.
43 Grid protection device
grid protection", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
Q-U protection relay.
44 Q-V protection device
QV relais", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224


Optional evaluation of feedback from Tem-
perature Ext. monitoring (e.g. Klixon).
External temperature
45 the fault state of the device if the signal state
monitoring
is inactive: Fault ID 06/08 from "Overtempera-
ture detected (thermal element)", see Tab.
4.31, p. 224
motor protection relay.
46 Motor protection
is inactive: Fault ID 10/05 from "Motor protec-
tion switch error", see Tab. 4.31, p. 224
With this function assignment, functions 27
and 39 are used in combination. I.e. the
signal is used simultaneously for the set-
NSM + Q control
60 point input of the active power limit as part of
Signal 1 3)
infeed/grid safety management and reactive
power control as part of static grid voltage
stabilisation.
NSM + Q control
Signal 2 3)
stabilisation.
NSM + Q control
Signal 3 3)
stabilisation.
NSM + Q control
Signal 4 3)
stabilisation.

4.3.4.4.2 Digital outputs

as of Fitter The menu option “Dig. Outputs” in the menu sub-group “In-/Outputs” of the
menu group “Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The user inter-
faces of this menu option (Fig. 4.70, p. 176) are used to display and edit the
configurations, and to display the actual state of the individual digital outputs of
the PVMaster device.
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.70: U
ser interface of the menu option “Dig. Outputs” in the menu sub-
group “In-/Outputs” of the menu group “Configuration”
as of Fitter The first tab option “Mapping” (Fig. 4.70) is used to display and edit the configu-
ration of the respective digital outputs, and to display the actual states.
1. Display of the assignment numbers for the respective digital outputs of the
NOTE
The number of available digital outputs varies according to the PVMaster
device type.
2. The respective assigned functions of the digital outputs are displayed and
configured in these selection boxes. Selecting a predefined function in these
selection boxes initialises the corresponding values for the linking or map-
ping of the respective digital inputs and displays them in the corresponding
configuration text boxes (3). The predefined functions of digital outputs are
described in Tab. 4.20, p. 177.

3. In general, the digital outputs can be switched dependent on the states of all
parameters and display values of the PVMaster device. The necessary link-
ing or mapping of the digital outputs with the required parameters or display
values is implemented by specifying the ID and Sub-ID, and by specifying
the bits of the required parameters to be used. The ID, Sub-ID and bit num-
ber for the linking or mapping are displayed in these three configuration text
boxes. The corresponding values for the linking or mapping are initialised
and displayed in these configuration text boxes following the selection of a
predefined function in the selection boxes (2).
as of Expert The linking or mapping of digital outputs by specifying the ID, Sub-ID and
bit number can also be implemented manually via these configuration text
boxes as of user level “Expert”. To do this, the element “User-defined” must
first be selected in the selection box (2) so that the configuration text boxes
can be released for inputs.
as of Fitter 4. A logical inversion of the respective digital outputs can be activated in these
activation fields.
5. These status fields display the actual switching state of the respective digital
outputs, taking into account the applicable activated logical inversion, if
present.
Tab. 4.20: Predefined functions for digital outputs

Parameters
Function Sub- Description
ID Bit
ID
No function - - - The digital output has no function.
The linking or mapping of the
digital output is implemented by
User-defined - - -
manual specification (as of user
level "Expert").
Signal of 1st configurable func-
Fan control signal 1 181 0 0 tion for fan actuation (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 2nd configurable func-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 3rd configurable func-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 4th configurable func-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 1st configurable func-
tion for actuation of coolers,
Cooling control signal 1 193 0 0
heat exchangers, etc. (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 2nd configurable func-
tion for actuation of coolers,
Cooling control signal 2 193 0 1
heat exchangers, etc. (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.1, p. 179).
Signal of 1st freely configurable
Threshold function 1 163 0 0 threshold function (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).

Parameters
ID Bit
ID
Signal of 2nd freely configurable
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
Signal of 3rd freely configurable
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
Signal of 4th freely configurable
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
tion 4.3.4.4.2.2, p. 184).
Error active 91 0 3 Message "Device in fault state"
Message "Power stage or infeed
Inverter active 91 0 8
operation active"
Warning 91 0 9 ...a warning has been signalled
Feedback of 1st signal for set-
point specification of active Limit
in percent (e.g. by grid operator)
Power reduction state 1 575 0 0
as part of infeed/grid security
management via digital inputs
(see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Feedback of 2nd signal for set-
(see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Feedback of 3rd signal for set-
(see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Feedback of 4th signal for set-
(see section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).

Parameters
ID Bit
ID
Feedback of 1st signal for set-
point specification for reactive
Reactive power control power control (e.g. by grid opera-
580 0 0
state 1 tor) as part of static grid voltage
stabilisation via digital inputs (see
section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
Feedback of 2nd signal for set-
580 0 1
section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
Feedback of 3rd signal for set-
580 0 2
section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
Feedback of 4th signal for set-
580 0 3
section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
4.3.4.4.2.1 Fan and cooler control

as of Fitter The second tab option “Fan and cooler control” (Fig. 4.71, p. 180) is used to
display and edit the configuration of the freely adjustable functions for control-
ling the fans, heat exchanges and coolers or coolant pumps, and to display
their actual state. The respective states can be mapped to digital outputs (sec-
tion 4.3.4.4.2, p. 176) in order to realise the appropriate control.
In addition, the states of the individual functions for controlling fans, heat ex-
changers, coolers and coolant pumps are displayed in status word 1 (nos. 16
to 21 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). All state changes of
these control functions are therefore recorded by the integrated (state) data log-
ger (see section 4.3.5.3, p. 231).
The display of the states of the functions for controlling fans and heat exchang-
ers is also available in the corresponding symbol on the start user interface
“Overview” (section 4.3.1, p. 39).
Up to five freely selectable parameter values (e.g. temperature measurement
values) and the corresponding, freely selectable switch on/off threshold values
can be monitored for each function for controlling the fans, heat exchang-
ers, coolers and coolant pumps. The corresponding state of the functions is
activated as soon as at least one monitored (temperature) value exceeds the
corresponding switch-on threshold value. The state becomes inactive only once
all monitored (temperature) values drop below the corresponding switch off
thresholds.

12
7 8 9 10 11
13
19
14 15 16 17 18
Fig. 4.71: Tab option “Fan and cooler control” in the menu option “Dig. Outputs”
as of Fitter The upper section of the tab option “Fan and cooler control” (Fig. 4.71) is used
to display and edit the functions for controlling fans and heat exchangers.
6. This selection box is used to select one of the four available functions for
controlling the fans and heat exchangers. Elements (7) to (12) are used to
display and edit, where necessary, the configurations, and to display the
monitored actual (temperature) values and the state of the selected func-
tion.
NOTE
Some functions used to control fans and heat exchangers are already used as
standard internally (e.g. to control the fan inside the enclosure). The number of
freely available and configurable functions for controlling fans and heat ex-
changers is therefore dependent on the PVMaster device type.
If internal functions are reserved for controlling fans and heat exchangers,
the settings cannot be edited and entries cannot be made in the corre-
sponding configuration text boxes. The availability of a freely configurable
function for controlling fans and heat exchangers is displayed after selection
in the selection box in the activation field next to the selection box.
7. The ID and Sub-ID of the respective (display) parameters to be monitored
are displayed here in configuration text boxes.
If the element “User-defined” is selected in the selection box (8), then the
configuration text boxes are released for input and the (display) parameters
to be monitored can be selected manually by inputting the ID and Sub-ID in
the configuration text boxes.
8. The selection box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the respec-
tive (display) parameters to be monitored. The (predefined) parameters

available in the selection box are listed in Tab. 4.21, p. 182. Alternatively,
the element “User-defined” can be selected and the (display) parameters to
be monitored can be selected manually in the configuration text boxes (7).
9. The (temperature) values selected for monitoring are displayed here in dis-
play text boxes for those functions selected in the selection box (6).
the switch-on threshold value of the monitored (temperature) values for the
functions selected in the selection box (6). If at least one monitored (temper-
ature) value exceeds the set switch-on value, then the state of the function
for controlling the fans and heat exchangers becomes active.
the switch-off threshold value of the monitored (temperature) values for the
functions selected in the selection box (6). Once all monitored (temperature)
values exceed the respective set switch-off values, then the state of the
function for controlling the fans and heat exchangers becomes inactive.
12. This status field displays the actual state of the function selected in the
selection box (6) for controlling the fans and heat exchangers. The state
becomes active as soon as at least one of the up to five monitored (tem-
perature) values exceeds the corresponding switch-on threshold value (10).
The state becomes inactive only once all monitored (temperature) values
drop below the corresponding switch-off thresholds (11).
The display of the four states of the functions for controlling fans and heat
exchangers is also available in the corresponding symbol on the start user
interface “Overview” (section 4.3.1, p. 39) and in status word 1 (nos. 16 to
19 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43, see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). All state changes are
recorded by the integrated (state) data logger (see section 4.3.5.3, p. 231).
as of Fitter The lower section of the tab option “Fan and cooler control” (Fig. 4.71, p. 180)
is used to display and edit the functions for controlling coolers and coolant
pumps.
13. This selection box is used to select one of the two available functions for
controlling the coolers and coolant pumps. Elements (14) to (19) are used
to display and edit, where necessary, the configurations, and to display the
monitored actual (temperature) values and the state of the selected func-
tion.
NOTE
Functions may already be used as standard internally for controlling coolers
and coolant pumps, dependent on the PVMaster device type.
If internal functions are reserved for controlling coolers and coolant pumps,
the settings cannot be edited and entries cannot be made in the corre-
sponding configuration text boxes. The availability of a freely configurable
function for controlling coolers and coolant pumps is displayed after selec-
tion in the selection box in the activation field next to the selection box.
14. The ID and Sub-ID of the respective (display) parameters to be monitored
are displayed here in configuration text boxes.

16. The (temperature) values selected for monitoring are displayed here in dis-
play text boxes for those functions selected in the selection box (13).
the switch-on threshold value of the monitored (temperature) values for
the functions selected in the selection box (13). If at least one monitored
(temperature) value exceeds the set switch-on value, then the state of the
function for controlling the coolers and coolant pumps becomes active.
the switch-off threshold value of the monitored (temperature) values for the
functions selected in the selection box (13). Once all monitored (tempera-
ture) values exceed the respective set switch-off values, then the state of
the function for controlling the coolers and coolant pumps becomes inactive.
19. This status field displays the actual state of the function selected in the
selection box (13) for controlling the coolers and coolant pumps. The state
becomes active as soon as at least one of the up to five monitored (tem-
perature) values exceeds the corresponding switch-on threshold value (17).
The state becomes inactive only once all monitored (temperature) values
drop below the corresponding switch-off thresholds (18).
The two states of the functions for controlling coolers and coolant pumps
are also displayed in status word 1 (nos. 20 and 21 in Tab. 4.10, p. 43,
see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). All state changes are recorded by the inte-
grated (state) data logger (see section 4.3.5.3, p. 231).
Tab. 4.21: Predefined monitoring values for the fan and cooler control
Parameters
Value / Parameter Description
ID Sub-ID
No function - - -
The (display) parameter to be
monitored is selected manually
User-defined - -
by specifying the ID and Sub-ID
of the parameter.
Temperature of the filter chokes
Temperature choke
553 0 in [°C], measured via a PT100
(PT100)
input of the device
Temperature of the transformer in
Temperature transformer
553 1 [°C], measured via a PT100 input
(PT100)
of the device
Temperature inside the enclosure
Temperature cabinet
(PT100)
input of the device
Temperature Ext. in [°C], meas-
Temperature external
553 3 ured via a PT100 input of the
(PT100)
device
Module temperature 1 in [°C]
Temperature pv-module 1
553 4 measured via an analogue input
(ana. input)
of the device.
(ana. input)
of the device.
Temperature Ext. 1 in [°C] meas-
Temperature external 1
553 6 ured via an analogue input of the
(ana. input)
device.

Parameters
Value / Parameter Description
ID Sub-ID
Temperature Ext. 2 in [°C] meas-
Temperature external 2
553 7 ured via an analogue input of the
(ana. input)
device.
Temperature of transformer envi-
Temperature of transform-
553 8 ronment in [°C], measured via a
er environment (PT100)
PT100 input on the device
Temperature of enclosure envi-
Temperature of enclosure
environment (PT100)
Temperature of the interior of the
Temperature of station
553 10 station in [°C], measured via a
interior (PT 100)
Outside temperature in [°C],
Outside temperature
553 11 measured via a PT100 input on
(PT100)
the device
Temperature inside Main Com-
Temperature of Main
553 12 biner Box 1 in [°C], measured via
Combiner Box 1 (PT100)
a PT100 input on the device
Temperature of Main
553 13 biner Box 2 in [°C] , measured via
Temperature of Main
553 14 biner box 3 [°C] in, measured via
Temperature of Main
553 15 biner Box 4 in [°C], measured via
Temperature measurement value
Temperature PTx1 552 0 of 1st PT100 input of the device
in [°C]
Temperature PTx2 552 1 of 2nd PT100 input of the device
in [°C]
Temperature PTx3 552 2 of 3rd PT100 input of the device
in [°C]
Temperature powerstage Temperature of power stage heat
550 0
heatsink sink in [°C]
Temperature of link ca- Temperature of the DC capacitor
550 1
pacitor (PT100) of the power stage in [°C]
Temperature powerstage Temperature of device interior in
551 0
interior [°C]

4.3.4.4.2.2 Threshold function

as of Fitter The third tab option “Threshold function” (Fig. 4.72, p. 184) is used to display
and edit the configuration of the freely configurable threshold functions, and to
display the actual states. The respective states can be mapped to digital outputs
(section 4.3.4.4.2, p. 176).
In total, up to eight threshold functions can be defined in order to monitor (dis-
play) parameter values with freely configurable switch on/off threshold values.
The corresponding state of the functions is activated as soon as the monitored
value exceeds the corresponding switch-on threshold value. The state becomes
inactive only once the monitored value drops below the corresponding switch-
off threshold.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Fig. 4.72: Tab option “Threshold function” in the menu option “Dig. Outputs”
20. Display of the assignment numbers for the respective freely configurable
threshold functions in display text boxes.
NOTE
Threshold functions may already be used as standard internally, dependent on
the PVMaster device type. Reserved threshold functions cannot be changed.
The releases for the respective freely available threshold functions are dis-
played in the activation fields next to the assignment numbers.
21. The ID and Sub-ID of the respective parameters to be monitored are dis-
played here in configuration text boxes.
23. The actual values of the monitored (display) parameters are shown here in
display text boxes.
24. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit, where neces-
sary, the switch-on thresholds of the respective threshold functions. If the
monitored value of a set switch-on threshold is exceeded, then the state of
that threshold function becomes active.

25. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit, where neces-
sary, the switch-off thresholds of the respective threshold functions. If the
monitored value drops below the set switch-off threshold, then the state of
that threshold function becomes inactive again.
26. These status fields display the actual states of the respective threshold
functions. The corresponding state is activated as soon the monitored value
exceeds the corresponding switch-on threshold value (24). The state be-
comes inactive only once the monitored value drops below the correspond-
ing switch-off threshold (25).
Tab. 4.22: Predefined monitoring values for the threshold functions

Parameters
Value / Parameter Sub- Description
ID
ID
No function - - -
The parameter to be monitored
is selected manually by speci-
User-defined - -
fying the ID and Sub-ID of the
parameter.
DC voltage [V] 512 0 DC generator voltage in [V]
Actual asymmetry of voltages
in the link in [V]. This value is
DC voltage asymmetry [V] 509 0
not available on all PVMaster
device versions.
DC current [A] 513 0 DC generator current in [A]
DC power [W] 514 0 DC generator power in [W]
Linked grid voltage as average
AC voltage [V] 536 0 value for the three linked grid
voltages in [V]
Average value of the grid cur-
AC current [A] 537 0
rents for the three phases in [A]
Total active power as a sum of
AC power [W] 539 0 the three phase active powers
in [W]
Power factor as an average
Power factor 541 0 value for the power factors for
all three phases
Total reactive power as a sum
Reactive power [VAr] 540 0 of the three phase reactive
powers in [VAr]
Grid frequency [Hz] 520 0 Grid frequency in [Hz]
Solar radiation G1 via an ana-
Irradiation 1 [W/m²] 556 0 logue input of the PVMaster in
[W/m²]
Solar radiation G2 via an ana-
Irradiation 2 [W/m²] 556 1 logue input of the PVMaster in
[W/m²]
Insulation resistance or ground-
Insulation resistance [kOhm] 565 0
ing resistance in [kOhm]
Total apparent power as a sum
Apparent power [VA] 538 0 of the three phase apparent
powers in [VA]

Parameters
ID
ID
Maximum possible device
current in [A] taking into ac-
count whether temperature-de-
Max. grid current [A] 542 0
pendent current limitation and
apparent Limit are active (see
section 4.3.2.4.3, p. 65).
Total active power of the device
Active power load [%] 543 0 in relation to the maximum pos-
sible active power in [%]
Maximum possible active
power in [%] taking into account
whether any functional active
Limit functions are active and
whether the grid voltage is low,
Max. active power [%] 546 0 with the resulting reduction of
the maximum possible active
power of the PVMaster device
based on the device rated cur-
rent. (See section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65).
GFDI error current [mA] 568 0 Ground fault current in [mA]
RCM error current [mA] 570 0 Fault current in [mA]
Decimal values for signal states
of digital inputs used for set-
Power reduction digital sig- point specification of the active
575 0
nals Limit as part of infeed/grid
security management (NSM)
(section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Analogue value in [%] for ana-
logue input used for setpoint
Power reduction analog specification of the active Limit
576 0
signal as part of infeed/grid security
management (NSM) (sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Maximum percentage value for
active power of device as part
Power reduction Pac-limit [%] 545 2 of power supply security and
infeed management (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141).
Percentage active Limit of
Frequency stabilisation Pac- device as part of static fre-
545 3
limit [%] quency stabilisation (see sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.2, p. 156)
Decimal values for signal
states for digital inputs used
for setpoint specification of the
Q control digital signals 580 0
reactive power control as part of
static grid voltage stabilisation
(section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).

Parameters
ID
ID
Analogue value in [%] for ana-
logue input used for setpoint
specification of the reactive
Q control analogue signal [%] 581 0
power control as part of static
grid voltage stabilisation (sec-
tion 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
Setpoint specification for reac-
tive power control as part of
Q control reference value 582 0
static grid voltage stabilisation
(section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147).
Temperature of the filter chokes
Temperature choke (PT100) 553 0 in [°C], measured via a PT100
input on the device
Temperature of the transformer
Temperature transformer
(PT100)
input of the device
Temperature inside the enclo-
Temperature cabinet (PT100) 553 2 sure in [°C], measured via a
PT100 input of the device
Temperature Ext. in [°C], meas-
Temperature External
553 3 ured via a PT100 input of the
(PT100)
device
(ana. input)
of the device.
(ana. input)
of the device.
Temperature Ext. 1 in [°C]
Temperature external 1 (ana.
input)
of the device.
Temperature Ext. 2 in [°C]
Temperature external 2 (ana.
input)
of the device.
Temperature of transformer en-
Temperature of transformer
553 8 vironment in [°C], measured via
environment (PT100)
Temperature of enclosure envi-
Temperature of enclosure
environment (PT100)
Temperature of the interior of
Temperature of station inte-
553 10 the station in [°C], measured via
rior (PT 100)
Outside temperature in [°C],
Outside temperature (PT100) 553 11 measured via a PT100 input on
the device
Temperature of Main Com-
553 12 biner Box 1 in [°C], measured
biner Box 1 (PT100)
via a PT100 input on the device
553 13 biner Box 2 in [°C] , measured
biner Box 2 (PT100)

Parameters
ID
ID
553 14 biner box 3 [°C] in, measured
biner Box 3 (PT100)
553 15 biner Box 4 in [°C], measured
biner Box 4 (PT100)
Temperature measurement
Temperature PTx1 552 0 value of 1st PT100 input of the
device in [°C]
Temperature PTx2 552 1 value of 2nd PT100 input of the
device in [°C]
Temperature PTx3 552 2 value of 3rd PT100 input of the
device in [°C]
Temperature powerstage Temperature of power stage
550 0
heatsink heat sink in [°C]
Temperature of link capacitor Temperature of the DC capaci-
550 1
(PT100) tor of the power stage in [°C]
Temperature powerstage Temperature of device interior
551 0
interior in [°C]

4.3.4.4.3 Analogue inputs

as of Fitter The menu option “Ana. Inputs” in the menu sub-group “In-/Outputs” of the menu
group “Configuration” is available as of user level “Fitter”. The user interfaces of
this menu option (Fig. 4.73) are used to display and edit the configurations, and
to display the actual states of the individual analogue inputs and temperature
inputs (PT100 inputs) of the PVMaster device.
1 2 3 4 6
Fig. 4.73: U
ser interface of the “Ana. Inputs” option in the menu sub-group “In-/
Outputs” of the menu group “Configuration”
as of Fitter The first tab option “Ana. Inputs” (Fig. 4.73) is used to display and edit the con-
figuration of the respective analogue inputs, and to display the actual measured
values.
1. Display of the assignment numbers for the respective analogue inputs of the
NOTE
The number of available analogue inputs varies according to the PVMaster
device type.
2. These display text boxes are used to display the actual raw measured val-
ues of the respective analogue inputs with the physical unit selected accord-
ing to the signal type set in the selection box (3).

3. This selection box is used to select the signal type of the signal being meas-
ured by the respective analogue inputs. The respective analogue inputs
in the PVMaster can measure either voltage (+/-10V or 0..10V) or current
signals (0..20mA or 4..20mA). If “4..20mA” is set in the respective selection
box, wire breakage detection is also implemented.
REFERENCE
The applicable instructions in the relevant PVMaster installation manual must
be complied with, dependent on the signal type to be evaluated via the ana-
logue inputs of the PVMaster device.
4. Low-pass filters (Pt1 behaviour) can be activated to filter the analogue
signals for evaluation of the individual analogue inputs. Activation is imple-
mented by specifying the filter time constant in [ms] in these configuration
text boxes. If 0ms is set, the respective analogue signal is evaluated without
filtering.
5. The respective assigned functions of the analogue inputs are displayed and
configured in these selection boxes. The possible functions of analogue
inputs are listed and described in Tab. 4.23, p. 190.
NOTE
The available functions for the analogue inputs vary according to the PVMas-
ter device type.
The configuration text boxes are used to scale the analogue values by spec-
ifying an offset value at 0% of the analogue signal and by specifying the end
value at 100% of the analogue signal.
6. These display text boxes show the respective analogue function value with
the unit of the function selected in the selection box (5). The display takes
into account the applicable filter time set and the scaling of the analogue
signal.
Tab. 4.23: Possible function assignments of the analogue inputs

The analogue input does not have a function
0 No function
with this function assignment.
Evaluation of the analogue signal of an ex-
1 RCM signal 1) ternal RCM module to display and evaluate
the fault current
Evaluation of the analogue signal of an ex-
2 GFDI current ternal GFDI module to display and evaluate
the ground fault current
Evaluation of the analogue signal of an
insulation measurement to display, evaluate
3 Insulation measurement 2)
and monitor the insulation resistance (see
section 4.3.4.2.4, p. 136)
Evaluation of the analogue signal for specify-
ing the active Limit by the grid operator as
4 Power reduction control
part of infeed/grid security management (see
section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141)
Evaluation of the analogue signal for specify-
ing the reactive power control setpoints as
5 Reactive power control
part of infeed/grid security management (see
section 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147)
2) This function is already internally used in many PVMaster device types and is therefore
usually not available for free use.


Optional evaluation of the analogue signal
output by an irradiation sensor to display the
irradiation value G1
The actual measured value is then displayed
in the user interface of the menu option "DC
6 Irradiation G1
values" (section 4.3.2.3.1, p. 52).
The measured values are recorded by de-
fault by the integrated data logger and can
be called up via the diagram generator (sec-
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
output by an irradiation sensor to display the
irradiation value G2
7 Irradiation G2
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
of a wind speed measurement to display the
wind speed V1
8 Wind speed V1
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
of a wind speed measurement to display the
wind speed V2
9 Wind speed V2
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
Optional evaluation of the analogue signal of
a wind direction measurement to display the
wind direction D1
10 Wind direction D1
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)


a wind direction measurement to display the
wind direction D2
11 Wind direction D2
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
of a module temperature measurement to
display the module temperature M1
12 Module temperature M1
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
of a module temperature measurement to
display the module temperature M2
13 Module temperature M2
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
an Temperature Ext. measurement to display
the Temperature Ext. ext.1
in the user interface of the menu option
14 Temperature ext.1
"Temperatures" (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
an Temperature Ext. measurement to display
the Temperature Ext. ext.2
in the user interface of the menu option
15 Temperature ext.2
"Temperatures" (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
tion 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)

4.3.4.4.3.1 Temperature inputs (PT100)

as of Fitter The second tab option “Temperature inputs (PT100)” (Fig. 4.74) is used to
display and edit the configuration of the respective temperature inputs (PT100),
and to display the actual measured values.
NOTE
The number of available temperature inputs varies according to the PVMaster
device type.
7 8 9 10
Fig. 4.74: T
ab option “Temperature inputs (PT100)” in the menu option “Ana.
Inputs”
7. Display of the assignment numbers for the respective temperature inputs of
the PVMaster device in display text boxes.
8. Low-pass filters (Pt1 behaviour) can be activated to filter the temperature
measurement values for evaluation of the individual temperature inputs. Ac-
tivation is implemented by specifying the filter time constant in [ms] in these
configuration text boxes. If 0ms is set, the respective temperature measure-
ment value is evaluated without filtering.
9. The respective assigned functions of the temperature inputs are displayed
and configured in these selection boxes. The possible functions of the tem-
perature inputs are listed and described in Tab. 4.24, p. 194.
NOTE
The available functions for the temperature inputs vary according to the PV-
Master device type.
10. These display text boxes shown the respective temperature measurement
values in [°C]. The display takes into account the applicable set filter time.

Tab. 4.24: Possible function assignment of the temperature inputs

The temperature input does not have a function
0 No function
with this function assignment.
Temperature measurement of filter chokes in [°C]
The actual measured value is displayed in the
user interface of the menu option "Temperatures"
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
If the values obtained from this temperature
measurement are elevated, a temperature-
dependent reduction of the actual device current
(derating) takes place to protect components
inside the device and the filter choke against
1 Filter choke 1) overheating.
If the temperature of the filter choke is extremely
high, it is possible that the device will be deac-
tivated and the corresponding fault state will be
triggered (ID 06/04, Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
The measured values are recorded by default
by the integrated data logger and can be called
up via the diagram generator (section 4.3.3.1.1,
p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
2) For PVMaster devices with an integrated low-voltage transformer (TT series) or external
low-voltage transformer (EN series), the transformer temperature is normally measured via a
PT100 input. This function is therefore not freely available for use in these device types.
3) The temperature sensor required for this is available in each PVMaster as standard and is
evaluated via a PT100 input on the device. The corresponding PT100 input of the device
is assigned this function as standard for this purpose. There is also the option of using this
PT100 input to measure another temperature if the number of free PT100 inputs is not
sufficient for temperature measurements required by the user.


Measurement of the transformer temperature
(low-voltage transformer for TT and EN device
series, external medium voltage transformer for
EM device series) in [°C].
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
If the values obtained from this temperature
measurement are elevated, a temperature-
(derating) takes place to protect components
inside the device and the transformer against
overheating.
If the temperature of the transformer is extremely
high, it is possible that the device will be deac-
2 Transformer 2) tivated and the corresponding fault state will be
triggered (ID 06/05, Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see sec-
tion 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
The value for the transformer temperature
must be measured via a PT100 input (or via
InterCOM device intercommunication, see sec-
tion 4.3.4.5.2, p. 206) in order for the value and,
where applicable, the requisite temperature-
(derating) to be monitored or for excess tem-
perature shutdown.
The measured transformer temperature values
are recorded by default by the integrated data
logger and can be called up via the diagram
generator (section 4.3.3.1.1, p. 86, Tab. 4.14,
p. 91)
Optional measurement of ambient temperature
in the PVMaster enclosure in [°C].
3 Cabinet 3) (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)


Optional measurement of an Temperature Ext. in
[°C]
4 External (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
p. 86, Tab. 4.14, p. 91)
Optional measurement of the transformer ambi-
ent temperature (e.g. transformer cell in station)
in [°C].
5 Transformer ambient (section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
The measured values can be recorded as a
"user-defined signal" by the integrated data log-
ger so that they can be called up via the diagram
p. 92)
Optional measurement of the enclosure ambient
temperature in [°C]
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
6 Cabinet ambient
p. 92)
Optional measurement of the station interior
temperature in [°C]
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
7 Station interior
p. 92)


Optional measurement of the Temperature Ext.
in [°C]
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
8 Outdoor temperature
p. 92)
Optional measurement of the temperature inside
the 1st "Main Combiner Box" in [°C].
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
9 Main Combiner Box 1
p. 92)
the 2nd "Main Combiner Box" in [°C].
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
p. 92)
the 3rd "Main Combiner Box" in [°C].
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
p. 92)


the 4th "Main Combiner Box" in [°C].
(section 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
p. 92)
as of Fitter 4.3.4.5 InterCOM

InterCOM communication is used for intercommunication between several PV-
Master devices within a local device network (e.g. within a PVMaster station).
An InterCOM device network can consist of up to ten PVMaster devices (Inter-
COM nodes).
REFERENCE
A description of the physical InterCOM interface of the device, and important
information about the connection of the device intercommunication, can be
found in the corresponding PVMaster installation manual.
Tab. 4.25: Functions of the InterCOM device intercommunication

Function Description
When several PVMaster devices are operated in
one grid node point, the synchronisation function
of the InterCOM device intercommunication should
be used to optimise the quality of the current
Synchronisation 1)
fed into the grid. Harmonics in the grid-side total
current (particularly in high switching area) are
reduced and thus negative interactions in the grid
voltage are minimised.
The InterCOM device intercommunication includes
functions for determining, displaying and optimally
Plant Limit
coordinating the reduction of the total apparent and
active power in the local InterCOM device network.
For optimal utilisation of the existing input and
output interfaces in each PVMaster device, or to
reduce cable outlay, signals and function states
Distribution of input and
within the local device network can be sent to the
output functions
respective devices via the InterCOM device inter-
communication. Various communication objects
can be optionally activated here.
1) See warning

The so-called "Single MPPT mode" is a special
function in the InterCOM device intercommuni-
cation and enables parallel operation of several
PVMaster devices (AC and DC side, without
Special operation modes galvanic isolation). In this infeed operation mode,
the number of connected PVMaster devices var-
ies according to the currently available generator
power in order to optimise the total efficiency of the
local device network.
The coordination of delayed connection of several
PVMaster devices within the local InterCOM device
network is implemented via the InterCOM device
Other points
intercommunication. This connection delay pre-
vents unnecessarily high negative feedback in the
supply network due to switching operations.
1) See warning
ATTENTION
When using several PVMaster devices for the low-voltage windings of a com-
mon transformer with structurally-related unfavourable properties, synchroni-
sation may be essential.
as of Fitter The user interface of the menu option “InterCOM” within the menu group “Con-
figuration” is used for the activation and configuration of the InterCOM device
intercommunication.

The upper section of the user interface (Fig. 4.75) is used to display and edit the
operation mode of the intercommunication (1), the communication configuration
(node ID (2), Master/Slave mode (3) and baud rate (4)).
1 2 3
5 6 7 8
Fig. 4.75: U
ser interface of the menu option “InterCOM” in the menu group
“Configuration”

as of Fitter 1. The operation mode of the InterCOM device intercommunication is set via
the displayed option field. After the operation mode has been changed, the
new setting must be saved (section 4.2.7, p. 26) and a device restart
(section 4.2.8, p. 26) implemented.
Tab. 4.26: InterCOM device intercommunication operation modes

Option Description
The InterCOM device intercommunication is
not used and is fully deactivated. If this option
is selected in the option field, then all the other
0 InterCOM not used
control elements are hidden in the "InterCOM"
user interface. This operation mode is used,
e.g. when operating a single PVMaster device.
The InterCOM device intercommunication
is in use. The controlled synchronisation of
InterCOM nodes is not implemented in this
InterCOM operation mode. In this case, it is
also not possible to use the special infeed op-
eration mode "Single MPPT mode". All other
1 InterCOM active
functions in Tab. 4.25, p. 198 are otherwise
available. If this option is selected in the option
field, then the corresponding control elements
for display and configuration of the synchroni-
sation are hidden. In addition, the tab option
"InterCOM Sync" is not available in this case.
The InterCOM device intercommunication is
used and the controlled synchronisation of the
InterCOM + synchronisa-
2 InterCOM nodes is also implemented in this
tion
InterCOM mode. All functions in Tab. 4.25,
p. 198 are available.
NOTE
All InterCOM nodes in a local InterCOM device network must have an identical
InterCOM mode configuration.
NOTE
The "InterCOM + synchronisation" mode must always be selected when using
several PVMaster devices for the low-voltage windings of a common trans-
former.
2. This configuration text box is used to set the communication address of

an InterCOM node (node ID) in an InterCOM device network. Each Inter-
COM node must be assigned a unique node ID within an InterCOM device
network. Multiple assignment of a node ID within a local InterCOM device
network is not permitted. A node ID between 1 and 10 can be set in the
configuration text box. If 0 is set for the node ID, then the InterCOM device
intercommunication is deactivated. After the node ID has been changed,
the new setting must be saved (section 4.2.7, p. 26) and a device restart
(section 4.2.8, p. 26) implemented.
NOTE
It is also possible to change the InterCOM node ID via the 7-segment display
and buttons of the base device in the PVMaster enclosure (see section 5.1.3,
p. 243).

as of Fitter 3. This selection box (Tab. 4.27, p. 202) is used to configure or assign the
master functions for active synchronisation or for active special infeed op-
eration mode “Single MPPT mode” in the InterCOM device intercommunica-
tion. Assignment can be either static or dynamic.
NOTE
The configuration of the master function within a local InterCOM device net-
work must be either static or dynamic. A mixture of static and dynamic assign-
ment of master functions within a local InterCOM device network is not permit-
ted.
NOTE
When using the standard infeed operation, the use of static master-slave as-
signment for InterCOM nodes is recommended within a local InterCOM device
network.
NOTE
In the special infeed operation mode "Single MPPT mode", all InterCOM nodes
should be configured with the dynamic master assignment to ensure an opti-
mal "rolling" operation of the master function and the connection/disconnection
sequence.
as of Fitter Tab. 4.27: Selection box “Master configuration”

Option Description
If the "Slave" option is selected for an InterCOM node,
then this InterCOM node will never take over any master
functions in the InterCOM device network. In this case,
the active operation of this InterCOM node is always de-
pendent on at least one InterCOM node in the InterCOM
0 Slave device network being active in the master function. Any
number of InterCOM nodes can be assigned the static
slave function in an InterCOM device network. However,
there must always be one InterCOM node that carries
out the master function within the local InterCOM device
network.
When this option is selected, this InterCOM node always
takes over the master function within the InterCOM
device network and therefore the coordination of the
synchronisation and the special infeed operation mode
"Single MPPT mode", if activated. Only one InterCOM
node can be assigned the static master function within a
1 Master static local InterCOM device network. All the other InterCOM
nodes in the local InterCOM device network must be
configured as static slaves. If several InterCOM nodes
are configured as static masters within a local InterCOM
device network, the fault state (ID 02/01, Tab. 4.31,
p. 224) will be triggered in all InterCOM nodes (see
section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).

Option Description
Selecting the dynamic assignment of the master function
enables rolling operation of the master function within a
local InterCOM device network. The assignment of the
master function occurs here dependent on a configura-
ble condition.
This configuration should be used particularly in the spe-
2 Master dynamic cial infeed operation mode "Single MPPT mode". When
using this infeed operation mode, the assignment of
the master function is dependent on the operating state
and the energy values achieved so far by the respective
InterCOM node. The current InterCOM master switches
into the active infeed operation as the first InterCOM
node in this operation mode.
4. The InterCOM device intercommunication baud rate is selected in this se-
lection box. The values set for the baud rate must be identically configured
for each InterCOM node in a local InterCOM device network.
NOTE
By default, the preset value for the baud rate is 500 k. Changing this value
is normally not necessary or useful. A reduction in the baud rate may only be
necessary in some exceptional cases (e.g. longer line lengths of the InterCOM
wiring).
Three tab options (5), (6), (7) and (8) are available in the lower section of the
user interface.

as of Fitter 4.3.4.5.1 Administration of the InterCOM device list

The first tab option “InterCOM device list” (Fig. 4.76) is used to administrate the
InterCOM nodes in a local InterCOM device network and to display the actual
state of the InterCOM device intercommunication.
3 1
5
6
Fig. 4.76: T
ab “InterCOM device list” in the menu option “InterCOM” of the
menu group “Configuration”
1. The communication states of the individual InterCOM nodes in the local
InterCOM device network are displayed in these status fields. The active
communication state of all InterCOM nodes is a condition for the correct
implementation of InterCOM device list (4) identification (3).
REFERENCE
The InterCOM device intercommunication wiring (see information in PVMaster
installation manual) and the InterCOM communication settings in the upper
section of the user interface must be correctly implemented for each InterCOM
node so that InterCOM communication is functional and the status fields dis-
play the corresponding state.
2. The synchronisation state of the respective InterCOM nodes is correspond-

ingly displayed in these status fields. These status field displays are usu-
ally only visible when the InterCOM mode “InterCOM + synchronisation” is
activated.
The active communication state of the InterCOM node in (1) is a necessary
condition for functional synchronisation of that InterCOM node. In addition,
synchronisation of the InterCOM node usually only occurs when at least one
InterCOM node has been assigned a master function (static or dynamic).

3. If the active communication state of all InterCOM nodes in the local In-
terCOM device network is displayed in (1), then pressing the “InterCOM
identification” button implements the identification of all InterCOM nodes
in the local InterCOM device network. Following identification, all identified
InterCOM nodes are displayed in the device list (4).
as of Fitter 4. The InterCOM device list is displayed here. All InterCOM nodes that were
identified during the last InterCOM device identification using this button (3)
are displayed. All InterCOM nodes displayed in the list are accompanied by
data regarding the corresponding InterCOM communication address (node
ID) and the rated power of the InterCOM node. In addition, the InterCOM
master assignment is also shown in the list.
REFERENCE
If some InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device network are not correct-
ly identified by the InterCOM identification, the wiring of the InterCOM device
intercommunication and the line terminations with the appropriate terminat-
ing resistors (see information in the PVMaster installation manual) should be
checked, as should the InterCOM communication setting configurations of all
InterCOM nodes.
5. Once the device list is successfully identified, the identified data of the Inter-
COM nodes must be saved in the settings of all InterCOM nodes. To do this,
press the “Save” button in the “InterCOM device list” tab. Once this button is
pressed, the determined InterCOM node data are transferred in a broadcast
via the InterCOM device intercommunication to all InterCOM nodes and
saved there permanently.
NOTE
The software release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) must be deactivated in
every InterCOM node so that the identified InterCOM device list can be cor-
rectly saved in the other InterCOM nodes.
6. Once the identified InterCOM devices have been saved, a corresponding

state display is shown in this status field. The active state of this status field
is a necessary condition for the connection and active infeed operation of
the InterCOM node.
NOTE
The status field does not show the identification state of all InterCOM nodes,
but only that an identified InterCOM device list has been saved in the local
InterCOM nodes. If the saving process using the button (5) could not be imple-
mented for another InterCOM node (e.g. because a software release switch is
active (section 4.2.5, p. 24)), this is not displayed via this status field.
NOTE
Each time a new InterCOM node is added to a local InterCOM device network,
the device list must be updated using the InterCOM identification. If a new In-
terCOM node is added to a local InterCOM device network, but is not present
in the latest saved InterCOM device list, then the fault error (ID 02/03, Tab.
4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) will be triggered in each InterCOM
node within the local InterCOM device network.

NOTE
The device list must also be updated using the InterCOM identification when
an InterCOM node is removed from the local InterCOM device network or
permanently switched off. Otherwise, if an InterCOM node is not registered in
the InterCOM device list using the InterCOM device intercommunication within
the timeout period, all InterCOM nodes will go into the fault state (ID 02/04,
Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221) after a timeout of one hour
has elapsed.
as of Fitter 4.3.4.5.2 Optional InterCOM functions

The second tab option “InterCOM functions” (Fig. 4.77) is used to activate
functional communication objects. These communication objects enable the
broadcasting of digital and/or analogue input function states for use by the other
InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device network.
The communication objects that can be activated are described in Tab. 4.28,
p. 207 and are activated/deactivated by pressing the corresponding activation
fields.
ATTENTION
Each optional communication object may only be activated once within the
entire local InterCOM device network. If an optional communication object is
sent as a broadcast by several nodes, all InterCOM nodes in the local Inter-
COM device network will go into the fault state (ID 02/02, Tab. 4.31, p. 224,
see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
Fig. 4.77: T
ab “InterCOM functions” in the menu option “InterCOM” of the menu
group “Configuration”

as of Fitter Tab. 4.28: Optional InterCOM communication objects

If the temperature of an external transformer is
measured and evaluated (see section 4.3.4.4.3.1,
p. 193), the other InterCOM nodes in the local
InterCOM device network can be informed about the
actual temperature value by using this broadcast
communication object. This enables the monitoring
Transformer
0 of the transformer temperature, and implementation
temperature
of current derating if temperatures are too high, by
all InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device
network. The transformer temperature value is then
also displayed in the menu option "InterCOM" of the
menu group "Status and Values" (section 4.3.2.2,
p. 48).
If Limit functions are used for infeed/grid security
management NSM; (section 4.3.4.2.5, p. 141), then
the other InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM
device network can be informed about the preset
Power reduc-
maximum power value in per cent so that the other
1 tion (by grid
devices can also reduce their power accordingly.
operator)
The respective maximum preset power value in
per cent is then also displayed in the menu option
"InterCOM" of the menu group "Status and Values"
(section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).
Various signals used for plant monitoring via digital
inputs (section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166) can be broadcast
to every InterCOM node in the local InterCOM device
network via this broadcast communication objects
MVS switching for further use. The corresponding functions of the
state... respective input function (see Tab. 4.19, p. 168,
2 ... 17
Q-V protection section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166) are then implemented
device by all InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device
network (e.g. fault triggering, state display, etc.).
The respective states are then also displayed in the
menu option "InterCOM" of the menu group "Status
and Values" (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).
If setpoints are specified for the static voltage stabili-
sation (reactive power control, see section 4.3.4.3.1,
p. 147) via digital inputs of the local InterCOM
node, these broadcast communication objects can
be activated to inform the other InterCOM nodes in
Reactive
the local InterCOM device network about the signal
power sig-
states of the digital inputs used. By appropriately
18 ... 21 nal 1 …
configuring the static voltage stabilisation (sec-
Reactive pow-
tion 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147) these InterCOM nodes can
er signal 4
then also implement setpoints accordingly in order to
participate in the static voltage stabilisation. The re-
spective states are then also displayed in the menu
option "InterCOM" of the menu group "Status and
Values" (section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).

If setpoints are specified for the static voltage stabili-
sation (reactive power control, see section 4.3.4.3.1,
p. 147) via digital inputs of the local InterCOM
node, these broadcast communication objects can
be activated to inform the other InterCOM nodes in
the local InterCOM device network about the signal
Reactive
states of the digital inputs used. By appropriately
22 power ana-
configuring the static voltage stabilisation (sec-
logue signal
tion 4.3.4.3.1, p. 147) these InterCOM nodes can
then also implement setpoints accordingly in order to
participate in the static voltage stabilisation. The ana-
logue value is then also displayed in the menu option
"InterCOM" of the menu group "Status and Values"
(section 4.3.2.2, p. 48).
as of Expert 4.3.4.5.3 Synchronisation and “Single MPPT mode”

The third tab option “InterCOM synchronisation” is used to display device set-
tings for synchronisation control and to select the infeed operation mode of the
InterCOM nodes.
2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.78: T
ab “InterCOM synchronisation” in the menu option “InterCOM” of the
menu group “Configuration”
as of Expert 1. The upper section of the tab option “InterCOM synchronisation” is used to
display the actual device settings in configuration text boxes for the control
and monitoring of the InterCOM nodes and to display the actual synchroni-
sation control error in [µs] in a display text box.

NOTE
It is only possible to change the settings for synchronisation control and moni-
toring at the highest user level "Administrator" as this requires an appropriately
high level of expertise.
PVMaster EM only 2. The lower section of the tab option “InterCOM synchronisation” is used to
display and edit the infeed operation mode in a selection box. The infeed
operation mode “Standard” and the special infeed operation mode “Single
MPPT” can be selected here.
REFERENCE
Detailed descriptions of the respective operation modes, information about
connection, wiring and the required safety procedures (particularly for the
Single MPPT mode) can be found in the corresponding PVMaster installation
manual.
NOTE
The selected infeed operation mode must be identical for all InterCOM nodes
in the entire local InterCOM device network. Mixed operation in an InterCOM
device network is not permitted. If the infeed operation mode configurations of
the individual InterCOM nodes are different within an InterCOM device net-
work, then all InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device network will go
into the fault state (ID 02/05, Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1, p. 221).
as of Expert a) The “Standard” infeed operation mode is used when each PVMaster on
PVMaster EM only the DC side is connected to a separate photovoltaic (sub) generator and
the respective PVMaster devices are galvanically isolated from each
other on the AC side in that they are connected to their own and inde-
pendent low-voltage windings of a transformer. In this operation mode,
the switch on/off of the individual PVMaster devices is implemented
fully independently of the other InterCOM nodes, only dependent on the
available DC power of the respectively connected photovoltaic (sub)
generators. Each InterCOM node in the local InterCOM device network
thereby implements its own MPP tracking so that the maximum possible
PV power can be taken from each individual photovoltaic (sub) genera-
tor.
b) The special “Single MPPT” infeed operation mode is used when all
PVMaster devices within a local InterCOM device network are operated
in parallel on the DC and AC side. Galvanic isolation on the AC side be-
tween the PVMaster devices is not necessary, so they can be operated
in parallel on a low-voltage winding of a transformer. All InterCOM nodes
in the local InterCOM device network are connected on the DC side
with a common “large” PV generator. During operation, only the actually
required number of InterCOM nodes are switched on to feed in the PV
power that is available. This special infeed operation mode therefore
enables efficiency-optimised operation of the complete InterCOM device
network. However, only the InterCOM node with the master function im-
plements the MPP tracking within the entire InterCOM device network.
NOTE
If the "Standard" infeed operation mode was activated in the selection box (2),
then the three configuration text boxes (3), (4) and (5) in the tab option "Inter-
COM synchronisation" are hidden.

3. If the special “Single MPPT” infeed operation mode was selected in the
selection box (2), then this configuration text box can be used to set the
upper power threshold in per cent as of which the switch-on of an additional
InterCOM node within the InterCOM device network is requested by the
InterCOM master.
4. If the “Single MPPT” infeed operation mode is activated, then this configura-
tion text box can be used to set the lower power threshold in per cent as of
which the disconnection of an additional InterCOM node within the Inter-
COM device network is requested by the InterCOM master.
5. If the “Single MPPT” infeed operation mode is activated, then this con-
figuration text box determines the maximum power value in per cent of all
InterCOM nodes in the local InterCOM device network in the event that
all InterCOM nodes are not connected and in active infeed operation. The
maximum power is only enabled when all InterCOM nodes in the local
InterCOM device network are in active infeed operation. This power limita-
tion in per cent during partial operation prevents the possibility of the fuses
in the cross-connections of the individual photovoltaic (sub) generators from
triggering.
NOTE
The configuration of the switch on/off thresholds (3) and (4), and the power
limitation for partial operation (5) must be set so that the fuses used in the
cross-connections of the individual photovoltaic (sub) generators are not trig-
gered.
4.3.4.6 String currents

The PVMaster has a CAN interface for evaluating optionally available String
Combiner Boxes (SCBs) with string current measurement. The PVMaster takes
over the necessary CAN master functions in this CAN interface for the evalua-
tion of up to 10 String Combiner Boxes with string current measurement (CAN
slave) Each String Combiner Box has 15 channels for string current measure-
ment.
REFERENCE
A detailed description of the optional SCB with string current measurement
and detailed information about connection to the PVMaster can be found in the
relevant PVMaster installation manual and in the SCB operating instructions.
as of Fitter The menu option “String currents” in the menu group “Configuration” is available
as of user level “Fitter” and is used to activate and configure the evaluation of
connected SCBs via the corresponding CAN interface of the PVMaster.
The upper section of the corresponding user interface (see Fig. 4.79) is used
to display and edit the SCB to be evaluated via the elements (1) to (3). The
remaining area of the user interface is used to display and edit the respective
configurations, and to display the actual state of the SCBs selected in the selec-
tion box (4) via the elements (5) to (13).

3
2 1
4
7 11
10
8 9
12 13
Fig. 4.79: U
ser interface of the menu option “String currents” in the menu group
“Configuration”
as of Fitter 1. The SCBs to be evaluated are activated here via the activation fields. In to-
tal, up to 10 SCBs can be evaluated by a PVMaster. The assignment of the
activation fields “SCB 01” to “SCB 10” corresponds to the set CAN node ad-
dress of the respective String Combiner Box, i.e. the evaluation of the String
Combiner Box with the set CAN node address is activated via the activation
field “SCB 03”.
REFERENCE
The CAN addressing of all connected SCBs must be unique, i.e. each CAN
address may only be assigned once. Further information can be found in the
corresponding PVMaster installation manual or in the SCB operating instruc-
tions.
NOTE
Only the activation fields for the CAN node addresses of the relevant SCBs
that are connected or present should be activated.
NOTE
If there are no SCBs present or connected to the corresponding CAN interface
of the PVMaster, then all activation fields must be deactivated to avoid unnec-
essary fault messages (e.g. ID 25/01 in Tab. 4.31, p. 224, see section 4.3.5.1,
p. 221).

The number of SCBs are displayed in the display text box (3) according to
the actual activation of the SCBs to be evaluated and the correspondingly
activated SCBs are available as elements for selection in the selection box
(4).
All activation fields and therefore the SCBs to be evaluated can be activat-
ed/deactivated simultaneously via the button (2).
2. The activations fields (1) can be simultaneously activated/deactivated via
this button. If all 10 possible SCBs are simultaneously activated with this
button, all 15 string current channels of the SCBs are also activated.
3. Number of SCBs connected to the PVMaster or activated via the activation
fields (1) in a display text box. According to the number of available SCBs
displayed here, the corresponding entries for selection of the SCBs are
available in the selection box (4).
4. Selection box used to select the SCBs to display the corresponding states
and measured values in the user interface, and to display and edit the SCB
configuration settings. Only those SCBs that have been activated via the
activation fields (1) can be selected within this selection box.
5. The activation fields in this area are used to activate the individual string
current channels of the SCBs selected via the selection box (4). Each dis-
play text box shows the actual string current measured value of the respec-
tive string current channel in [mA].
6. This button is used to simultaneously activate/deactivate all activations
fields (5) used to activate the respective string current channels for the
SCBs selected via the selection box (4).
7. The SCBs each have an analogue input for optional evaluation of the ana-
logue signal from an irradiation or wind speed measurement.
REFERENCE
A detailed description of the analogue input of the String Combiner Box with
string current measurement and detailed information about connection can be
found in the SCB operating instructions.
This selection box is used to assign the appropriate function (“Not used”, “Ir-
radiation [W/m²]” or “Wind speed [m/s]”) for the analogue input of the SCBs
selected via the selection box (4).
8. The configuration text boxes are used to scale the analogue value by speci-
fying an offset value at 0 % of the analogue signal and by specifying the end
value at 100 % of the analogue signal.
9. The actual measured value of the analogue input for the SCBs selected via
the selection box (4) is shown in this display text box. The displayed unit is
dependent on the function assignment of the analogue input via the selec-
tion box (7).
10. The SCBs each have a temperature input for optional evaluation of a PT100
temperature sensor.
REFERENCE
A detailed description of the temperature input of the String Combiner Box with
string current measurement and detailed information about connection can be
found in the SCB operating instructions.
This option field is used to display whether a temperature sensor is connect-

ed to the temperature input of the SCB selected via the selection box (4).
11. If a PT100 temperature sensor connected to the temperature input of the
SCB selected via the selection box (4) is evaluated, then the actual temper-
ature value measured is displayed in this display text box in [°C].

12. If there is a malfunction in the communication with the SCB selected via the
selection box (4), the communication error is indicated via this status field. A
detailed state message is shown in the display text box (13).
13. The node state of the SCBs selected via the selection box (4) is shown in
this display text box in clear text. The possible states are listed and de-
scribed in Tab. 4.29, p. 213.
Tab. 4.29: States of the CAN communication with the String Combiner Box
State /
No. Description
plain text message
The communication with the selected SCB
0 CAN node deactivated
was deactivated via the configuration.
CAN node active (opera- The communication with the selected SCB is
1
tional) functional and active.
The device is attempting to set up communi-
cation with the selected SCB and is search-
2 Searching CAN node...
ing for the applicable CAN node with the
corresponding CAN ID (SCB no.).
Communication with the selected SCB
cannot take place as no CAN node with the
3 CAN node not found 1) 2)
corresponding CAN ID (SCB no.) could be
found.
An impermissible device type was identified
when the CAN node information of the CAN
Wrong device type (Devi- node with the CAN node address corre-
4
ceTypeObject 1000h) sponding to the selected SCB (SCB no.) was
read out. Only LTI ReEnergy GmbH String
Combiner Boxes can be connected.
During the start of communication with the
SDO data mismatch at selected SCB, an unexpected response tel-
5
startup egram from the CAN node to a service data
object (SDO) was received.
The CAN node with the node address cor-
responding to the selected SCB (SCB no.)
6 SDO upload failed is not replying to queries via service data
object (SDO) communication. A new start of
the CAN node is requested.
The initialisation of communication with the
CAN node in pre-opera-
7 selected SCB is complete and cyclical com-
tional
munication of the process data will now start.
Timeout error of cyclical monitoring of com-
8 Timeout heartbeat
munication with the selected SCB.
Read IdentityObject
20 Reading device description (Vendor ID)
1018h (Vendor ID)
Read IdentityObject
21 Reading device description (ProductCode)
1018h (ProductCode)
1) Where necessary, check the connection or wiring between the PVMaster device and the
String Combiner Box, as well as the correct termination of the CAN wires with the appropriate
terminating resistors. Detailed information can be found in the corresponding PVMaster
installation manual or in the SCB operating instructions.
2) Where necessary, check the communication settings of the String Combiner Box concerned,
especially the baud rate set there. A baud rate of 50 k should be set. Also check the set CAN
addressing of the SCB in this regard. Detailed information can be found in the corresponding
PVMaster installation manual or in the SCB operating instructions.

State /
No. Description
plain text message
Read IdentityObject
22 Reading device description (Revision)
1018h (RevisionNumber)
Read IdentityObject
23 Reading device description (SerialNumber)
1018h (SerialNumber)
The start process of the CAN node with the
Startup in progress address corresponding to the selected SCB
100
(SDO upload)... (SCB no.) is active and service data are be-
ing uploaded.
1) Where necessary, check the connection or wiring between the PVMaster device and the
String Combiner Box, as well as the correct termination of the CAN wires with the appropriate
terminating resistors. Detailed information can be found in the corresponding PVMaster
installation manual or in the SCB operating instructions.
2) Where necessary, check the communication settings of the String Combiner Box concerned,
especially the baud rate set there. A baud rate of 50 k should be set. Also check the set CAN
addressing of the SCB in this regard. Detailed information can be found in the corresponding
PVMaster installation manual or in the SCB operating instructions.
4.3.4.7 RDT (remote data transmission)

The PVMaster offers the possibility of automatically generating csv files (comma
separated values) with measured values and .csv files with event and fault mes-
sages and transferring them via the integrated FTP client cyclically or event-
oriented to any FTP online server. This data export interface can e.g. be used
when diverse online portal systems need to be used.
The address and the destination path of the FTP destination server can be
freely set. The integrated DNS client implements the name resolution (determi-
nation of the IP address of the FTP destination server from the domain).
REFERENCE
A detailed description of this data export interface and detailed information
about the individual file types and their contents can be found in the corre-
sponding description of the PVMaster export interface.
as of Fitter The menu option “Data transmission” in the menu group “Configuration” is avail-
able as of the user level “Fitter” and the corresponding user interface (Fig. 4.80)
is used to activate, configure and display the state of the integrated DNS and
FTP clients of the PVMaster, as well as to select the file types to be created for
transmission.

1 6
4
2 7
5 8
3
9
10
11
Fig. 4.80: U
ser interface of the menu option “Data transmission” in the menu
1. This activation field is used to activate the functions for the automatic csv
file generation and the cyclical or event-oriented file transmission via the
integrated FTP client.
NOTE
The functions for automatic csv file generation and cyclical or event-oriented
file transmission are deactivated by default in the delivery condition or default
setting of the PVMaster. File generation and file transmission only occur after
the function has been activated via this activation field. Subsequent generation
and transmission of files with previously recorded measured values, events
and faults is not possible!
2. This status field is used to display the actual states of the integrated DNS
and FTP clients. The possible states are listed and described in Tab. 4.30,
p. 217. The states of the integrated DNS and FTP clients are also dis-
played in the relevant symbol of the Start user interface “Overview” (sec-
tion 4.3.1, p. 39)
3. The states of the DNS and FTP clients are displayed as plain text messages
in this display text box.
4. These display text boxes are used to display the number of upload orders
still open, the successfully sent files and failed upload attempts.

NOTE
The PVMaster bridges any temporary disturbed internet connection by inter-
mediate storage of the files to be transferred. The automatically generated files
are subsequently transferred as soon as the internet connection of the PVMas-
ter is restored. However, intermediate storage of the files is only possible up to
a certain number, so there may be corresponding gaps in the data transmis-
sion if the disturbance in the PVMaster internet connection lasts for any length
of time.
5. This button can be used to reset any remaining orders for file transfer and
to delete the applicable files in intermediate storage. The value displayed for
the remaining upload orders in (4) is reset in this case.
Changes as of Expert 6. This selection box is used to display and edit, where necessary, the cycle
time setting of the integrated data logger for the generation of csv data files
(with day history data). Based on the set cycle time, a floating average value
formation of all measured values takes place and this average value is en-
tered in the csv data files. Possible cycle times for average value formation
of the measured values and data entries are 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 min-
utes. A cycle time of 15 minutes is preset for the data logger in the delivery
condition or default setting of the PVMaster.
Changes as of Expert 7. The cycle time of the file generation and corresponding file transfer of the
data files (day history data) via the integrated FTP client is displayed and
edited, where necessary, via this configuration text box in minutes.
The cycle time for file generation must be selected to be higher than the set
cycle time of the data logger using the selection box (6) and should also be
an integral multiple of the data logger cycle time. A cycle time of 60 minutes
is preset for automatic data file generation and file transfer in the delivery
condition or default setting of the PVMaster.
Changes as of Expert 8. The respective delay until a previously failed file transfer is repeated is
shown in seconds and can be edited, where necessary, in this configura-
tion text box. A delay time of 5 seconds is preset in the delivery condition or
default setting of the PVMaster.
9. The “Test upload” button can be used by the user for test purposes to
directly generate a data file and test the file transfer via the integrated FTP
client. After the data file has been generated, it is immediately transferred or
displayed as an additional upload order in the display text box (4). The activ-
ity of the “Test upload” is shown in the status field next to the button.
10. This section is used to display and edit, where necessary, the FTP destina-
tion server address and the authentication data (user and password) for the
automatic file transfer by the integrated FTP client.
NOTE
The FTP destination server and corresponding authentication data are set by
default to use the online portal system of the provider "meteocontrol GmbH" in
the delivery condition or default setting of the PVMaster.
The four configuration text boxes used to configure the FTP destination
server are released for inputs by the user as soon as the activation field
“Change FTP server settings” is activated.

11. These activation fields are used to select the type of files to be generated
for automatic file transfer via the integrated FTP client.
The first activation field “string file” is used to activate/deactivate the auto-
matic generation and file transfer of csv files with measured values from
connected String Combiner Boxes or the corresponding average values
(section 4.3.4.6, p. 210).
The second activation field “meta file” is used to activate/deactivate the
automatic generation and file transfer of csv files with “meteorological”
measured values or corresponding average values (irradiation values,
module temperatures, ambient temperatures, wind speed measured values
and wind direction measured values, section 4.3.2.3.1, p. 52 and sec-
tion 4.3.2.5, p. 77).
The third activation field “info file” is used to activate/deactivate the event-
controlled generation and file transfer of csv files with faults and events that
have occurred. In contrast to the other file types, file generation and transfer
are not implemented cyclically, but event-oriented.
The last activation field “data file” is used to activate/deactivate the auto-
matic generation and file transfer of csv files with standard measured values
(day history data) or corresponding average values (voltages, currents,
power, temperature, energy values, etc.).
REFERENCE
A detailed description about the individual file types and their contents can be
found in the corresponding description of the PVMaster export interface.
Tab. 4.30: States of the DNS and FTP clients

State DNS client FTP client
Ready The DNS client is ready. The FTP client is ready.
The DNS client is implement- The FTP client is active and
Activity ing the name resolution (de- is transferring a file to the
termining the IP address). destination server.
The last file transfer to the
The name resolution was
OK destination server was con-
concluded successfully.
cluded successfully.
Name resolution could not be
implemented. The automatic The file transfer could not be
Error
file transfer could not be implemented.
implemented.
4.3.4.8 External derating (controlled reduction of AC active power)

The PVMaster offers the possibility of reducing the actual AC active power via
its digital inputs by reduction factors that can be set in per cent. To activate
this functionality, at least one digital input must be assigned the corresponding
function (functions 31, 32 and 33 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168, see section 4.3.4.4.1,
p. 166). Up to maximum three digital inputs can be used for setpoint specifica-
tion.
When the digital inputs selected for this function are active, the actual AC active
power value is first frozen (PM) and then the actual AC active power is derated
by the set reduction factor in percent related to this frozen active power value
(PM). If several digital inputs are active simultaneously with the appropriate
function assignment, reduction of the actual AC active power is implemented
with the smallest correspondingly set reduction factor.
The signal states of the correspondingly used digital inputs are displayed in
status word 3 (nos. 13 to 15 in Tab. 4.12, p. 47, section 4.3.2.1, p. 41).

Any change to the signal states represents an “unusual event” and is recorded
by the integrated data logger. The retrieval, display and further processing of
the “unusual events” that have occurred can be easily implemented in the menu
option “Events” of the menu group “Diagnosis” (section 4.3.5.2, p. 229).
1
4
Fig. 4.81: U
ser interface of the menu option “Ext. power derating” in the menu
as of Fitter The menu option “Ext. power derating” in the menu group “Configuration” is
available as of user level “Fitter” and the corresponding user interface (Fig.
4.81) is used for configuration and status display of the functions for externally
controlled AC active Limit.
NOTE
The menu option "Ext. power derating" in the menu group "Configuration" is
only available when at least one digital input of the PVMaster has been as-
signed the appropriate function (functions 31, 32, and 33 in Tab. 4.19, p. 168,
see section 4.3.4.4.1, p. 166). The operator application (web application)
must then be restarted after the applicable function assignment of the digital
inputs.
1. These status files are used to display the signal states of the digital inputs
used for the function of externally controlled AC active Limit. A maximum of
three digital inputs can be used for control and setpoint specification of the
externally controlled AC active Limit. If fewer than three control functions are
used, then the corresponding status field for the unused control signals are
shown in grey.

2. These configuration text boxes are used to display and edit the respective
reduction factors in per cent for the three possible control signals. If fewer
than three control functions are used, then entries cannot be made in the
corresponding configuration text boxes for the unused control signals.
3. The actual AC active power limit in per cent related to the rated active power
of the PVMaster, based on the function of the externally controlled AC active
Limit, is displayed in this display text box. The displayed value is 100% if no
signal is active for the function of the externally controlled AC active Limit.
The display is also available in the user interface “Limit” of the menu sub-
group “Grid” in the menu group “Status and Values” (section 4.3.2.4.3,
p. 65).
4. The actual total active power fed into the grid is displayed here in [kW] in
a display text box. This value represents the total of the three phase active
powers of the PVMaster device (see also section 4.3.2.4.1, p. 61).
4.3.4.9 Parameter editor

as of Expert The menu option “Parameter editor” in the menu group “Configuration” is
normally only available as of user level “Expert” and the corresponding user
interface (Fig. 4.82) is used to display and edit special device parameters which
are otherwise not available via the operator application (web application).
ATTENTION
An incorrect or unintentional manual modification of device parameters via the
parameter editor can negatively affect the PVMaster device operation or per-
manently damage the device and other operating media. Manual modification
of device parameters via the parameter editor should therefore only be imple-
mented in absolutely exceptional cases and only following agreement with LTI
ReEnergy GmbH Support.
NOTE
Manual modification of device parameters via the parameter editor may be lost
following a software update of the device.

1 2
4
Fig. 4.82: U
ser interface of the menu option “Parameter editor” in the menu
1. This selection box is used to select the data type of the device parameter to
be read or edited. The appropriate data type must always first be selected in
this selection box before entering and confirming the Parameter ID and Sub-
ID in the configuration text boxes (2).
NOTE
If an suitable data type is selected in the selection box, the read parameter
value may not be correctly displayed in the display text box (3). Manual modi-
fication of the parameter value via the configuration text box (4) will also be
incorrect in this case.
2. These configuration text boxes are used to specify the ID and Sub-ID of the
device parameters to be read or edited. Following confirmation of the input
via these configuration text boxes, the corresponding parameter is read out
and the result displayed in the display text box (3). The appropriate data
type must always first be selected in this selection box (1) before entering
and confirming the ID and Sub-ID in the configuration text boxes (2).
3. The result of the last device parameter read access following confirmation
of the parameter ID and Sub-ID input via the configuration text boxes (2) is
displayed in this display text box as soon as the “Read value” button has
been pressed.

4. Modification of the device parameter selected via the configuration text

boxes (2) is implemented by entering the required new value in this configu-
ration text box.
Once a valid entry has been made in the configuration text box, the new
value is displayed in the configuration text box and the valid entry is briefly
displayed with a green frame around the configuration text box. In addition,
the “Save” button is visually enabled to indicate to the user that a change to
the device settings has not yet been permanently saved (see section 4.2.7,
p. 26). The parameter value is then read back and displayed in the dis-
play text box (3).
If the last entry made in the configuration text box was invalid (e.g. outside
the permitted value range or impermissible non-numerical entries), the last
valid value is displayed again and the invalid entry is displayed with a red
frame around the configuration box (until a valid value is entered again).
5. The parameter editor state is displayed as a plain text message in this sec-
tion.
4.3.5 Diagnosis
This menu group contains menu options for performing device diagnoses. This
includes displaying and processing malfunction and event lists, acknowledging
current error states, setting delivery confirmations, displaying recorded status
changes and testing digital outputs.
4.3.5.1 Faults
The user interface for the first menu option “Faults” (Fig. 4.83) in the “Diagnosis”
menu group is used to display the entire malfunction history in a tabular view.
New (unread) fault messages can be confirmed (delivery confirmations) and
error states currently active can be acknowledged manually. The device set-
tings for automatic acknowledgement of malfunctions are displayed and can be
changed.

1 4
6 3
5 7 8 9
Fig. 4.83: U
ser interface for the “Faults” menu option in the “Diagnosis” menu
group
1. Symbol with display text box for displaying the current number of new (not
yet confirmed) fault messages. The value displayed here corresponds to the
number of fault messages in the table field (2) for which the activation field
in the “Confirmed” column is not active. Clicking on the button (3) marks
all the fault messages as “...confirm all” and the value displayed for uncon-
firmed fault messages is reset to zero.
This display is also available in the “Overview” start user interface (see ele-
ment (4) in Fig. 4.9, p. 39, section 4.3.1, p. 39)
2. The entire history of malfunctions that have occurred to date and any cur-
rently active malfunctions are displayed in this table field. The individual
fault messages are listed sorted according to the respective time stamps
of the fault messages, where the entry at the top represents the last active
malfunction or the malfunction currently active, as applicable.
The first two columns within the table field display the respective time stamp
of the fault message (date and time of occurrence of the malfunction). The
third and fourth columns are used to display the respective error number
(ID) and error location (“Location”/Loc) of the fault messages. The fifth
column shows the respective plain text description of the malfunction. The
final “Confirmed” column contains the display of activation fields. If entries
in the malfunction history are already known and if these have already been
confirmed as “delivered” with the button (3), the activation fields indicate this
accordingly.

Fault message entries already known about or confirmed as “delivered” are

displayed in grey in the table field. New fault message entries or entries not
yet confirmed as “delivered” are displayed in orange. Faults that are cur-
rently active are displayed in red.
NOTE
If an error state is currently active, the error number and error location of the
cause of the malfunction is also indicated by means of the 7-segment displays
of the basic device in the PVMaster enclosure (section 5.1.1, p. 238).
The possible fault messages of the PVMaster are listed in Tab. 4.31,
p. 224 with specification of the respective error number, the respective er-
ror location and the corresponding plain text message.
NOTE
The last 100 fault messages are retained and displayed in the data memory
for retrieval. Older fault messages will be rejected by the PVMaster device and
can therefore not be retrieved via the operator application.
3. All fault message entries in the table field can be confirmed as “delivered”
with this button. When the button is pressed, all fault messages in the
“Confirmed” column are marked accordingly and the value displayed for the
number of unconfirmed fault messages (1) is reset to zero.
4. The fault messages shown in the table field (2) can be saved to the local
PC in a .csv file. This button opens a file browser on the local PC in order to
specify a destination location and file name for the .csv file.
5. If the device is currently in an error state, the error state can be acknowl-
edged manually with this button if the cause of the malfunction no longer
exists. Following the manual acknowledgement, the number of automatic
acknowledgement processes recently performed (6) is also automatically
reset.
6. The number of automatic acknowledgement processes recently performed
is displayed here in a display text box. When this counter value reaches the
value set in (8), there is no further automatic acknowledgement of the error
state. If operation proceeds uninterrupted with no malfunctions, the counter
value displayed here is reset on expiry of the time period set in (9).
Changes from Expert 7. Configuration text box for displaying and configuring (from “Expert” user lev-
el upwards) the delay time for automatic acknowledgement of error states
in [s]. The device is sent into an error state in the event of a malfunction. If
the cause of the malfunction no longer exists, the error state is automatically
acknowledged on expiry of this period and the device is reconnected.
8. Configuration text box for displaying and configuring (from “Expert” user
level upwards) the maximum number of automatic acknowledgement pro-
cesses. When the counter for automatically completed acknowledgement
processes (6) reaches the value set here, no further faults are acknowl-
edged automatically.
9. Configuration text box for displaying and configuring (from “Expert” user
level upwards) the time period for resetting the acknowledgement counter
(6). If no malfunctions that trigger an error state in the device occur within
the time period set here, the counter indicating the automatically completed
acknowledgement processes (6) is reset.

Tab. 4.31: Possible fault messages

Error num-
Error
ber Error text/description
group
ID Loc
00 Unknown fatal error
01 Error while power stage initialisation
02 Illegal PWM duty cycle value detected
03 TriCore FPU, Error in floating point unit
04 Invalid phase switching time
Fatal error 00 05 Powerstage identification error of Rid1
06 Powerstage identification error of Rid2
07 Powerstage identification error
08 Run time error
09 TLI powerstage configuration is not supported
10 Powerstage data conflict with firmware
00 Unknown Parameter error
01 Error in current monitoring initialisation
02 Error in control initialisation
03 Parameter initalisation failed
Parameter 04 Parameter virgin initalisation failed
01
error 05 Parameter check failed
06 Illegal IO parameterization
07 Calibaration parameter initalisation failed
PWM lock mode (LVRT) not allowed without sep.
08
sequence current control
00 Unknown InterCOM error
01 InterCOM: duplicate master activation
02 InterCOM: duplicate function activation
03 InterCOM: device list is not valid
04 Dummy 4 (old:InterCOM device is missed)
InterCOM master-slave mode configuration not
InterCOM 05
02 valid
error
InterCOM master control inactive (no DC voltage
06
control)
07 InterCOM BUSOFF error
08 InterCOM synchronization lost
09 InterCOM SYNC telegramm timeout
10 InterCOM SYNC data telegramm RX timeout
Undervolt- 00 Unknown undervoltage error
03
age error 01 Undervoltage detected
00 Unknown overvoltage error
01 Overvoltage (hardware) detected
02 Dc-link voltage too high for enable operation
Overvoltage 04 03 Overvoltage (software) detected
04 Voltage in a half of DC-link below active limit
DC-link voltage imbalance out of limit (active
05
power stage)

Error num-
Error
group
ID Loc
00 Unknown overcurrent error
01 Overcurrent (hardware) detected
02 Overcurrent (hardware) detected
03 Overcurrent (software) detected
04 Overcurrent (ADC value) detected
05 Overcurrent PS2 (hardware) detected
Overcurrent 05 Overcurrent PS2 (hardware) while pre enable
06
check detected
Maximum negative DC current exceeded (check
07
polarity of DC connection)
Overcurrent (hardware) detected by Uce monitor-
08
ing
Overcurrent PS2 (hardware) detected by Uce
09
monitoring
00 Unknown overtemperature error inverter
01 Overtemperature heatsink inverter detected
02 dT/dt overtemperature heatsink inverter detected
03 Overtemperature device detected
04 Overtemperature choke detected
05 Overtemperature transformer detected
06 Overtemperature cabinet detected
07 Overtemperature extern detected
08 Overtemperature detected (thermal element)
Overtemperature 2nd heatsink inverter / DC link
Overtem- 09
06 capacitor detected
perature
dT/dt overtemperature 2nd heatsink inverter / DC
10
link capacitor detected
11 Overtemperature transformer ambient detected
12 Overtemperature cabinet ambient detected
13 Overtemperature station interior detected
14 Overtemperature outdoor detected
15 Overtemperature main combiner box 1 detected
I2-t power 00 Unknown error I2t-Device

stage pro- 07
tection 01 I2t power amplifier detected
00 Unknown error
Run time
08 01 Timing error ms Interrupt
error
02 Timing error Control Interrupt

Error num-
Error
group
ID Loc
00 Unknown error grid
01 Grid voltage out of range
02 Grid frequency out of range
03 Timeout while grid synchronisation
ADC values for grid current measurement out of
Grid error 09 04
range
GRID_MON: grid voltage below LVRT-limit (line
05
voltage ph2ph)
GRID_MON: grid voltage below LVRT-limit
06
(phase voltage)
00 Unknown error
01 External error by digital input
02 External error by isolation check
03 External overvoltage error
04 External fuse error
05 Motor protection switch error
06 Ground fault current to high(GFDI) or blown fuse
07 External error LVS overvoltage
External 08 External error LVS switch
10
error 09 External error LVS fuse
10 External error LVS overcurrent
11 External error MVS switch
12 External error Transformer
13 External error grid protection
14 External error QV relais
15 External grid error
IO interface: 24V supply droped or overload
16
(overtemperature)
00 Unknown error
01 Timeout AC contactor
PV error 11
02 Timeout contactor 2
03 Calibration state of DC current sensor not okay
00 Unknown error chopper resistance
Chopper 01 Error chopper resistance detected (hardware)
12
error 02 Error chopper resistance detected (hardware)
03 Overload chopper resistance
00 Unknown RTC error
01 Read or write error on SSI
RTC error 13
RTC time data invalid, RTC supply under limit
02
since last set of RTC
00 Unknown external ADC error
External
14
ADC error
01 Read or write error on SSI

Error num-
Error
group
ID Loc
00 GRID_MON: Unknown error
GRID_MON: Grid voltage too low (switch-on
01
condition)
GRID_MON: Grid voltage too high (switch-on
02
condition)
GRID_MON: Grid frequency too low (switch-on
03
condition)
GRID_MON: Grid frequency too high (switch-on
04
condition)
05 GRID_MON: Grid voltage too low (1)
06 GRID_MON: Grid voltage too low (2)
07 GRID_MON: Grid voltage too high (1)
08 GRID_MON: Grid voltage too high (2)
Grid moni- 09 GRID_MON: Grid voltage average too low
15
toring error 10 GRID_MON: Grid voltage average too high
11 GRID_MON: Grid frequency too low (1)
12 GRID_MON: Grid frequency too low (2)
13 GRID_MON: Grid frequency too high (1)
14 GRID_MON: Grid frequency too high (2)
15 GRID_MON: Illegal frequency step
16 GRID_MON: Illegal DC current injection
GRID_MON: Grid frequency exceeded random
17
limit (static freq. stabilization)
GRID_MON: Grid voltage exceeded imbalance
18
limit
GRID_MON: Phasing of grid voltages exceeded
19
limit
20 GRID_MON: Current in phase below activ limit
00 Unknown error control
Error in ICON mode => DC-link voltage below
01
minimum value!
Error in ICON mode => DC-link voltage exceeds
02
maximum value!
Error in VFCON mode => Danger! External grid
03
Control ON!
16
error Current rms values exceeded maximum imbal-
04
ance limit
DC voltage imbalance (filtered) out of limit (active
05
power stage)
06 DC voltage imbalance (filtered) out of limit
DC voltage imbalance control long time at limita-
07
tion
00 Unknown error Vdc observer
DC-link volt- Error in Vdc observer module => value for DC-
01
age observ- 17 link capacitance is not allowed!
er error Error in Vdc observer module => value for ob-
02
server method is out of range!
00 Unknown datalog error
Datalogger
18 01 Buffer overflow datalog
error
02 Buffer overflow temporary datalog

Error num-
Error
group
ID Loc
00 Unknown current monitor error
RCM error 19 01 Residual current monitor
02 Global residual current monitor
00 Unknown ENS-Controller error
Error in Software or Data Download to ENS-
01
ENS error 20 Controller
Error in Software or Data Download to ENS-
02
Controller
00 GRID_MON_ENS: Unknown error
GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too low (switch-
01
on condition)
GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too high (switch-
02
on condition)
GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too low
03
(switch-on condition)
GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too high
04
(switch-on condition)
05 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too low (1)
06 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too low (2)
07 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too high (1)
08 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage too high (2)
Grid moni- 09 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage average too low
toring ENS 21 10 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid voltage average too high
error 11 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too low (1)
12 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too low (2)
13 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too high (1)
14 GRID_MON_ENS: Grid frequency too high (2)
15 GRID_MON_ENS: Illegal frequency step
16 GRID_MON_ENS: Illegal DC current injection
GRID_MON_ENS: Unintended islanding opera-
17
tion
GRID_MON_ENS: Ground fault current to high
18
(GFDI) or blown fuse
19 GRID_MON_ENS: GFDI selftest error
20 GRID_MON_ENS: Error AC main contactor
21 GRID_MON_ENS: Error 2. main contactor
22 GRID_MON_ENS: RCM fault
00 Unknown ENS communication error
COM_ENS: Number of CRC errors on ENS RX
01
exceeded
COM_ENS: Number of communication watchdog
02
errors on ENS RX exceeded
ENS com- COM_ENS: Number of CRC errors on TC RX
03
munication 22 exceeded
error COM_ENS: Number of communication watchdog
04
errors on TC RX exceeded
COM_ENS: Error at switch to calibration com
05
mode
COM_ENS: ENS has been reset after normal
06
communication was initiated

Error num-
Error
group
ID Loc
00 Unknown insulation error
Insulation monitoring: Timeout switch on condi-
01
tion
02 Insulation monitoring: illegal insulation resistance
Insulation monitoring: insulation resistance too
Insulation 03
23 low
error
Insulation monitoring: electrical grounding resist-
04
ance too high
05 Insulation monitoring: device error
06 Insulation monitoring: interface error
07 Insulation monitoring: configuration error
00 Unknown CAN error
CAN error 24 01 CAN mapping error
02 CAN guarding error
00 Unknown SCB error
01 CAN Master BUSOFF error
SCB error 25
SCB: Node communication error (timeout SCB
02
heartbeat)
00 Unknown insulation error
Insulation monitoring: Timeout switch on condi-
01
tion
Insulation
02 Insulation monitoring: illegal insulation resistance
error 26
Insulation monitoring: insulation resistance too
(warning) 03
low
Insulation monitoring: electrical grounding resist-
04
ance too high
00 Unknown warning
Warning 27 01 Warning: malfunction of internal fans
02 InterCOM device is missed
4.3.5.2 Events
The third status word (Tab. 4.12, p. 47) contains the statuses of special
device functions (see section 4.3.2.1, p. 41). Changes to some of these sta-
tuses are described as “unusual events” (marking 1.) in Tab. 4.12, p. 47) and
recorded by the integrated data logger.
The user interface for the “Events” menu option (Fig. 4.84) in the “Diagnosis”
menu group is used to display and process the entire history of “unusual events”
in a tabular view. New (unread) event messages can be confirmed (delivery
confirmations).
NOTE
The last 100 event messages are retained in the data memory for retrieval.
Older event messages are automatically rejected by the device and can no
longer be retrieved via the operator application.

1 4
Fig. 4.84: U
ser interface for the “Events” menu option in the “Diagnosis” menu
group
1. Symbol with display text box for displaying the current number of new (not
yet confirmed) fault messages. The value displayed here corresponds to the
number of event messages in the table field (2) for which the activation field
in the “Confirmed” column is not active. Clicking on the button (3) marks all
the event messages as “...confirm all” and the value displayed for uncon-
firmed event messages is reset to zero.
This display is also available in the “Overview” start user interface (see ele-
ment (5) in Fig. 4.9, section 4.3.1, p. 39).
2. The entire history of “unusual events” that have occurred to date is dis-
played in this table field. The individual event messages are listed sorted
according to the respective time stamps of the event messages, where the
entry at the top represents the last event that occurred.
The first two columns within the table field display the respective time stamp
of the event message (date and time of occurrence of the event). The third
column shows the respective plain text description of the event. The final
“Confirmed” column contains the display of activation fields. If entries in the
event history are already known and if these have already been confirmed
as “delivered” with the button (3), the activation fields indicate this accord-
ingly.
Event message entries already known about or confirmed as “delivered” are
displayed in grey. New event message entries or entries not yet confirmed
as “delivered” are displayed in orange.

If a corresponding status in the third status word (elements in Tab. 4.12,

p. 47 marked with 1.)) changes and if the status becomes active (logically
“true”), the plain text display is prefixed with a “(+)”. If this status changes
again and the status becomes inactive (logically “false”), the plain text dis-
play is prefixed with a “(-)”.
3. All event message entries in the table field can be confirmed as “delivered”
with this button. When the button is pressed, all event messages in the
“Confirmed” column are marked accordingly and the value displayed for the
number of unconfirmed event messages (1) is reset to zero.
4. The event messages shown in the table field (2) can be saved to the local
PC in a .csv file. This button opens a file browser on the local PC in order to
specify a destination location and file name for the .csv file.
4.3.5.3 State
The meaning of the first and second status words (Tab. 4.10, p. 43 and Tab.
4.11, p. 46) was described in detail in section 4.3.2.1, p. 41. They contain
statuses and release conditions for the internal operating cycle controller. All
changes within status word 1 or status word 2 are recorded on the microSD
card by the internal data logger.
The user interface for the “State” menu option (Fig. 4.85) facilitates the retrieval,
display and further processing of all recorded status changes within these
status words for a definable time period, thus allowing detailed diagnoses of the
operating cycle.
NOTE
A maximum total of the last 1000 status changes to the first two status words
is retained in the data memory for retrieval. Entries with older status changes
are automatically rejected by the device and can no longer be retrieved via the
operator application.
1. The required time period for which the recorded status changes of the
PVMaster device are to be displayed is selected here. The “Start” and “End”
date for the required time period can be selected and configured either via
the respective calendar function or by means of manual entries within the
configuration text boxes.
2. The status changes shown in the tab options (4) for the time period selected
via (1) can be saved to the local PC in a .csv files. This button opens a file
browser on the local PC in order to specify a destination location and names
for the .csv files.
3. Once the user interface has been opened via the “State” menu option, there
is no further automatic updating of the displayed status changes once new
status changes have been recorded by the integrated data logger. This but-
ton can be used to update the displayed status changes.

1 2 3
Fig. 4.85: U
ser interface for the “State” menu option in the “Diagnosis” menu
group

Fig. 4.86: “Statusword 2” tab option in the “State” menu option

4. The user interface for the “State” menu option contains a display of the
changes to status word 1 and status word 2 for the selected time period in
two separate tab options: the first tab option “Statusword 1” (Fig. 4.85) and
the second tab option “Statusword 2” (Fig. 4.86).
5. The time stamp is displayed in this table field as the date and time of the
respective status change in the first column. The second column shows the
respective decimal value for the status word. This table field is “scrollable”
depending on the number of status changes in the time period selected via
(1).
6. The respective status changes to the status word are displayed in a binary
field format in this area. For this, a column is provided for each bit of the
status words. In the case of an active bit (logically “true”), a “1” is displayed
in the corresponding field, as a result of which this field is then displayed
in green. In the case of an inactive bit (logically “false”), a “0” is displayed
in the corresponding field, as a result of which this field is then displayed
in red. The layout of the columns and their designations are identical to the
logical structure of the status words (see Tab. 4.10, p. 43 and Tab. 4.11,
p. 46).

4.3.5.4 Service
From Fitter The user interface for the “Service” menu option allows a manual functional test
of the digital outputs of the PVMaster device and the corresponding connected
elements. The digital outputs can be switched manually, enabling the functions
(fan, heat exchanger, liquid pump, etc.) to be tested accordingly.
NOTE
The "Service" menu option is only available from the "Fitter" user level. How-
ever, the manual functional test can only be performed when the software
release switch (section 4.2.5, p. 24) is deactivated.
1 2 3
Fig. 4.87: User interface for the “Service” menu option in the “Diagnosis” menu
group
1. Display of the designations for the respective digital outputs of the PV-
Master basic device in display text boxes. This is where not only the digital
outputs available for freely definable use by the user are listed, but also the
digital outputs that are used for internal functions within the device.
2. Display of designations and assignments of digital outputs of the PVMaster
device that are available for freely definable use by the user in display text
boxes. The designation or assignment of the outputs is analogous to the
designations on the corresponding terminal strip in the PVMaster enclosure
(see relevant installation manual for the PVMaster device. If “-” is indicated,
this means that the digital output is used for an internal function of the PV-
Master device.

3. The assigned function of the respective digital output is displayed in these

display text boxes as plain text. The possible functions of the freely defin-
able digital outputs available are described in section 4.3.4.4.2, p. 176.
4. Test operation for manual switching of the individual digital outputs is started
with this button. Active test operation is indicated accordingly by the status
field within the button. The individual buttons (5) for manual operation of the
respective digital outputs are only released in active test operation. If test
operation is deactivated by pressing the “Test operation” button again, all
manually operated digital outputs are automatically reset with the buttons
(5).
NOTE
This button is only released when the software release switch (section 4.2.5,
p. 24) is deactivated. Test operation cannot be started during active active
infeed operation.
5. If test operation has been activated with the button (4), the 10 buttons for
manual operation of the respective digital outputs are enabled and can be
operated. The respective switching states of the digital outputs are indicated
via the corresponding status fields within the respective buttons.
NOTE
The function of the DO09 digital output for actuating the AC main contactor
can only be tested manually if the AC main switch has been switched on and
the internal grid monitoring is released for connection. Furthermore, the DC
voltage must be of a minimum value.


Use of 7-segment displays and buttons
5 7-segment displays and buttons

The basic device in the PVMaster has two 7-segment displays and two buttons.
The 7-segment displays can be used in connection with the 2 buttons in order to
be able to use the functions listed in Tab. 5.1 without the operator application.
Tab. 5.1: Functions of 7-segment displays and buttons

The 7-segment displays normally display the
Display of current operating operating state of the device. The possible
state of the device operating states are described in detail in sec-
tion 5.1.1, p. 238.
Display of IP address currently set for device
Network settings
and changing the IP address (see section 5.1.2,
(IP address)
p. 241)
Display of device address currently set for In-
Device address for Inter-
terCOM intercommunication and changing this
COM intercommunication
device address (see section 5.1.3, p. 243)
Manual acknowledgement of currently active
Manual malfunction acknowl- error state, where applicable, once the cause of
edgement the malfunction is no longer present (see sec-
tion 5.1.4, p. 244)
Software update via the Initiation of a software update from the microSD
microSD card card (see section 5.1.5, p. 244)
5.1 Use of 7-segment displays and buttons

NOTE
In order to be able to use the functions of the 7-segment displays and buttons,
the control voltage of the device must be active. The enclosure door of the
PVMaster must be opened in order to get access to the 7-segment displays
and buttons. Infeed operation is automatically deactivated when the enclosure
door is open.
As standard, the current operating state of the PVMaster device is displayed

via the 7-segment displays. Further functions from Tab. 5.1 can be executed by
pressing the buttons.
As a rule, the left-hand button is used for navigation, the right-hand button
to confirm or change entries. If the IP address or InterCOM device address
is changed, the left-hand button performs the decrementing function for the
current number to be changed, while the right-hand button performs the incre-
menting function. There is a 5-second wait before an amended number for the
IP address or InterCOM device address is applied. In order to exit the menu or
sub-menus without implementing any changes or functions, simply refrain from
using the buttons for 5 seconds. The 7-segment displays then show the current
operating state again.
PVMaster 7-segment displays and buttons 237

5.1.1 Display of current operating state of the device

The 7-segment displays of the basic device in the PVMaster enclosure normally
indicate the current operating state of the device.
NOTE
The current operating state of the device can also be conveniently displayed in
the operator application. The corresponding plain text displays are also avail-
able here.
Tab. 5.2: Device statuses in the 7-segment displays

No. 7-segment displays State
0 Device in reset state (initialisation of bootloader)
1 Automatic initialisation during start-up of device
1)
2 ↔ State of supply grid OK, waiting time to connection or reconnection active
1) Not ready to switch on: DC voltage too low (Vdc < Vdc_Start), release not com-
3
plete (dot)
1) Not ready to switch on: DC voltage sufficient (Vdc > Vdc_Start), release not
4
complete (dot)
1) Device in an error state that cannot be acknowledged (dot: cause of malfunction
5 → → still active) → fault name → fault description
Device in an error state (can be acknowledged, as cause of malfunction no
6 → → longer present) → error name → error description
1) Device in an error state that cannot be acknowledged due to grid malfunction
7 → → (dot: cause of malfunction still active) → fault name → fault description
Device in an error state due to grid malfunction (can be acknowledged, as cause
8 → → of malfunction no longer present) → error name → error description
9 Standby: DC voltage too low (Vdc < Vdc_Start), release complete (no dot)
Switch-on procedure: DC voltage sufficient (Vdc > Vdc_Start), release com-
10
plete…Waiting time for power measurement active
11 Switch-on procedure: Power measurement currently active
Switch-on procedure: Power measurement was successful, main contactor is
12
connected, then 3 s break
13 MPP tracking active
MPP tracking active, but AC power is negative; after 20 s of negative AC power,
14
the shut-down procedure is initiated
AC power was negative for at least 20 s, power stage thus inactive, main
15 contactor(s) still switched, shut-down procedure with power measurements
started
Power measurements completed, but power too low → shut-down of main
16
contactor(s), then 10 s delay → back to state 2 or 3 "P1"
1)
17 ↔ Characteristic curve measurement (PV generator scan) active
238 7-segment displays and buttons PVMaster

Tab. 5.3: D
evice states in the 7-segment displays on completion of a software
update (firmware and/or bootloader)
Initiation of the software update via the button was registered by the device. The
17 software update is now started. (Display only triggered following initiation of the
software update with the buttons of the basic device)
Software update has been initiated via the buttons of the basic device (display
1)
18 ←→ only triggered following initiation of the software update with the buttons of the
basic device)
19 Bootloader active
Read-only access to parameters (read-only protection is disabled with operating
20
tools or the communication controller)
Firmware update: F2…Deletion of a flash sector is active, F3… Deletion of a
21 ←→ flash sector is complete States F2 and F3 alternate several times, as several flash
sectors have to be deleted.
22 Firmware update: Firmware is transferred and written to the flash
23 Firmware update: Check of checksum (CRC)
24 Firmware update: Checksum correct (CRC)
Firmware update: Firmware information header (CRC, size, start address,
25
magic) is transferred
26 Firmware update: Start of firmware is initiated
27 Transferred package address outside of range (firmware sectors)
Bootloader update: b2…Deletion of a flash sector is active, b3… Deletion of
28 ←→ a flash sector is complete. States b2 and b3 alternate several times, as several
flash sectors have to be deleted.
29 Bootloader update: Firmware is transferred and written to the flash
30 Bootloader update: Check of checksum (CRC)
31 Bootloader update: Checksum correct (CRC)
Bootloader update: Firmware information header (CRC, size, start address,
32
magic) is transferred
Bootloader update: Deletion of a flash sector is active (from here the bootloader
33
only works internally)
34 Bootloader update: Programming of new bootloader
35 Bootloader update: Start of new bootloader
36 Transferred package address outside of range (bootloader sectors)
37 "Magic code" incorrect (firmware or bootloader)
38 Checksum for transferred data invalid (CRC)
39 Writing of a package to the flash memory failed
1)
40 ←→ Writing of data set from the microSD card to the device
1)
41 ←→ Writing of data set from the device to the microSD card
1)
42 ←→ Writing of power stage data set to the device
1)
43 ←→ Writing of customer-specific data set from the microSD card to the device


1) Writing of predefined data set (from data set database) from the microSD card to
44 ←→ the device
1)
45 ←→ Update complete
46 Update failed
47 Bootloader update of communication controller: Update of bootloader
Bootloader update of communication controller: Loading of new bootloader
48
from main controller
49 Bootloader update of communication controller: Check of checksum (CRC)
50 Bootloader update of communication controller: CRC invalid
Bootloader update of communication controller: Deletion of flash sectors for
51
bootloader
Bootloader update of communication controller: Writing of bootloader data
52
from the RAM to the flash
53 Bootloader update of communication controller: Update successful
Firmware update of communication controller: Update of communication
54
software
55 Firmware update of communication controller: Deletion of necessary sectors
Firmware update of communication controller: Writing of new firmware to the
56
flash.
57 Firmware update of communication controller: Check of checksum (CRC)
58 Firmware update of communication controller: CRC invalid
59 Firmware update of communication controller: Update successful
NOTE
When the enclosure door is open, only states 0 to 8 from Tab. 5.2, p. 238
and the states shown in Tab. 5.3 are normally possible, as infeed operation is
automatically deactivated when the enclosure door is open.

5.1.2 Network settings (IP address)

The IP address can be easily displayed via the 7-segment displays using the
two buttons and can be changed as required.
NOTE
The following default IP address is set in the delivery condition:
IP address: 192.168.36.1 (HEX: C0.A8.24.01)
Sub-network: 255.255.255.0
Each of the address ranges in the 7-segment displays is always displayed in

hexadecimal format.
NOTE
Where necessary, use an appropriate calculator to convert decimal numbers to
the requisite hexadecimal format.
Changing the IP address via the 7-segment displays and buttons is particularly
helpful for the first commissioning of PVMaster devices in a system prior to us-
ing the operator application for the first time, especially when using several PV-
Master devices in a shared network (e.g. when using a "network switch"). When
changing the IP address of the device via the 7-segment displays and buttons,
the sub-network settings are automatically modified.
NOTE
The IP address of the PVMaster device can also be easily displayed and
changed (in the standard decimal format) via the operator application. The
user interface for the corresponding menu option in the operator application of-
fers additional configuration options for the network settings, e.g. for managing
a network list containing all of the PVMaster devices available in the network.
Tab. 5.4: D
isplay of current IP address of the inverter via the 7-segment dis-
plays and buttons
Step Description
If necessary, wait 5 seconds until the 7-segment display shows the current operating state again,
1 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
Press the left-hand button repeatedly until the 7-segment display shows the following:
2
Press the right-hand button once to confirm. The 7-segment display now shows each of the 4 num-
ber ranges of the IP address currently set for one second in hexadecimal format (01 = 01 … 255 =
3 FF), e.g. for "192.168.36.1":
→ → →
192 . 168 . 36 . 1
The current operating state of the device is then displayed again automatically, e.g.:
4 1) 1) 1)
or or or or or

Tab. 5.5: C
hanging the IP address of the inverter via the 7-segment displays
and buttons
Step Description
1 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
2
Press the right-hand button once to confirm. The 7-segment display now shows each of the 4 num-
ber ranges of the IP address currently set for one second in hexadecimal format (01 = 01 … 255 =
3 FF), e.g. for "192.168.36.1":
→ → →
192 . 168 . 36 . 1
The left-hand button must be pressed before the consecutive display of the 4 numbers for the cur-
rent IP address is complete (within approx. 5 seconds). The number range to be changed for the
4 IP address is selected by pressing the left-hand button repeatedly. (The IP address consists of 4
number ranges)
→ → → → → ...
Once the number range to be changed (01 to 04) has been selected, this must be confirmed with the
right-hand button. The current setting for the selected number range is now displayed in hexadeci-
5 mal format (01 = 01 … 255 = FF).
...
01 ... 255
The left-hand button can now be used for decrementing, while the right-hand button can be used to
increment the address setting.
6 → → → ...
Left-hand button:
Right-hand button: → → → ...
Once the required setting has been reached by decrementing or incrementing, the setting is adopted
after a waiting time of approximately 5 seconds. The current device state is now displayed again,
7 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the required changes to all four number ranges have been completed.
The new setting becomes effective as soon as the device has been reset (e.g. by temporarily dis-
9
connecting the control voltage).

5.1.3 Device address for InterCOM device intercommunication

For InterCOM intercommunication between several PVMaster devices, a unique
InterCOM communication address (node ID) must be assigned to each PVMas-
ter device. The InterCOM device address is set to 0 as standard in the delivery
condition. The address setting 0 is used if InterCOM intercommunication is not
used.
NOTE
The device address of the PVMaster device for InterCOM intercommunication
between several PVMaster devices can also be displayed and changed con-
veniently via the operator application. The user interface for the corresponding
menu option in the operator application offers additional configuration options,
e.g. for managing a device list containing all of the PVMaster devices available
in an InterCOM network.
Tab. 5.6: D
isplaying and changing the InterCOM device address via the 7-seg-
ment displays and buttons
Step Description
1 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
2
Press the right-hand button once to confirm. The 7-segment display now shows the current Inter-
COM device address (0..10 decimal or 0..0A hexadecimal) for 5 seconds. At the end of the 5 sec-
3 onds, the current device state is displayed again.
...
0 ... 10
The two buttons can be used during the 5-second long display of the device address (step 3) to
change the InterCOM device address. The left-hand button can be used for decrementing, while the
right-hand button can be used to increment the address setting.
4
Left-hand button: → → ...→
Right-hand button: → → ... →

Once the required setting has been reached by decrementing or incrementing, the setting is adopted
5 after a waiting time of 5 seconds. The current device state is now displayed again, e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
The new setting becomes effective as soon as the device has been reset (e.g. by temporarily dis-
6
connecting the control voltage).

5.1.4 Manual malfunction acknowledgement

A manual acknowledgement of any malfunction that may currently be active can
be performed via the 7-segment displays using the two buttons.
NOTE
A manual acknowledgement of any active error state is also easy to perform
via the operator application.
Tab. 5.7: Manual malfunction acknowledgement via the 7-segment displays and
buttons
Step Description
1 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
2
Now press the right-hand button once to complete the manual acknowledgement. Any error state
that may be active is now acknowledged, but only if the cause of the malfunction is no longer pre-
3 sent. The current device state is then automatically displayed again:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
5.1.5 Software update from the microSD card

A software update from the microSD card can be initiated via the 7-segment
displays.
NOTE
The initiation of the software update via the 7-segment displays and buttons
should only be used in exceptional cases. Software updates can normally be
performed easily via the operator application, and correspondingly expanded
diagnosis outputs are also offered in the event of an error.
NOTE
The microSD card must only be removed from or inserted into the card slot of
the basic device when the latter is switched off, as errors in the file system and
a loss of data from the microSD card may occur otherwise.
Prior to initiating the software update from the microSD card with the buttons
of the basic device, the microSD card must be prepared accordingly for the
software update. To this end, the entire content (all folders and files) of the com-
pressed .upa archive file (ZIP format) for the software update "PVM2 00cVx.
xx-xx ParaRevXX_UpdateComplete.upa" (no. 1 in Tab. 4.17, p. 109) is copied
to the microSD card. During the copying process, any existing folders and files
on the microSD card must be overwritten.
ATTENTION
Only folders and files on the microSD card may be overwritten with the folders
and files in the .upa archive file during the copying process. Under no cir-
cumstances may folders or files be deleted from the microSD card first or the
microSD card be formatted, as historical data (e.g. day history data or energy
diagrams) already logged will be lost.

Content of .upa file

Content of microSD card
(ZIP archive)
Copy to
→
Fig. 5.1: Preparation of microSD card for a software update
Once all of the requisite folders and files have been copied to the microSD card,
the microSD card is inserted into the card slot of the basic device again and the
control voltage is switched on again. The software update is then completed as
described in Tab. 5.8.
Tab. 5.8: Initiation of a software update from the microSD card

Step Description
1 e.g.:
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or
2
The right-hand button is now pressed once to initiate the software update from the microSD card.
3 The 7-segment displays now show the following:
The software update is started after a waiting time of 60 seconds. The 7-segment displays then
4 show the following status briefly:
1)
↔
During the software update, the states from Tab. 5.3, p. 239 are shown in the 7-segment displays,
5 e.g.:
→ ... → → → ...
The software update can take a few minutes. Once the software update is complete, the software is
6 started automatically and the current device state is then displayed again.
1) 1) 1)
or or or or or


6 Index
Symbole
7-segment displays and buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 237
AC values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Administration of InterCOM device list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 189
Application memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Authorisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Break operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Browser cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CAN communication to the String Combiner Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 213

Change IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 241
Compact view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuration text box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 25
Connection pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Crossover cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Currency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
PVMaster Index 247

DC values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Destination device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Device address for InterCOM device intercommunication. . . . . . . . . 49, 200, 243
Device restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Device states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 238
Diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 230
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 86, 93, 97, 100, 102
Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 166
Digital outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 176
Display text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 25
Dynamic grid stabilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 69, 118

Error state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 221
Ethernet network cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fan and cooler actuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Frequency stabilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Function assignment of the analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Function assignment of the digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Function assignment of the temperature inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Functions for digital outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Generator scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Grid stabilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
History and statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
248 Index PVMaster

Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infeed/grid security management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Infeed operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 166
Insulation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 136
InterCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 198
InterCOM device address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 200, 243
InterCOM functions, optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 241
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Limit values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Link buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Low voltage ride through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
LVRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Manual malfunction acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 244
Manual setpoint specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 155
Manual setpoint specification via Modbus/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 155
Master configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Menu groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Modbus/TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144, 150, 155
Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 124
Monitoring the insulation or grounding resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 136
Monitoring values for the fan and cooler control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Monitoring values for the threshold functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 241
Network settings (IP address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 241
PVMaster Index 249

Operating state of the device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 238

Operator application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Optional InterCOM functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Parameter editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 141
Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PT100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 211
PV generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Quiescent state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
RDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Reactive power control for static grid voltage stabilization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Reduction of AC active power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 217
Remote data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
250 Index PVMaster

Saving device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Setpoint specifications via digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 150
Setpoint specification via analogue input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 152
Shut-down procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Silverlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Single MPPT mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Software release switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Software update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 244
Software update from the micro SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Start user interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Status and values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Status field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Status traffic light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
String currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 93, 210
Subject area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Switch-on procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Synchronisation and “Single MPPT mode”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
System time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table or characteristic curve function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 152

Temperature inputs (PT100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 193
Threshold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tree menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 32
Tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
User levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Web application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PVMaster Index 251

LTI ReEnergy GmbH
Heinrich-Hertz-Str. 18
59423 Unna
GERMANY
Tel +49 2303 779-0
Fax +49 2303 779-397
reenergy.lt-i.com
pvmaster@lt-i.com
Subject to technical modifications.

181-10062 3-06-2015 HB PVmasterII-III User-Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

181-10062 3-06-2015 HB PVmasterII-III User-Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PVMaster II and PVMaster III

operation and configuration

Component Version Date

1 Notes on the documentation 7

1.1 Annotation practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2.1 Basic safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3.1 General information about the application manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4 Operator application (web application) 13

4.1 Using the operator application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

PVMaster ﻿Table of contents 3

4 ﻿Table of contents PVMaster

4.3.4.4 In-/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5 7-segment displays and buttons 237

5.1 Use of 7-segment displays and buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

PVMaster ﻿Table of contents 5

6 ﻿Table of contents PVMaster

1 Notes on the documentation

1.1 Annotation practices

1.1.1 Safety information and warning notices

This sign acts as a warning of a danger area.

This sign acts as a warning of dangerous electrical voltage levels.

This sign acts as a warning of a hot surface.

This sign acts as a warning of non-ionising electromagnetic radia-

1.1.2 General information

PVMaster Notes on the documentation﻿ 7

1.2 Formatting styles

1.3 Target group

Information on the user levels can be found in section 4.2.2, p. 19.

1.4 Other applicable documents

8 Notes on the documentation﻿ PVMaster

2.1 Basic safety instructions

2.1.1 Before starting work on the PVMaster

2.1.2 During work on the PVMaster

2.1.3 During operation of the PVMaster

2.2 Intended use

3.1 General information about the application manual

3.2 User interfaces of the PVMaster

Tab. 3.1: User interfaces

User interfaces Options and significance

4 Operator application (web application)

4.1 Using the operator application

Tab. 4.1: Minimum requirements for running the operator application

4.1.2 Starting the operator application

PVMaster Operator application (web application)﻿ 13

While the start dialogue is being displayed, there is

If when the start dialogue is displayed the operator application identifies an

14 Operator application (web application)﻿ PVMaster

4.1.2.1 Information about the browser cache and application memory

PVMaster Operator application (web application)﻿ 15

4.1.3 Control elements

Tab. 4.2: Control elements within the operator application

Icons are grey symbols for displaying status

Buttons allow functions to be performed

Link buttons are red symbols with a button

4.1.4 Compact view

16 Operator application (web application)﻿ PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application)﻿ 17

4.2 Operating concept

Fig. 4.2: Operator application user interface

18 Operator application (web application)﻿ PVMaster

4.2.1 Language setting

4.2.2 User levels

PVMaster Operator application (web application)﻿ 19

PVMaster Table of contents 3

4 Table of contents PVMaster

PVMaster Table of contents 5

6 Table of contents PVMaster

PVMaster Notes on the documentation 7

8 Notes on the documentation PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 13

14 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 15

16 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 17

Fig. 4.2: Operator application user interface

18 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 19

20 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 21

22 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 23

24 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 25

26 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 27

28 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 29

30 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 31

32 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 33

34 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 35

36 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 37

38 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 39

40 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 41

42 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 43

44 Operator application (web application) PVMaster

PVMaster Operator application (web application) 45